Brent Jackson's Comic Reviews

Reviewer For: Word Of The Nerd, Comic Watch Reviews: 844
8.0Avg. Review Rating

4.3
Aberrant #1

Jun 14, 2018

I am ragging pretty hard on this issue, but it is more because I feel the story is actually a pretty good concept that just was not executed well in comic book format. The pacing of the story is off and the art just does not have that quality that this series needs. There are a lot of good things in Aberrant #1, like the fantastic clothing detail and an interesting story concept. It is just that the bad far outweighs the good in this instance.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Absolute Carnage (2019) #2

Aug 29, 2019

Absolute Carnage #2 is a solid entry to the event series. There are a ton of tie-ins to this that you may or may not need to check out. This issue alludes to some of them and they are all pretty solid on their own. Note you may want to read this issue before you check those out if you don't want some spoilers.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.5
Actionverse (2017) #1

Sep 7, 2017

Actionverse #1 Stray is a very interesting comic, I love looking back on a hero's past and seeing how he came to be and how it will affect his future, the writing is superb in this Issue. The first five pages of the series will have the reader clamoring for more, but the resulting pages are a bit of a turn off for the series. The story will have me coming back for more, while I hope the art can be improved upon in the next issue or so.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Acts of Evil: Moon Knight Annual #1

Sep 12, 2019

All around, this is a pretty solid one-shot story. Cullen Bunn makes the battle between Moon Knight and Kang interesting and fun, while the art team delivers some delightful visuals of Moon Knight throughout time. Plus I am always happy to get some Moon Knight in my life. We have got some interesting one-shot Moon Knight stories here recently with this and the short story in Marvel Comics Presents #4. We should be getting more on the way, as well, as I have heard rumors about an ongoing comic series in, possibly, December? Plus, obviously, the biggest news of Moon Knight coming to the MCU with his own Disney+ show!

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Aliens: Dead Orbit #2

Jun 2, 2017

With a guy like James Stokoe on a book, you know you are in for a treat. His art is like no one else in the comic book industry and he plays effectively well into the Aliens world. Aliens: Dead Orbit is just scary, gruesome fun that is not to be missed, even if you are not a fan of the Aliens franchise you are going to want to pick this up for the art alone. Each issue is a wonder to open up and a feast for the eyes and Stokoe is a fantastic story teller building up tension and leaving the reader wanting and waiting for more!

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Aliens: Dead Orbit #3

Jul 22, 2017

Aliens Dead Orbit #3 is another fantastic issue in this four issue mini-series. Stokoe understands the Aliens franchise and plays with the Xenomorph characters well. As stated earlier it is a simple "basic" story, but that is the thing if you do the "basics" well they always work and Stokoe is doing them almost perfectly. Things seem to go from bad, to worse, to certain death for Wascylewski and this Issue is no different.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Aliens: Dead Orbit #4

Dec 14, 2017

Aliens Dead Orbit has been a wonderful, horrific series that let James Stokoe loosein the Aliens universe. While the story did not do anything majorly crazy it was successful in telling a very creepy story that played with a lot of the tropes from the Aliens mythos. Stokoe's art shone brilliantly throughout this series and shows why he is one of the best in the business right now. This is a great series for Aliens fans and comic book fans alike!

View Issue       View Full Review
5.8
Almost American #1

Sep 4, 2021

With shows like The Americans and Black Widow recently premiering. Russian spies living in America is like the "thing" right now it feels like. Almost American #1 has a solid hook in actually having the actual spies consult on the series about their lives, but the whole first issue falters in a very uneventful affair.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Amazing Spider-Man (2018) #2

Jul 25, 2018

I haven't been into Spider-Man for quite a long time, but with this new creative team, they have reinvigorated the Wall Crawler! Not that the series was bad before; it is just nice to have a new voice on the series now. The Parker luck has struck again and Peter must pull his life back together. The Spider-Man may be down but he is not out, and he is looking to climb back on top!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Amazing Spider-Man (2018) #17

Mar 14, 2019

Amazing Spider-Man #17 was a great start to this “The Hunted” storyline and really just a fantastic read. Spencer does a superb job with not only the story and plot, but all the characters involved. The art team does a fantastic job as well, delivering some stand out pages. There are a lot of issues coming out for this storyline (it has a checklist) coming out bi-weekly so the artist will change, but if we keep switching between Ramos and Ottley then we are in for a heck of a ride!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Amazing Spider-Man (2018) #17

Mar 14, 2019

Amazing Spider-Man #17 was a great start to this "The Hunted" storyline and really just a fantastic read. Spencer does a superb job with not only the story and plot, but all the characters involved. The art team does a fantastic job as well, delivering some stand out pages. There are a lot of issues coming out for this storyline (it has a checklist) coming out bi-weekly so the artist will change, but if we keep switching between Ramos and Ottley then we are in for a heck of a ride!

View Issue       View Full Review
5.2
Amber Blake #1

Apr 2, 2019

Amber Blake #1, unfortunately, is not a great first issue. It feels like the story tried to stuff way too much into the first issue and it was not paced well enough. Too much is thrown at the reader and nothing really sticks. The art, for the most part, was solid; the change in style toward the end does throw the tone of the issue off, though. Amber Blake #1 has your basic revenge plot thing that has been done a lot. It is not a bad thing, but if you are going to do something that is done to death, you are going to have to have an interesting character or something that set it apart story-wise. Amber Blake #1 has none of that.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Ant-Man (2020) #1

Feb 5, 2020

The issue is a lot of fun to read. The dialogue is clean and crisp and will have you chuckling throughout the issue. The art is fantastic as well. Burnett's energetic animated style and Spicer's wonderful colors does not disappoint visually. For me, though there is just something missing from Ant-Man #1. Something in the story that really grabs you and gets you invested in Scott Lang's adventure?

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Asgardians of the Galaxy #1

Sep 7, 2018

Asgardians of The Galaxy #1 is a fun book; it finds that nice balance between being serious and a little goofy at the same time. Bunn does a great job of pacing this first issue while getting his team together and laying out the drivingforce of the story. The art looks great as well, with some great character work from Lolli and some dynamic colors by Federico Blee. I was not too excited about this series when it was first announced but now I cannot wait until issue #2 comes out!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Atlantis Wasn't Built For Tourists #1

Aug 4, 2020

I am in a bit of a conundrum with Atlantis Wasn't Built for Tourists #1. Delightful sinister/uneasy vibe that was at the start of the story. It had a nice mystery feel to it. It still has a nice mystery feel at the end, as well. The characters are well done and it had a feel like the Wayward Pines television show. The art was also excellent throughout the issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Atlantis Wasn't Built For Tourists #2

Oct 6, 2020

Atlantis Wasn't Built for Tourists #2 continues to build upon its mysteries. I was not sure how this issue would go after the first issue, but it continues to keep the reader engaged and keeps you guessing throughout the story. It also doesn't hurt it is right at Halloween time and this has vampires and monsters in it, to my delight. Atlantis Wasn't Built for Tourists #2 builds upon the mystery of Atlantis, Oregon, and opens up a ton of new developments.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Avengers (2018) #1

May 3, 2018

Overall Avengers #1 is a solid start to a “new” series and a pretty good jumping-on point for new readers. Nothing really crazy or exciting happens; Avengers #1 is more of a getting the gang back together/new threat arrives start of the story. While overall not the most exciting issue ever, Aaron does have me excited to see what comes next in the story and to actually see this “new” “old” group of Avengers come together to battle a threat no one hero could take down.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
Avengers (2018) #2

May 18, 2018

The Avengers #2 is good, but for me, not quite what it could be. While I am enjoying the mystery of the story it feels like it could be cut down a little and tapered. It feels like too many things are going on at once and is not focused. The art is good, but I am not convinced Ed McGuinness is right for this series. Thor's hammer varies from page to page in size and there are a few awkwardly placed panels. It is not that this is bad, there is a lot I like about this series, it is just that it could and should be better than it is.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Avengers (2018) #8

Sep 20, 2018

The Avengers #8 also serves as a great jumping on point for new readers as well. If you haven't been read The Avengers I highly recommend jumping on now with this issue!

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Avengers (2018) #14

Feb 6, 2019

The Avengers #14 had everything I wanted from this storyline. We are dropped right into the vampire civil war and the hunt for Dracula. Aaron toes that nice line of serious yet funny at the same time perfectly. The art from Marquez, Ponsor & Arciniega is just spectacular. I didn't want this issue to be done. As soon as I got to the final page I wanted more immediately, and that is probably some of the best praise I can give to a comic.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Avengers (2018) #15

Feb 21, 2019

Man, I do not know if I can explain in words how much fun I am having reading this Vampire Civil War story arc. From the Shadow of the Unliving characters, to Blade wielding nunchucks and spouting goofy vampire puns, to everyone being concerned about Dracula, this is just too much fun! The Avengers #15 was just a pure pleasure of a comic book to read. Aaron continues to toe perfectly that line of keeping the story serious yet being a little silly at the same time. I can't say enough good things about the art"truly just tremendous work form Marquez and Arciniega once again!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Avengers (2018) #17

Mar 21, 2019

The Kingdom of Vampires storyline has been a ton of fun for me to read. I have enjoyed everything Jason Aaron has done with it throughout this story arc. The Avengers #17 just felt a little too rushed, though. Everything got taken care of just a little bit too easily. The art, as always, looks fantastic and is just a delight. I wish Aaron could have taken one more issue with this storyline to give it what it needed. But the big War of the Realms event is coming up next, so I guess that is why The Avengers #17 had to be wrapped up quickly.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Avengers (2018) #33

May 27, 2020

I am a little hesitant on Avengers #33. I definitely liked it and will be following this storyline, but I did not love it as much I was expecting. Maybe I over-hyped it too much? Or the long layoff didn't help? I just felt a bit underwhelmed by the end of the issue. Nothing was really technically wrong with the issue. The story was fun and intriguing and Aaron got the pieces together to start it off. Plus I did like his writing of Moon Knight. The art is also solid, as well. There are some great sequences in the book and all the character designs are fantastic.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
Avengers (2018) #34

Jul 15, 2020

I just couldn't get into The Avengers #34, which is strange, because I liked the previous issue and I am a big Moon Knight fan. The pacing and storytelling just felt off. The dialogue for Moon Knight and other characters just did not seem to fit, either. The art, while not bad, still didn't feel as connective as the previous issue. It kind of brought down the hype for me for the “Age of Khonshu” storyline some. I am hoping the next two issues will get me back on board.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.4
Avengers (2018) #37

Oct 14, 2020

So, obviously I was not the biggest fan of The Avengers #37 or this “Age of Khonshu” storyline. It wasn't horrible but it also did not live up to the hype I had for it, either. I can't complain too much; this issue did have some werewolves in it, and I can't help but smile seeing Captain America fight mummies and werewolves around Halloween time.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
B.P.R.D.: The Devil You Know #1

Jul 28, 2017

Now I would not jump on this if I had never read a Hellboy story before; because, yes, then you would be totally lost. Having that basic knowledge of what the BPRD organization is is essential. Other than that you can totally jump on this story and have an enjoyable reading experience. This issue feels like the first 30 minutes of a good movie. We have a lot of stuff happening, and I am not really sure what is going on, but I cannot wait to see where the story takes me!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Batgirl (2016) #17

Nov 22, 2017

I was completely surprised by how much I enjoyed this issue, especially jumping on at the end of a story arc. Hope Larson did a fantastic job of conveying the story and getting the major points across throughout the issue and just made it a really enjoyable read; I actually did not even know this was the finale to a story arc until the final page with the credits, for all I knew this was a one-shot story until then, which is a great credit to Hope Larson in my eyes. The art is wonderful and really helps enhance the storytelling with great pacing and cartooning all around. Batgirl #17 was just a good comic book and with the next story being entitled “Home for the Holidays” you bet I am sticking around!

View Issue       View Full Review
6.5
Batgirl (2016) #29

Nov 28, 2018

I can't judge Batgirl #29 on the overall story because I haven't been following along, since I just jumped on this issue. I can say I was still really surprised she was still dealing with the whole Dark Web villain thing. It was, though, all-around a pretty solid comic book. I enjoyed Batgirl struggling with having to go into her surgery and her courage to talk to her dad about being scared more than the whole stopping Grotesque plot. The art was pretty good; again, nothing tremendously stands out as good or bad.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Batgirl (2016) #34

Apr 24, 2019

Batgirl #34 is a solid issue and a pretty good jumping-on point for new readers. I like the plot and storytelling, though some of the internal dialogue may need a little work. The art, for the most part, is stellar as well; a few minor facial expression details, though.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Batgirl (2016) #35

May 22, 2019

Batgirl #35 is a fun issue. I also like that this is a three-issue story arc. It is paced very well. I still have the same complaints from the last issue, but overall, I enjoyed this issue of Batgirl. The “A” “B” & “C” plots all help fill out the issue and make for some interesting developments. I like the Batman '66 type vibe with the villains and deathtraps. All around just a fun comic book read.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Batgirl (2016) #36

Jul 3, 2019

P.S. If you were wondering, I am still indecisive about the Terrible Trio and their masks. On one hand, I do like the campiness of having the group of villains being regular people in masks. It has that nice Batman '66 feel to it. On the other hand, those masks are way too detailed to be masks, plus I would like the overall weirdness of these being regular people with animal heads.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batgirl (2016) #41

Nov 27, 2019

I haven't read the adventures of Barbara Gordon in a while but I felt right at home with Batgirl #41. Though I jumped in on part 5 of an ongoing story, it wasn't hard to get caught up with what was happening. The story was fun and engaging and the art looks great. Still, maybe not the best place to jump in if you have never read Batgirl. But, hey, you got to start somewhere.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman (2016) #33

Oct 18, 2017

Not being a regular Batman reader I did really enjoy this issue.Tom King writes Batman and Catwoman as a pretty good couple and the story seems like it is taking an interesting direction; couple that with a really good art team in Jolle Jones and Jordie Bellaire and I think I may stick with this for a few issues and see where it takes me. On a side note, I do know one thing about Batman, it is not good to be a horse around him and that definitely stays true in this issue!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Batman (2016) #38

Jan 3, 2018

Batman #38 is another fantastic entry into Tom King's run on this series. Batman #38 is a nice “one and done” story that has Batman doing a lot of detectivework. The trend of impressive art also continues with this issue as Travis Moore and Giulia Brusco shine. As someone who is not normally a Batman fan, I continue to find myself intrigued by this series. King continues to bring new things to the table and, for now, he has me reading Batman regularly.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Batman (2016) #39

Jan 17, 2018

This “Super Friends” story arc and the Batman getting married story arc as a whole is just way better than it really should be. Tom King just has a way of making these stories super interesting. I love the dialogue between the characters and just the whole story that is happening. The cherry on top is having superstar artists like Jolle Jones and Jordie Bellaire; Batman #39 is just wonderful to look at. Dealing with Batman's relationships has turned into a great storyline, and I got to reference the Biz Markie “Just a Friend”! I would never have thought I would get to do that talking about a Batman comic book.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Batman (2016) #50

Jul 4, 2018

For me Batman #50 was okay; having all the different artists was awesome. The story was interesting and I liked the actual ending, though I can't talk about one thing without spoiling it. I can see why people are upset that this was spoiled, but like I said earlier, that spoiler is not the biggest reveal. I do like what the ending sets up and it actually has me very interested in the stories to come.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Batman (2016) #51

Jul 18, 2018

I have stated plenty of times before that I am not a big fan of Batman. But you give me an introspective/brooding Bruce Wayne with a good crime drama, add in some Lee Weeks sequential art, and I am sold. Some people will probably still be upset that this does not directly address the whole marriage thing and/or the whole Bane situation. That is understandable, but I like that King is going for the slow burn with this story and letting it build.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Batman (2016) #52

Aug 1, 2018

Batman #52 is another great issue in this series. Tom King continues to weave a tale that on paper soundslike it should not work, but somehow it does so well. Lee Weeks andElizabeth Breitweiser continue to deliver some incredibleartwork, filling Batman #52 with some wonderful scenes. I also get an almost nostalgic vibe of Batman the Animated series from these past two issues. From a combination of the artwork and the structure of the storyline, it feels like this story would fit perfectly well in that world.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Batman (2016) #53

Aug 15, 2018

While Batman #53 does end this story rather abruptly and leaves a few threads dangling, overall it is a good issue and probably ends this story before it got stale. I am going to miss Lee Weeks on sequential art. I need more of that in my life. That goes for Elizabeth Breitweiser on colors as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman (2016) Annual #3

Dec 13, 2018

Batman Annual #3 is a fantastic one-shot story told from Alfred's perspective. It has a ton of heart to it and if you do not smile at the ending you might want to check your pulse! The creative team did a fantastic job. Taylor and Schmidt make a really good team that I would like to see work again together in the future. One thing that I love about this is you don't have to be following the current Batman to enjoy this story, you just need general knowledge about the Caped Crusader (in this day in age, about everyone knows the basics). With just the basic knowledge you can pick up Batman Annual #3 and read acomplete and totally enjoyable story!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Batman / Superman (2019) #1

Aug 28, 2019

Batman/Superman #1 is a great start to this series. Even if you are not familiar with the whole Batman Who Laughs stuff going on in the DCU you can still pick this up and thoroughly enjoy yourself. The story and mystery are delightfully engaging and the artwork is some of the best you will see on the stands.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Batman / Superman (2019) #1

Aug 28, 2019

Batman/Superman #1 is a great start to this series. Even if you are not familiar with the whole Batman Who Laughs stuff going on in the DCU you can still pick this up and thoroughly enjoy yourself. The story and mystery are delightfully engaging and the artwork is some of the best you will see on the stands.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman / Superman (2019) #2

Sep 25, 2019

Though Batman/Superman #2 didn't fully hold my attention storywise until the end, I did enjoy the overall read. The visuals once again are outstanding. Marquez and Snchez make a great team and I cannot wait to see Marquez work on other DC characters. Williamson sets up a nice twist for the next issue and ongoing that has me anticipating the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Batman / Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: II #1

Dec 6, 2017

While I was not the biggest fan of the first series I still liked it and, with the start of Batman TMNT II #1, I feel like I might enjoy the sequel more. With Tynion exploring Donnie's inner turmoil about lagging behind his brothers and with some energetic art by Williams and Colwell,Batman TMNT II is off to a great start. Fans of both series will find something to enjoy with Batman TMNT II #1, and with five more issues to go, things look like they will get even crazier!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Batman / Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: II #2

Dec 20, 2017

I can't say that I really enjoyed Batman TMNT II #2 that much. The story was okay, but it read really fast and it felt like not that much really happened. The art continues to be good; Freddie Williams II definitelyhas a dynamic style that sets him apart from other artists and is uniquelyhis own. Maybe it is because I am a Turtle fanboy and I do not really care for Batman or like the Turtles playing second fiddle to him, but this series so far is not keeping me very interested or excited to read it at the moment. Don't get me wrong, all in all it is a good comic with a great creative team, I just don't think this second outing of this team up is for me.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman / TMNT Adventures #1

Nov 10, 2016

Batman Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles #1 is another great team up mini series from IDW comics and DC comics. This time they bring together two animated universes and knock it out of the park. This is a great all ages book! Older fans of the Batman Adventure comics or Batman the Animated series will love revisiting the style and characters of that universe, while younger fans of the most recent TMNT animated series and comic series from Nickelodeon will be right at home with these Turtles. Writer Matthew K. Manning does a great job with combining these universes and making sure fans of either one are not lost or confused and the art team knocks it out of the park with great style! While it doesn't break the mold, it's a fun book that everyone can enjoy!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.6
Batman / TMNT Adventures #2

Dec 14, 2016

Overall Batman/TMNT Adventures #2 is as good as a set up issue can be. We get the usually hero's meet up hero's fight trope, which if I had not seen in the previous Mini series of Batman/TMNT mini series might have been a little more interesting. It was still fun to see these versions of the characters going at it and it has some geniunely funny jokes in it! This book is still a lot of fun and is a great all ages book that comics desperately need. Besides a little hiccup the art on a few pages, it still looks good and does a great job o meshing together two animated stylings. Now that the set up is over we can get into the meat of the series with issue #3 and that has me excited!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Batman: Last Knight on Earth #1

May 29, 2019

Batman: Last Knight on Earth #1 is a good start to this three-part mini-series. If you like this creative team's run on Batman then there is nothing here you shouldn't enjoy. Snyder weaves an interesting new narrative for the Batman. And the series has a bit of a Head Lopper vibe (no spoilers, but look at the cover). The art team is, once again, fantastic. They catch the tone and feel of this series perfectly. A lot of times these “Elseworlds” stories are some of the best and it looks like this might be one of them.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Batman: The Drowned #1

Oct 20, 2017

Batman The Drowned #1 is a pretty good tie-in issue to DC's ongoing Metal event. This dark multi-verse Batman definitely has some problems going on with her and Dan Abnett brings out her darkness onto the page. The art team does a good job of blending together and bringing this story to life. If you want to follow this storyline you will have to pick up Batman The Merciless when it comes out. While I am not sure how pertinent it is to read this to the ongoing event or if it will really matter if you read all of these tie-ins or not, but it is pretty cool to get another backstory to these dark-universe Batman's and really come on how can you not laugh that this Batman's love was named “Sylvester” that is just classic right there!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Batman: The Merciless #1

Oct 25, 2017

Batman The Merciless #1 was a pretty good read; I was not as much into the story as in Batman The Drowned #1, but it was an okay set up for this dark Batman. I am still not sure how pertinent this is to the main Metal event going on and if you will have to read these for the main series to make more sense or not, but it is nice to have a backstory to all these new characters being introduced.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman: White Knight #1

Oct 3, 2017

Batman White Knight #1 is a good start to this seven issue mini-series, while the story does feel a little long in some parts it mostly flows nicely at setting up everything for the rest of the series. The most intriguing part is how this story is going to play out over seven issues, what is really happening with Batman and The Joker. The staying point is having Sean Murphy and Matt Hollingsworth on art they are truly a “dynamic duo” that will have me picking up the series no matter where the story goes!

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Beta Ray Bill (2021) #1

Apr 1, 2021

As a Daniel Warren Johnson fanboy, I was extremely excited that he was doing a five-issue mini-series at Marvel. He knocks it out of the park with Beta Ray Bill #1. From art to story Johnson delivers once again. He hits on some wonderful emotional beats in this first issue, while also delivering some delightful action scenes. He also details the story well, so if you have not been following along with King in Black don't worry you can hop onto Beta Ray Bill #1 and enjoy without fear of being lost or confused. This is a ride everyone can hop on and enjoy.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Beta Ray Bill (2021) #2

Apr 29, 2021

I cannot feel that anyone can be disappointed with this series so far. It has been a great start and Beta Ray Bill #2 kicks the story into full gear. With some surprising twists and turns and some interesting characters popping up, it is a wild story full of fun, action, adventure, and powerful emotion. The art is incredible and an absolute delight to look at every single panel and page. If you like good comic books you are doing yourself a disservice in not picking this up.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Beyond the Breach #2

Aug 21, 2021

If you love wild and fun adventurous stories you need to be reading Beyond the Breach. A mix of adventure, sword and sorcery and sci-fi the creative team delivers and epic fun adventure that is just getting started in this second issue. From the wild visuals to the odd scenarios it is a series that will keep your on your toes and a smile on your face from page to page.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Beyond the Breach #3

Sep 18, 2021

Beyond the Breach keeps getting better and better with every issue. Brisson continues to build up this wild world superbly well with some fantastic characters and exciting story, while the art team of Damian Courceiro and Patricio Delpeche deliver spectacular visuals throughout the issue. If you are looking for a comic that is wildly entertaining then look no further.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Bitter Root #1

Nov 13, 2018

Bitter Root #1 is a solid piece of work. You can feel the creators passion for the project throughout the pages. If the story didn't switch up too often it would almost be a perfect book. I love the characters, the story concept and the art is absolutely incredible. Do yourself a favor and pick up Bitter Root #1 this week.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Bitter Root #2

Dec 11, 2018

Bitter Root #2 delivers an exciting read and makes this series a must-read for me. I have some slight hang-upsstory-wise and do wish it slowed down a little bit to give us more character connection, but overall is a great read. The dialogue is fantastic and the plot has some nice twists and turns. The art continues to be wonderfully done as Sanford Greene delivers some of his best work to date. In my opinion, you are doing yourself a disservice if you are not reading Bitter Root.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Bitter Root #3

Jan 8, 2019

Bitter Root #3 is another excellent entry to this series. While it does feel like the story is missing a little something to make it truly great and the art in this issue does not feel as “tight” as the previous two, you still are not going to want to miss out. Some crazy things happen in this issue and things are not looking good for the Sangerye family!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Black Badge #1

Aug 7, 2018

Black Badge #1 has peaked my interest. The concept of Scouts being used as special military agents is a novel idea and the characters introduced in this first issue seem like they have a lot going for them. I am excited to see what this creative team does with this story. It is hard to tell exactly were Black Badge is going after this first issue but it makes me want to find out!

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Black Badge #2

Sep 20, 2018

In my opinion, after this second issue, Black Badge is hanging on just by the concept and how much I liked the creative team's previous series, Grass Kings. The art seems to have a few more hiccups than I normally see from this team, and if the story does not pick up I can't really see myself staying on much longer.

View Issue       View Full Review
5.5
Black Badge #3

Oct 18, 2018

I want to like Black Badge but Black Badge #3 continues to solidify why I just can't get into it. There is no real character development or anything to hold onto as a reader. These kids keep just going on missions and talking about losing one of their teammates, but we still do not know much about the kids themselves. Or not enough to really care about why they are doing the things they are doing. The concept for the series is great but the execution continues to fail to excite me enough to continue with this series for now.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
Black Lightning: Cold Dead Hands #1

Nov 1, 2017

With a new TV series on the horizon, it is about time Black Lightning got back in the DCU. With Black Lightning #1 (Cold Dead Hands part 1 of 6), he gets back into the fold. While not a perfect starting point for new fans, it does a serviceable job of introducing Black Lightning and starts off the series with some twist and turns. The art is very bold and does definitely catch the reader's attention more than the story does. While it is good to haveJefferson Pierce back in comic book form, I am not sure if this is his best outing.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
Black Panther and the Agents of Wakanda #1

Sep 18, 2019

Black Panther and the Agents of Wakanda #1 is an okay start to a new series. I like the idea of the group and it certainly has some very interesting characters. I will be interested to see what Zub does with them in the future once he gets his footing with all of them. The art, while not bad, also doesn't really stand out either. That is probably the biggest thing that might hinder this series, especially being the first issue. Nothing really stands out about it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Blood Brothers (2017) #1

Jun 27, 2017

Looking for a Noir/Crime/Mystery comic with all types of fantasy creatures to boot well look no further than Blood Brothers #1 (of 4). Javier Caba and Fabian Rangel Jr. have crafted an entertaining series (that was apparently a successful Kickstarter before being picked up by Dynamite Entertainment) that will have you dying to read the next issue. Blood Brothers is a wonderful concept that really stretches the boundaries of the imagination, yes it throws you into the story without much explanation but that is also part of the mystery, we just have to trust the creators that everything will make sense and to sit back and enjoy the ride!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Blood Brothers (2017) #2

Jul 25, 2017

Blood Brothers is just plain and simple a good time! With a noir/crime/mystery story coupled with the crazy backdrop of this supernatural city, it is something that will leave a smile on your face from beginning to end. For me, there is really nothing to not like about this book. Sure there may be some little nitpick here or there, but it is just too much fun to hate (it has a luchador fighting werewolves on the cover for crying out loud!). Will the brothers get any closer to solving the mystery of the stolen skull or will they be outwitted by a mysterious ghoul?

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Blood Brothers (2017) #3

Aug 22, 2017

Blood Brothers #3 is just another wonderful entry into this series and with only one more issue to go the brothers are on the trail to solve this mystery. With great story telling and fantastic cartooning Blood Brothers is the sleeper hit of the summer in comics. There is honestly not much I do not like about this series. It's it has action, comedy, mystery and all kinds of crazy creatures. I am all in on this series and cannot wait to see what happens when the brothers finally solve this mystery and what comes next!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Blood Brothers (2017) #4

Sep 26, 2017

Blood Brothers is a fantastic series and will continue to recommend it to anybody and everybody! It is really just the epitome of a fun comic book. This story arc wraps up nicely in issue #4 and we are left with a great cliffhanger, so hopefully, this series will continue beyond these four issues. The creative team has done a tremendous job with this series and made it into a must-read comic book series that blends action, drama, and comedy all into one great series.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Blue Beetle (2016) #14

Oct 25, 2017

I really liked the story being told in Blue Beetle #14, it is a good start to this new story arc and a really good spot for new readers to jump on. The art while not terrible could still be improved on to add more dynamics to the story being told. All in all the story being told is good enough for me to look over the art hiccups and I am interested to see where this new creative team takes the Blue Beetle to.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.9
Break Out #1

Apr 14, 2022

Break Out #1 has a strong core but is missing something in the story/art to make it stand out. The story concept isnt going to blow your hair back, but really no concept is, every story has been told it is more of what you do with it and the first issue does not offer us anything different or a hook to keep us engaged. It is missing some pizzazz in the art department and the story has yet to let us latch onto the characters. It is not a bad book but, it just needs a little something extra that hopefully the second issue will deliver.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer (2019) #1

Jan 23, 2019

All in all, Buffy the Vampire Slayer #1 was a good start for BOOM! Studios' updated relaunch of the series. As someone who has no feelings for the show good or bad, I had a pretty good time. Jordie Bellaire did a good job of bringing the reader into the story and not letting you feel lost or like you had missed something. The art team is excellent and, as always, does an incredible job. I would be very interested to hear from actual Buffy fans what they thought of the issue in the comments. For me, though, this has me on for at least a few more issues; and, hey, it might light that fire to start season 1 episode 1!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 9 #2

Feb 27, 2019

Buffy the Vampire Slayer #2 is a solid entry to the series, but I can't help but feel, storywise, as a newcomer to the Buffy franchise, that I am missing a little something. The art is my main staying point for right now. Dan Mora always impresses me with his visuals. I am sticking with Buffy the Vampire Slayer for now. It does have some interesting plot points that have me hanging on. Hopefully, once the series gets going everything clears up a little bit more.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Canto: The Hollow Men #1

Aug 25, 2020

It continues to be the best all-ages comic out there. Scratch that"just one of the best comic books out there, period, that just happens to be all-ages. The series continues to stay true to its original tagline "Part Fantasy. Part Adventure. All Heart." Don't miss out!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Canto #1

Jun 27, 2019

It kind of feels like a 1980s-1990s animated film. You know, like The Secret of NIMH, The Iron Giant, The Land Before Time. Sometimes you get that feeling like “geez… this is a little grim and dire” but it has that joyfulness to it as well. I think the book's tagline captures the book perfectly: “Part Fantasy. Part Adventure. All Heart”. That is all you need to know about Canto #1.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Canto: Lionhearted #1

Jul 13, 2021

Canto III: Lionhearted #1 is a great start to the continuing adventure of Canto. The team adds another layer to the character as he leads the fight against the Shrouded Man. The series continues to be a wonderful story of perseverance and heart. Canto brings a sense of hope to the world that we all need.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Canto #2

Jul 24, 2019

Canto #2 is a great entry into a surprisingly good new book from IDW Publishing.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Canto: Lionhearted #2

Aug 11, 2021

Canto III: Lionhearted #2 has been one of my favorite single issues of the series so far. That is coming from guy that has enjoyed every issue of this series so far. Obviously, not a good jumping on point, but if you have been following along with Canto's adventures this builds upon that story amazingly well. Some solid action, some lovely plot points built upon and the heart of Canto we have all come to love. Three volumes in and I still find myself captured by the story of this little tin man.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Canto: The Hollow Men #2

Sep 23, 2020

Canto continues to deliver each and every issue. This new volume is off to a fantastic start and off in an exciting new direction. Canto continues to be a wonderful character that has been developed well. The creative team continues to just be firing on all cylinders. The story in Canto II: The Hollow Men #2 is a bit heartbreaking, but yet, uplifting as well. The group's journey is off to a rocky start but hard times will never stop Canto!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Canto: The Hollow Men #3

Oct 27, 2020

Man, if you haven't been reading Canto then you are really missing out on something special. The creative team has been firing on all cylinders since the first volume and Canto II: The Hollow Men #3 continues the trend. It has just been a wonderful journey so far, and things are heating up in this second volume.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Canto #3

Aug 20, 2019

Canto #3 is another great entry in this series. Our hero, Canto, continues to explore the world outside of his city's borders. He is finally free, but he does not let that deter him from his mission to save his love. The story is exciting and adventurous with tons of heart through and through. The art fits the story perfectly well and delivers some magnificent visuals. This is a great all-ages comic book, I feel you could give this to anyone probably 6 and up and they would really enjoy it.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Canto: Lionhearted #4

Nov 10, 2021

For me Canto III: Lionhearted #4 is a perfect comic book. The story builds upon its past while delivering a tremendously emotional issue. The dialogue is sharp and heart wrenching and the story will have you standing up and cheering by the end of it, while also hotly anticipating the next issue. The art is superbly well detailed and captures all the emotions of the story in a beautiful visual display. If you have not been reading Canto then you are doing yourself a disservice, each time I do not think it can get any better, but this creative team keeps proving me delightfully wrong every time I open up the pages!

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Canto #4

Sep 10, 2019

Canto #4 is just, plain and simple, a very well done comic book. The pacing is perfect for a six-issue story and everything felt like it "fit" story-wise with what was happening in the issue. I was just captured by the story and excited to turn the page to see what happens next. The art continues to be splendidly well done and fits perfectly for the story.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Canto: The Hollow Men #4

Dec 29, 2020

While the start of Canto II: The Hollow Men #4 was not the strongest, in my opinion, the second half of the book was fabulous. It is a great way to end the issue and will have you clamoring for the next! Canto is a must-read series, full of action, adventure, and heart. It's something kids and adults can all enjoy. Everything in Canto just fits the art- and stor-work tremendously well together to bring this story to life.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Canto #5

Oct 1, 2019

Though the story may not get pushed along as much as I would like, Canto #5 is another excellent issue in this series and has me very excited to see what happens in the final issue of this mini-series. The action sequences depicted in this issue are superbly done and it is a visual treat to look at the pages. We only have one more issue to go: will Canto retrieve his love's heart and save the day, or is there something more sinister at hand?

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Canto: Lionhearted #5

Jan 22, 2022

I have said this a lot but, Canto is more of one of those all-ages series that is going to make you tear up or get some dust in your eyes. That is what I continue to love about it, Canto III is a fantastic story, and it is charming, funny and action packed something all-ages can enjoy but that is also not letting that aspect get in the way of the story telling. So, what happens in the final issue is anybodys guess, and I do not know if I am prepared to read it!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Canto: Lionhearted #6

Feb 16, 2022

Canto III: Lionhearted #6 is a hard one for me to put the score on for the story. On one part I am disappointed we did not get that big battle that has been brewing for a long time, it kind of left this installment off with a whimper of sorts and it felt a little rushed. On the other hand it sets up some extremely exciting things that I cannot wait to see! Plus Booher continues to make Canto a character that captures my heart and mind; this issue has tons of emotion to it. I am hardly ever disappointed with the art in this series, though I mean we better get to see Zucker unleash on a big battle in the next installment or we riot! All in all it caps of another fantastic installment into this epic of a series. I would not even call this issue "bad", but not what I was expecting or hoping for. It still delivers some great story points and has me itching for the next and final installment of Canto's epic coming this summer!

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Canto #6

Nov 19, 2019

Canto #6 is a great ending to this series. It ends the story in a surprising, touching way and the tag line "Part Fantasy. Part Adventure. All Heart" has never been truer than at the end. The creative team has done an exceptional job with this all-ages story. This is how you do an all-ages comic book! It has got action, adventure and an emotional story that doesn't talk down to its readers, nor is it afraid to get a little dark and grim at times.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Canto: The Clockwork Fairies #1

Jul 21, 2020

Canto is a fantastic concept for a character and world. The book, from a creative standpoint, is all very well done, from story to art. It is also a great book for kids and adults alike. I am pretty sure I said something like this in my review of Canto #1 but this feels like those animated films that are kid-friendly but have some darker hints to them. The tone and feel of the series are just perfect from my standpoint and they continue to shine in Canto and the Clockwork Fairies #1.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Canto & The City of Giants #1

Apr 13, 2021

If you have been following along with Canto's journey (if not why haven't you? It is one of the best series out on the shelves right now) then stop reading this and just go buy Canto and the City of Giants #1. If you are a dummy and haven't been following Canto's adventure then you got some catching up to do. Go pick up the trade of Canto I: If I Only Had a Heart and pre-order Canto II: The Hollow Men (available in June), then come back here. But, back to this series, another great entry into Canto's world. Booher does a tremendous job of switching up the story with the start of this series. I love that Canto is having to do something a little bit different here and we are getting to see another side of our little tin hero. The art though maybe not as strong as normal is still very solid and fits the themes and tone so far.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Captain America (2017) #695

Nov 2, 2017

Captain America #695 is about as good as a Captain America book could be coming out of the “Secret Empire” event series. With the whole Hydra Cap thing, Sam Wilson being Captain America, and a host of other things going on, it was nice to see Steve Rogers get “back to the basics.” One of my favorite things"whether it be in writing, sports, or whatever"is the occasional fun, flashy, and exciting moment. But those need to be used sparingly and the old saying always true: the basics always work. I mean, that is why they are called “basic fundamentals!” While Captain America #695 is not the greatest story ever told, it is a good start and it is great to have “basic” Captain America back.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Captain America (2017) #696

Dec 6, 2017

Captain America battles the new Swordsman in Captain America #696, Steve continues to travel America to find himself and let the American people know what Captain America stands for. These one-and-done stories have been great so far and have really helped reestablish the greatness of Steve Rogers. I also really like the short essays in the back with creators writing about what Captain America means to them; they have been very interesting so far. It is not a spoiler (it is on the cover), but I am super excited for issue #697, as Kraven the Hunter is showing up and I am hotly anticipating seeing a full comic of Samnee drawing him!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Captain America (2017) #697

Jan 3, 2018

Overall, I am absolutely loving Captain America right now. I like that Steve is going on these little adventures through the Marvel Universe and we are learning, once again, what makes Steve Rogers such a great superhero. Captain America #697 features Kraven the Hunter, a fun interaction between a hero and villain that I have not read before. The art continues to be stunning and delightful to gaze over. Captain America is in a heap of trouble and this issue ends with a shocking cliff-hanger. You are not going to want to miss Captain America #697!

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Captain America (2017) #699

Mar 8, 2018

For me, Captain America #699 was a nearly perfect Captain America story. We get Cap standing up for the little guy, making big speeches and throwing his shield. Add that tosome magnificent artwork and you got yourself one heck of a superhero comic book. I loved every minute of this issue. This surprisedme becauseI was not the biggest fan of the previous issue, and then this comes along and totally redeems itself!

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Captain America (2017) #700

Apr 11, 2018

Mark Waid, Chris Samnee, and Matthew Wilson have definitelyput their stamp on Captain America. They have told a wonderful trove of stories throughoutthese past5 issues and Captain America #700 is a shining achievement. Waid is staying on after this issue as the writer but Chris Samnee is gone (hopefully Matthew Wilson is staying on), so there will be big shoes to fill in Captain America #701. But for now, just enjoy a delightful Captain America story that will remind you why Steve Rogers is Captain America and why he is so revered among the Marvel Heroes and someone we can all look up to!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Captain America (2018) #2

Aug 1, 2018

Overall Captain America #2 is a solid issue. I like the story Ta-Nehisi Coates is telling with the public not trusting Steve, and his self-doubts. I do wish we learned more about this Power Elite group though. The art is bold and dynamic and definitely delivers that “superhero” look to Captain America. It is very dark and gloomy but it fits the mood and tone of the story well. Captain America #2 has a pretty good cliffhanger that has me interested to see where Coates is taking this.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Carnage: Black, White & Blood #3

May 5, 2021

Carnage: Black, White & Blood #3 is a solid collection of three short stories. The other two stories are solid in their own rights but the standout is "No Survivors" by Dan Slott and Greg Smallwood. It is an incredible psychological thriller of a short story, something that will stick with you for a while after reading it.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.5
Category Zero #1

Nov 7, 2018

Category Zero #1 is another more realistic look at superheroes. This has been done a lot, but so have many other story tropes. The key will be if the creators can make this a truly original story and set it apart from everything else. It gets off to a pretty solid start; not the greatest #1 issue ever, but I will be on board for at least one more issue to see where it goes. The art is solid comic book art; I have my likes and dislikes, I would have really liked to have seen more background detail to really bring this world to life though. Overall Category Zero #1 is an interesting concept that we will have to wait and see if it fully blooms or dwindles away.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Cold Blood Samurai #1

Apr 11, 2019

Cold Blood Samurai #1 is an excellent issue and sets up a lot for the series going forward. It catches that tone and feeling of the movies it is inspired by perfectly. From the dialogue and narration to the art, everything works perfectly together. Not that it is a perfect first issue; it did take a little extra attention to get all the details. It has me excited to see what comes next. Really, that is is all you can ask for in a first issue. It sets up a good story and characters and has me anticipating what comes next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Cold Blood Samurai #3

May 28, 2019

Cold Blood Samurai reminds me a lot of Ed Brisson's work on The Ballad of Sang and his run on Iron Fist. It has that great old Kung-Fu movie type feel. Plus it adds in that lone warrior, the "man with no name" hero aspect as well. While the story is nothing extremely new, it is still gripping and oddly exciting. I also love seeing what the artists do with these animals designs as well. Seeing how they will adapt their natural designs into the ancient Japanese wardrobe is always interesting to see.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Cold Blood Samurai #4

Jun 25, 2019

Cold Blood Samurai #4 is another great entry into this story. It builds up the story and adds great tension to the series. The whole creative team works tremendously well together. The writing and the art play off each other remarkably well. We continue to learn more about our Gaijin Salamander, and he has become a fantastic character. All the characters have been built up wonderfully and I am impressed by how invested the creative team has made me in this story.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Cold Blood Samurai #5

Jul 10, 2019

Cold Blood Samurai #5 is another good entry into this series. While not my favorite issue so far, it does a lot to set up an exciting issue #6. The creative team has done a delightful job of re-telling an ancient tale in a new and exciting way. While keeping the integrity of the story intact they have also developed some new and unique characters as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Cold Blood Samurai #6

Aug 20, 2019

Cold Blood Samurai #6 is a solid ending to the six-issue mini-series. We get a satisfying conclusion to not only the story being told but our main character as well. The artwork was good and consistent throughout the series and it flowed well with the story being told. All in all Cold Blood Samurai was a great read and a satisfying six-issue comic book series.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
Cold Spots #1

Aug 21, 2018

I enjoyed the mysterious take in Cold Spots #1. Bunn toes that line of giving us enough information to stay interested but not enough to spoil the mystery. Sometimes it goes over one way or the other but for the most part, he hits the mark. The art is a little hit or miss as well. While I like Torres eye for detail and character design, the coloring in the first half of the issue really throws everything off from a storytelling standpoint. Cold Spots #1 is a solid supernatural thriller. While not without some flaws story and art wise it is an interesting mystery with a haunting vibe to it that has me wanting to learn more.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Cold Spots #2

Sep 27, 2018

I feel the story improved a lot in Cold Spots #2. Having the information from the first issue and what is given in this issue made for a much clearer story and the mystery still holds tight while delivering bits and pieces to keep the reader on board. Cold Spots #2 has an eerie atmospherethat works tremendouslywell to up the horror aspect of this series. The art of the buildings and vehicles looks great and the ghastlyfigures are renderedwell. It is too bad the actual people in the issue do not share the same detail and clarity of everything else. The story is intriguing enough to keep me on board and Bunn is starting to let some details out. Despite not liking Torres' character drawings, I do love the moody atmosphere he paints Cold Spots #2 with.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Conan The Barbarian (2019) #1

Jan 3, 2019

I don't really know what a Conan the Barbarian story is supposed to feel like, but Conan the Barbarian #1 feels like one to me. It has all the ingredients of a fantastic fantasy tale and was just a ton of fun to read. Aaron delivers a winding fantasy tale that I am very excited to see where it takes Conan, and the art team is fantastic as well. I can't imagine, if you are a fan of Conan, not liking this; and if you are new to the “Cimmerian Barbarian” then this is a perfect place to jump on!

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Conan The Barbarian (2019) #2

Jan 17, 2019

If you are not reading Conan the Barbarian you are missing out on a bloody good time. This continues to be an all-around fun comic book. Aaron continues to weave a fantastical Hyborian Age tale of Conan the Barbarian. It has all the battles, tales and travels you could want out of the series. The art team of Asrar and Wilson is top notch and brings a visual flair to the series. I have never been a big Conan the Barbarian fan, but I am now!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Conan The Barbarian (2019) #9

Sep 6, 2019

If you have been following along with this series then it is no surprise that Conan the Barbarian #9 is another excellent issue. If you haven't, then this is a great place to jump on board. Jason Aaron makes it incredibly easy to jump right into this series and enjoy. You can go back and read the other eight issues to get more in-depth about the “Life and Death of Conan” ongoing plot, or you can just continue on from here. Heck, you can just grab this issue for some Conan action and adventure and enjoy as a one-shot! You won't be disappointed, as the art team shines with some wonderful visuals throughout.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Contagion #2

Oct 11, 2019

So, Contagion #2 has kind of an interesting horror/virus type thing going that is okay. But if you are an Iron Fist fan, then there is a lot more to keep you interested in this series. The art, while not bad, just doesn't seem to fit with what the story is trying to tell. If this was more of a high action-adventure story, it might fit better. It just doesn't seem to work with the more horror toned vibe of the series.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Cosmic Ghost Rider (2018) #1

Jul 5, 2018

I enjoyed Cosmic Ghost Rider #1.Cates delivered a good story while also throwing in some wacky things as well. The art matches the tone of the issue perfectly. My main concern is really the next issue. The Cosmic Ghost Rider works well in small doses and in this first issue we really only get a small dose of him. Now the other issues will be more concentrated on him I am wondering how the story will be. I trust that Cates will make it interesting and not just crazy for craziness sake. But if you are looking for a fun comic to read on the fourth of July look no further.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Cosmic Ghost Rider (2018) #2

Aug 1, 2018

If you are looking for just a downright fun comic book you should be reading Cosmic Ghost Rider. This is just an absolute blast to read! Donny Cates is firing on all cylinders, delivering a crazy story that still has some heart to it. The art is fantastic, with great cartooning byDylan Burnett and absolutely superb coloring by Antonio Fabela. It may not be the greatest comic book on the shelves but it certainly is the most fun read of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.5
Cosmic Ghost Rider Destroys Marvel History #1

Mar 8, 2019

Cosmic Ghost Rider Destroys Marvel History #1 wasn't bad but it wasn't great either. The story had some amusing parts, but it was just so congested with stuff it ends up feeling overwhelming while you are reading it. The pace of the issue just felt off as it was crammed with so much in one issue. It was just not paced well for all of it. The art is pretty great; I enjoyed the "flashback" scenes that take up most of the issue. It was fun to see Marvel History through a different lens, but I am not sure if I overly enjoyed my experience.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Crossover (2020) #3

Jan 6, 2021

It took me three issues but I am all aboard Crossover now. I wasn't exactly sure what to make of the story after the first two issues, but with Crossover #3 it seems Cates is starting to let the story take off and let it spread its wings. The art is obviously stunning and just a fantastic little visual treat. If you have been on the ropes with this series this issue should sell you as a must-read. I mean, plus, that cover with the Gundam Shadow is perfection.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Crossover (2020) #4

Feb 23, 2021

Crossover #4 probably isn't the best issue of the series, but it also serves its purpose, which makes it kind of hard to give a rating to.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Crypt of Shadows (2019) #1

Jan 24, 2019

If you like horror comics then you will definitely dig Crypt of Shadows #1. Ewing writes a delectable horror tale. The art is a little bit of hit and miss and I do wish it was broken up into three separate stories though. All in all, I had a good time reading the issue and hope Marvel does a few more of these. There is also a good essay in the back about Marvels history with horror comics. If you want to learn more about horror comics, in general, I suggest picking upThe Horror! The Horror!: Comic Books the Government Didn't Want You to Read.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Curse Words #1

Jan 19, 2017

Curse Words #1 is a great first issue that builds a very interesting character in the Wizord that readers will be eager to follow up with to find out his true intentions. Soul and Browne make a fantastic team and are some of the most dynamic story tellers in the business. With Boyd and Parkinson complimenting on colors Curse Words becomes a vibrant book that emanatesan energy that makes this comic stand apart from everything else on the shelves. Soule feels like he is spreading his wings in this series and really creating something different and exciting. The art will have any comic fan excited just to flip through the pages. Curse Words looks like it is going to be another hit series and you don't want to miss out.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Damnation: Johnny Blaze - Ghost Rider #1

Mar 29, 2018

Damnation Johnny Blaze Ghost Rider #1 is a fun and visually beautiful one-shot story. Look I am not a 100% exactly sure what happened or where it goes from here (we might get an ongoing series). But if you are a Ghost Rider fan or a fan of delightful stories with wonderful art then you will like this issue. Johnny Blaze and The Ghost Rider are in Hell, do they plan to escape or will they make it their home?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Daredevil (2015) #595

Nov 12, 2017

Daredevil #595 is a great start to what could be another classic battle between Kingpin and Daredevil. Charles Soule is a fantastic writer who really should be getting more praise for his work on this series. The art has some hiccups, but overall it really enhances the story being told and adds to the drama. When Wilson Fisk is the Mayor of New York City, you know things are bad, and they are only going to get worse unless someone stands up.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Daredevil (2015) #596

Dec 13, 2017

Daredevil #596 is a great superhero comic book; the creative team made this issue a lot of fun and brought out some very interesting story points that will have definite repercussions as this storyline continues. I have not heard a lot of people talking about this Daredevil run, and if you haven'tbeen reading it, you should. Soule has been doing an excellent job since taking over when it relaunched, and there has been a great rotation of artists.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Daredevil (2015) #597

Jan 10, 2018

Charles Soule has slowly been building an epic storyline since he started on Daredevil and, with issue #600 on the horizon, it looks like everything is coming to a head. Soule is doing some very interesting things with Matt Murdock and I am wondering how he will sort all this out in the end. Daredevil #597 is a very well-crafted comic and Daredevil fans will definitely not want to miss out!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Daredevil (2015) #598

Feb 8, 2018

Overall, I havebeen liking the Mayor Fisk storyline that has been going on and is leading up to issue 600.Daredevil #598 just feels a little bit too much like a filler issue though. Things happen, but the story does not get pushed forward too much. It is nice to have Ron Garney back on art to give the series a little darker tone that feels needed for the storyline.Daredevil #598 is not a bad issue; it just feels like a placeholder for bigger things to come.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Daredevil (2015) #600

Mar 29, 2018

Daredevil #600 wraps up the Mayor Fisk story arc but opens up another can of worms in the process. Soule opens up another chapter in Matt Murdock'slife and brings him into a new messy situation in the process. Garney wraps up his run with DD in dramatic fashion with some spectacular artwork. Some surprising things take place in Daredevil #600 and will definitely have fans talking until the next issue. Horn Head has a plan to stop Mayor Fisk but, like most plans, this does not go off without a hitch and DD may need to have some back up in Daredevil #600.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.8
Daredevil (2015) #601

Apr 19, 2018

Overall I will have to say this was not my favorite issue of Daredevil. It was not terribly bad, but it was not good also. It was just okay. Story-wiseI feel like not that much happened and nothing really caught my attention. I still feel like we are close to the same position we were in from the previous issue. The art change from Garney to Henderson was not shocking. Matt Milla makes the transition easier. There are a few art shots that aren'tthe best. It kind of took me out of the story. I do like some things that are teased at the end of the issue and that are going to happen in the next issue. So, it is not all bad and I will continue to read Daredevil. This issue seemed to take a little dip from the previous ones.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
Daredevil (2015) #603

May 31, 2018

Daredevil #603 continues Matt Murdock's struggle of juggling being Mayor and Daredevil at the same time. The Hand attacking has not made anything any easier for “The Devil of Hell's Kitchen”. For me, this current story arc of Daredevil is stuck in the middle. It is not terrible or bad, then again it is not the greatest thing ever either. It does different things while doing the same thing which is what most ongoing superhero comics do. It does have me coming back each month so, there is something to that.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Daredevil (2015) #605

Jul 12, 2018

Daredevil #605 confirms that Matt Murdock lives a strange, strange life. While not the greatest issue ever, Daredevil #605 is a lot of fun and I enjoyed my time reading it. Yes, it has a lot of goofiness to it, but to me, that is part of its charm. Charles Soule continues to build upon everything he has done since this series launched; I am very interested to see where he is taking it. Mike Henderson and Matt Milla make a great art team that delivers some wonderful pages throughout this issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Daredevil (2015) #607

Aug 23, 2018

I am not really sure of the purpose of Daredevil #607 is story wise.It seems like a very odd placement for this story line right in the middle of what was happening, but it is also a lot of fun. Soule brings a little levity to the life of DD by bringing back one of the oddest things Daredevil has ever done. It is also hard to complain when you got some magnificent Phil Noto art to look at. His bright colors and classic feeling style, coupled with this odd story line gives Daredevil #607 this delightful rhythm, that while you may not completely understand the who, what, where or why it is very hard not to enjoy!

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Daredevil (2015) #610

Nov 2, 2018

Supposedly Daredevil will die in two more issues; most comic book fans will take this with a grain of salt, but who knows! Daredevil #610 makes for an interesting issue in the saga. Soule pushes the story forward but it still feels only a little bit further from where we left off last time. Phil Noto's art is good, but it feels "off" for this story arc. Daredevil #610 is a middle-of-the-road issue for the story arc. It is not bad, but at the same time, it not as intriguing as Daredevil dying should be.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Daredevil (2015) #612

Nov 28, 2018

Matt Murdock maybe dead (probably not) but if Daredevil #612 was his big sendoff then it is not a very good way to go for such a great hero. It is not the worst issue ever but with such a high mark to hit Daredevil #612 doesn't come close to the board.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Daredevil (2019) #1

Feb 6, 2019

I really dig what Chip Zdarsky and Marco Checchetto are doing with Daredevil #1. It feels like a little return to the Bendis/Maleev or Brubaker/Lark runs. Obviously not the same but the tone feels like those comics more than what the previous two incarnations have been doing. The art is wonderful and exactly what I wanted to see from Checchetto and Gho, while Zdarsky seems to be taking Daredevil to another dark place in his first outing. Daredevil #1 is a great start to the series and feels like a really good jumping on point for new readers as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Daredevil (2019) #2

Feb 28, 2019

Zdarsky Daredevil story is almost a back to roots type tale. It also has a nice little mystery to it as well. It adds in Daredevil the superhero and Daredevil the lawyer combination quite well. Checchetto's art is very well done and I adore how he draws DD's costume with some great texture and lines while also keeping it simple.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Daredevil (2019) #3

Mar 27, 2019

Daredevil #3 is another excellent issue into this new Daredevil series. It does a good job of getting Daredevil "back to basics" while still opening up new ground and story points. It also has a great little ending that has me excited for the next issue. If you like Daredevil I can't imagine you not liking the past three issues. It is classic stuff that, while not exactly breaking new ground in Daredevil lore, adds a lot to the character and is all-around just a good comic book.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Daredevil (2019) #6

May 29, 2019

The story in Daredevil #6 is delightfully well done. It has me hooked into what Zdarsky is going to do with one of my all-time favorite superheroes. There are a lot of things going on and I am not sure in which direction Zdarsky will take this story. While the art is not as dynamic as we have been used to the style change up does help with the little “slower” story switch. Daredevil is dead, long live Matt Murdock.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Daredevil (2019) #10

Aug 21, 2019

Daredevil #10 wraps up the "No Devils, Only God" storyline. Zdarsky has opened up some new and very interesting plot points that have kept me engaged. I like where this issue leaves off for both Matt Murdock and Detective Cole North. The art is definitely a step up from what it has been; while not exactly a "perfect fit" for the story, I still enjoyed the visuals throughout the issue. I am very excited to see that Checchetto and Gho are coming back with the next issue!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Daredevil (2019) #13

Nov 7, 2019

Daredevil #13 is a great issue for the series and it has brought it back to form for me. I was getting a little bored with it during the previous story arc. The art wasn't great and I was getting a little bored with the story. Zdarsky has picked up the pace and has brought in some very interesting developments in this issue and the previous one. Having Checchetto back on the series is also great for the series, as he brings a wonderful unique styling to it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Daredevil (2019) #18

Feb 20, 2020

Daredevil #19 is another great building block into this epic story. This series seems to be sneaking under the radar a bit. I don't hear much chatter about it, but it should not be overlooked. The creative team has added some new and interesting dynamics into Matt Murdock's story. While it is treading very familiar ground for Daredevil it adds in a unique perspective and tweaks to make it original and gripping as the story continues to progress.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Daredevil (2019) #20

Jun 10, 2020

Daredevil #20 is an exciting, action-packed issue that also changes the story into a new direction by the end. We do maybe start to see where Zdarsky may be ending the story, by the end of this issue. But Daredevil #20 stands out as an exhibit of Marco Checchetto's wonderful artwork. The pages of this issue are chock-full of splendid visuals. If you are in dire need of Daredevil doing superhero stuff then Daredevil #20 is your medicine.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Daredevil (2019) #21

Jul 22, 2020

I am, at times, and can also see why some fans may be, a bit frustrated with Daredevil #21. We are again left with more questions than answers, and it does seem that this storyline is dragging on a bit. I am interested, and every time I think I am over it Zdarsky pulls me back in, but at times I am kind of waiting for something new to happen, as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Daredevil (2019) #26

Jan 28, 2021

Daredevil #26 is a bit of an odd issue. On one point the story does continue forward. Zdarsky works in the King in Black storyline while continuing his story of Daredevil in prison and Elektra taking over as protector of Hell's Kitchen. But I feel myself more wondering what would have happened without all the chaos of this event infiltrating this storyline.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Daredevil (2019) #29

Apr 14, 2021

Honestly, I was not even planning on reviewing Daredevil #29, maybe not even reading it until later on. But man I am glad I decided against that. Zdarsky pulls me in once again with some fantastic plot points and setups and delivering a comic full of the storyline and engaging character drama. Checcheto never disappoints and art and it shines once again in Daredevil #29. This run continues to just keep surprising me and it does not look like it is slowing down anytime soon.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
DC / Hanna-Barbera: Black Lightning/Hong Kong PHOOEY Special #1

May 30, 2018

If I am being honest Black Lightning/Hong Kong Phooey #1 was not as cool as I wanted it to be. With the creators throwing around names like Bruce Lee and epic Kung Fu movies I actually got a little excited about this one-shot. For the most part, it was okay, it had a lot of flaws and did not totally live up to what it could have been but it was not a total waste either. The backup story was probably a waste of eight pages though.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
DCeased: The Unkillables #1

Feb 19, 2020

If you liked DCEASED then you should enjoy DCEASED: Unkillables #1. Tom Taylor continues to bring everything loved about that series into this new one. It is action-packed, full of drama and tons of humor. We get to see how some of the villains and anti-heroes of the DC Universe survive. The art while still good, is just inconsistent with its three inkers. It did take me out of the issue a bit at times, is the only real downfall of DCEASED: Unkillables #1.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
DCeased: The Unkillables #2

Mar 18, 2020

Much like the first issue DCEASED: Unkillables #2 has a lot to love about it, just the art continues just to be a little too inconsistent. I mean I still enjoyed the heck out of reading it and I am on-board until the end. It is just at times the art took me a bit out of what was happening on the pages at times. It does not completely ruin anything and it is still a good sequential storytelling with panel structure layouts and some fun sequences, it could just be a tad bit better at times.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Dead Inside #1

Dec 21, 2016

Conclusion: Dead Inside #1 is a great crime mystery story and has a great lead character. John Arcudi has started a great mystery in one issue and has given us some interesting questions to be answered. It is too bad the art is not as good as the story. It really pulls the reader out of the realism of the book and diminishes the overall story. If you like a good crime mystery Dead Inside is right up your alley, even with the art issues the mystery has me on board at least for the second issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Death Of The Inhumans #1

Jul 4, 2018

Overall Death of the Inhumans #1 is an incredible start to this five issue mini-series. Donny Cates once again knocks it out of the park with another epic tale.Ariel Olivetti and Jordie Bellaire make for stellar art team that brings this monumental tale to life. Death of the Inhumans #1 does have some minor flaws, but the good far outweighs the bad. If you are even a tiny fan of the Inhumans (did you have that Triton toy that swam in the water too?) or if you like good comics then definitely pick this up.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
Death Of The Inhumans #2

Aug 1, 2018

Death of the Inhumans #2 has another very shocking ending that will definitely have fans talking after reading it. Cates is not pulling any punches with this series, and that continues with this issue. The art is not the greatest; it still lacks a little “oomph” to it to really bring this series to the next level. I still like it and will continue to read; I just wish it had a little more “spice” to it.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Death or Glory #1

May 3, 2018

Death or Glory #1 is a start to what seems like a high-octane romp. The story, while not gripping or anything special right now, feels like a very fun B-movie and having Bengal on art brings Death or Glory to another level. It is not life-changing or anything, but Death of Glory was truly an exciting read that was a lot of fun. It definitely has me hooked for the second issue on style points alone, and we will see where it goes from there! Until then, grab a helmet and hit the road!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Death or Glory #2

Jun 5, 2018

I am still a bit on the fence with the story in Death or Glory. At first, it is pretty straightforward, but then Remender packs it full of all kinds of weirdness. I am not sure what to make of it; the character of Glory is fantastic and Remender is doing some good work building her up. The art by Bengal continues to be a delightful treat that makes this series a wonder to look at. I guess all this combined makes for a pretty interesting book that has me and apparently many other people picking it up.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Death or Glory #3

Jul 3, 2018

While I am still enjoying the artwork in Death or Glory #3, the story as a whole is starting to lose me. I feel like I missedsomething or something is missing from the story. I can't quite put my finger on what it is, exactly. As I read this issue I just had that nagging feeling that I had missed out on something from the story. Glory herself seems to have lost that uniqueness to her that was so prevalent in the first issue. Death or Glory #3 is not bad but it's hovering in the middle of keeping my interest.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Death to The Army of Darkness #1

Feb 18, 2020

Though I was a little hesitant to pick up Death to the Army of Darkness #1, I am glad I did. Any fan of the movies/show will greatly enjoy this issue. It has everything that made the movies a cult hit with legions of fans from all over. This issue reminded me a lot of the widely-overlooked Dynamite series Blood Brothers, with its animated art styling and silly yet dramatic story.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Death to The Army of Darkness #3

Jun 16, 2020

The art team does an all-around solid job as well. They bring us into this comedy/horror world that feels familiar but is something different and original as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Death to The Army of Darkness #4

Aug 18, 2020

The writing and art are all good, but at the end of the day, it's a "fine" comic book. It is an enjoyable read, but also not something I can't wait to get my hands on when it is released.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Defenders (2017) #1

Jun 17, 2017

Of course with the upcoming premier of The Defenders on Netflix marvel was going to release The Defenders #1with the same characters and title. It would be dumb not to. Now what they have to do is keep the reader interested and invested. I am not sure how this series fits in connection with the wider Marvel Universe and what is going on (it's really best just not to think about it unless you want to be very confused) but on its own The Defenders#1is a success and a great read.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Defenders (2017) #2

Jun 30, 2017

The Defenders #2 is an excellent issue and really has set this series as a must-read for Marvel fans. For now not being caught up in all of the"events" or happenings in the Marvel Universe is really helping this series tell a grounded story that fits perfectly for these "street level" heroes. While it is great that this story has not yet been caught up in Marvels Secret Empire event I do love seeing these short cameos by other Marvel Heroes and villains, it entrenches this series in the Marvel Universe while not having it control the story being told. It looks like Marvel might have a legitimate hit on their hands with great writing and art The Defenders is off to a fantastic start!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Defenders (2017) #3

Jul 13, 2017

This series is shaping up to be a wonderful series for Marvel. It is firmly trenched in the Marvel Universe but is not weighed down by events or other storylines. At the moment it gets to be its own thing. Daredevil just randomly being shot is strange for his character, and I am a little disappointed there was not a backup feature for Iron Fist or Jessica Jones in this issue. Luke Cage and Daredevil had little backup articles in the past two issues, but it does not take away from the overall enjoyment of this series.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Defenders (2017) #4

Aug 11, 2017

The Defenders #4 is an excellent “conclusion” to the first arc. The events that happened in these first four issues are definitely going to affect the group for some time. The creative team has been most excellent in this series and you really couldn't ask for more out of them. If you like street level super hero action,then The Defenders is what you need. Jessica Jones, Iron Fist, Luke Cage and Daredevil make a great team that hopefully sticks around for a long time.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
Defenders (2017) #5

Sep 14, 2017

Overall The Defenders #5 is not a bad issue it just serves to push the story along. While it might read better in the trade format, for a single issue it is kind of a disappointment. The art does save the book as Marquez and Ponsor do a fantastic job on every single page and panel of this series. The rougher styling Marquez employs in this issue looks wonderful and he continues to impress with each Issue. The Defendershas been a great series so far so this is nothing more than a minor hiccup and I am still very excited to see where it is going.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Defenders (2017) #6

Oct 15, 2017

The Defenders #6 is a solid issue while I am getting a little tired of the story there is a pretty good teaser at the end and the story did set up a great fight between The Defenders and Diamondback, really those pages are worth the price of admission alone. I am not really keen on Deadpool being introduced not sure why he is being brought in, but we will probably be seeing more of him in the next issue. It looks like we will be sticking with this “Kingpins of New York” storyline for at least a few more issues so hopefully, Bendis turns it around before it gets too stale.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Defenders (2017) #7

Nov 16, 2017

Brian Michael Bendis would do this right before he leaves Marvel for DC. I was getting a little bit tired of the storyline in The Defenders and thought, well, with Bendis leaving, that will give somebody else a chance to reinvigorate the series, and then Bendis hooks me back in with the Defenders #7 and has me worried about who has this series after him now. Whatever the story, maybe if David Marquez continues to do art like this, then I will stick with The Defenders for a long time to come, because this issue was absolutely incredible art-wise and everyone needs to pick up this issue just to look at his mesmerizing work!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Defenders (2017) #8

Dec 21, 2017

The Defenders continues to be one of, if not the best, series Marvel comics is putting out right now; I am not sure what is going to happen with it after Bendis leaves. I know it did not have a solicitation in March, but I have not heard if it is officially canceled yet. Let's not focus on that–just focus on the fantastic story and beautiful art we are getting from this series right now, and enjoy it while we can!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Defenders (2017) #9

Jan 31, 2018

The Defenders is one of the best comics Marvel Comics is putting out right now! From the writing to the art, it is a superb book and a ton of fun to read. The action is intense and hard-hitting, and the story continues to keep the reader turning the page. The Defenders have to stop Diamondback before he becomes too powerful, but that is easier said than done. With his new power and some other villains by his side, it is not going to be an easy fight. That is not all our heroes have to worry about as The Hood has thrown in his hat to take over New York City! Will The Defenders ever be able to win? Maybe not by themselves, but if they had some help there might be a chance!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Detective Comics (2016) #1018

Jan 1, 2020

It is Christmas in Gotham, and it is about as good as a Christmas in Gotham City gets: brutal murders, a new villain mucking about, and Batman trying to save the day. For a new reader, Detective Comics #1018 is a great jumping-on point. I have been loosely following the "City of Bane" story. If you know nothing about that you can still pick this up and enjoy. Though I was hoping for a one-shot Christmas story, the start of the new story arc did scratch my Christmas itch.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.8
Diablo House #1

Jul 5, 2017

Overall Diablo House if a fun interesting throwback to horror comic anthology series of the 1950's, the story and art are not going to “wow” the reader, but it offers a nice short escape into this crazy world. We get a “nice” story about greed that obviously does not end well and we learn what topping not to order on our pizza when visiting the Diablo House. If you like horror comics are are looking for something that will be different from anything else you read this week then pick up Diablo House #1, but beware this is definitely not approved by the Comics Code Authority, so reader beware!

View Issue       View Full Review
6.5
Dial H For Hero (2019) #1

Mar 27, 2019

For my first introduction to a Dial H for Hero story, honestly, I was not that impressed by Dial H for Hero #1. For a six-issue mini-series in the Wonder Comics line, that is not good. I mean, it is not terrible; it is a solid comic book, but nothing about it got me excited, either. Nothing makes me want to tell people to go pick up this issue or has me clamoring to pick up the second issue either. Maybe the second issue will pick up a little bit, but whether I'll remember to check that out or not is anyone's guess.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Doc Savage: Ring Of Fire #1

Mar 27, 2017

Having never read any Doc Savagebooks before, I was a little hesitant going into this issue. The creative team does a great job of introducing all the characters and players in this first issue while also moving the story along and not bogging down the reader with an information dump. Doc Savage: The Ring of Fire #1 is a great start to an exciting adventure comic that is bound with action and mystery.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Doctor Doom (2019) #10

Dec 23, 2020

Doctor Doom #10, for me, was a delightful end to this series. Christopher Cantwell catches the “voice” of Doctor Doom perfectly; I am not sure if anybody else does it as well as him. While the art isn't quite what I like or want, it is not terrible and does visually bring the story to life. But it does not really stand out, either. If you have been following along with this series then I think you will be pleasantly surprised and happy with this ending. If not, you could probably still read this as a pretty solid “one-shot” type story that is easily enjoyable as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Doctor Strange (2015) #384

Jan 18, 2018

Doctor Strange is a must-read title for Marvel Comics, with exceptional writing and beautifulartwork. Even if you are not a fan of the SorcererSupreme you will enjoy it. Donny Cates is quickly becoming one of the best writers in comics. With fantastic creator-ownedbooks like God Country and Baby Teeth coupled with his fantastic start of a new story arc in Thanos, Cates is showing his skills as an exceptional writer. You also cannot go wrong with an artist likeGabriel Hernandez Walta, whose character details and panel layouts that can tell a story without words, combined with Jordie Bellaire's beautiful colors. You really are missing out if you're not reading Doctor Strange.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Doctor Strange (2015) #386

Mar 1, 2018

I am usually not big into tie-in issues, but since the mini-series is Doctor Strange: Damnation and this is a Doctor Strange solo series you kind of cannot get around it. Plus it helps tremendously that Donny Cates writes both series. All in all Doctor Strange #386 helps flesh out the events of Damnation #1 a little more. And honestly, this is just a really fun story and interesting situation to put Stephen Strange in.Niko Henrichon's art is perfect for this story arc and you will find yourself staring at the pages to see all the little details he puts in. This is honestly a great jumping-on point for the series even if you have not read Damnation or any other previous Doctor Strange.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Doctor Strange: Damnation #1

Feb 21, 2018

The first issue was a little bit of a letdown only in the fact that it was a setup issue. Not that some interesting things did not happen, or that it was not an enjoyable read. It just has me worried that with only three more issues to go that things might get a little rushed.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Doctor Strange: Damnation #2

Mar 8, 2018

Overall I am enjoying the story in Doctor Strange: Damnation #2. Yes, I do feel like some of the things in this issue could have been put in the first issue. That does make the pacing feel a little off. That is a minor issue though. The writing of Donny Cates and Nick Spencer is loads of fun. They write this group of heroes extremely well. The art in this issue sadly brings it down a notch as it took me out of the story quite a bit throughout the issue. Still, with only two issues to go, I am with it until the end because the story is just too much awesome to pass up (plus Rod Reis is coming back for issue #4).

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Dragonfly & Dragonflyman #1

Nov 11, 2019

Dragonfly & Dragonflyman #1 is a pretty fun entry from AHOY Comics. It was a fun play on the alternate Earths and the Batman and Robin characters. I am not sure how well this will play out over multiple issues. But for one issue this was a fun story.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Empyre #4

Aug 5, 2020

Empyre #4 and Empyre itself seems to be turning out to be a great Event Comic book. This is the first actual review I have done for the main series (I reviewed the Savage Avengers tie-in last week). I know I keep saying "event comic book" like it is something "lesser". Just calling it what it is. It is Marvel's big summer blockbuster in the comic book world. Nothing wrong with that. I am not going to tell you it's the greatest comic I ever read, but I am also having a ton of fun reading it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Empyre #5

Aug 12, 2020

Empyre #5 is solid, if a little bit too over-bloated. I don't hate Empyre as an event comic but it could do a lot better, as well. A lot of the stuff happening in the tie-in issues should be happening in the main series and the storytelling in the main series could be more connected and streamlined for a better flow.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Empyre: Savage Avengers #1

Jul 30, 2020

Look, I am not going to tell you Empyre: Savage Avengers #1 is a great story (I don't know if there is even much of one here). You also don't need to read this to stay up to date on what is happening with “Empyre”. But I will tell you, if you want a story that feels like a buddy-cop movie from the '80s, then you should pick this up. If you want to have some fun with Conan the Barbarian and Venom, then look no further. Also, I mean, it has Greg Smallwood on interior art, and we don't get that often, so if you like great comic-book art you kind of have to grab this.

View Issue       View Full Review
4.5
Eternals (2021) #1

Jan 6, 2021

I really wanted to like the Eternals #1. With this strong creative team, I was hoping to get a little insight into characters I knew next to nothing about. This issue did not help with any of that. The story did not connect you with the Eternals or the characters. It kind of just told me why I should care about them and why they are so important, but it didn't make me feel that way. It was basically just a slog to get through. The art didn't fare much better. While the large scoping shots are fantastic, the smaller, more intimate panels and pages are muddled. The lettering color choice also just made for an overall frustrating read.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Ether #1

Nov 16, 2016

Conclusion: Ether #1 is a great set up issue to what seems to be an intriguing fantasy mystery story! Boone Dias a scientist that seems to have all the answers to Ether's magical dilemmas and he is on another “magical” mystery case. Will he be able to solve this one and what exactly happened to him and his life on Earth? Writer Matt Kindt is weaving a fantastic tale combining a wonderful fantasy mystery with a splash of comedic storytelling. David Rubin's art sets this book apart from being lost in all the other Earth/Fantasy realms stories coming out in comics. Making Ether #1 feel like a Dr. Seuss/ Disney book written for adults seems like it could be a recipe for success! Ether #1 is fun, entertaining and emotional; it is a great first issue that will have the reader coming back for #2.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Ether #2

Dec 22, 2016

Conclusion: Ether #2 is a great continuation of this mini series! The second issue really expands on this world and it's characters. Matt Kindt and David Rubn have woven a great fantasy mystery that still has a lot of questions to be answered. Boone is a great scientist but his life on Earth seems to be in shambles, what happened? Does Science have all the answers for Boone Dias? The Ether may never be the same again after this mystery is solved! Find out what kind of trouble Boone and Glum get into and find some answers to some questions ,but get ready to have many more questions with Ether #2.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Ether #3

Jan 24, 2017

Ether #3 is a strong midpoint to this limited series (only two issues remaining) and digs deep into the mysteries that have been set up. Matt Kindt and David Rubin have developed some wonderful characters with Boone Dias and Glum. They have fleshed out both characters and after the first two issues, the readers are invested in them. Ether #3 pulls together great mystery, action, comedy and drama all in one issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Ether #4

Feb 15, 2017

Ether only has one more issue to go and after this issue it is going to be very exciting to see what Kindt and Rubin have in store for the final issue. So many questions are raised in Ether #4, but I really don't want to spoil them, it's worth this series for yourself. Kindt and Rubin continue just to be a fantastic creative team and are really bringing their "A" game toEther. Great story and fantastic art Ether has been fantastic read so far and we will see next month what is really going on with Boone Dias and the truth about the Ether world.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Ether #5

Mar 17, 2017

Ether #5 is a very satisfying ending to this first story arc. It givers some conclusions to the mystery we have been following but opens up a whole new can of worms by the end of the issue. Kindt has quietly woven a tale of how addiction in anyway can affect a person and their family, he has told a heartbreaking story of Boone's lost family that will stick with the reader. Kindt seems to have quietly woven this addiction story line in as we tend to get caught up in the greater mysteries of the Ether and all of its "magic" and fantastical creatures that inhabit its realm. Kindt does not let us forget that he does/did have a family once and going to the Ether has destroyed that.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Excellence #1

May 7, 2019

Excellence #1 is the start of a good series; the story itself just needs a little more clarification on this world, on how it works. The whole father/son family story is superbly well done, it just kind of gets confusing when the "magic" starts happening. I love the overall design of this book and the world. It has that nice futuristic yet "ancient" type feel to it. Khary Randolph does a great job of catching the tone of the series and, while doing an excellent job on action scenes, also catches the emotions of the characters as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.8
Extermination (2018) #1

Aug 15, 2018

Extermination #1 was a pretty good start to this 5 issue series. Since I am not the biggest X-Men fan it did not shock and awe me like maybe it will others. It was still enjoyable though. Just not very memorable. The art is good from a technical standpoint, but also lacks anything truly unique or remarkable. The main thing that has me hanging on is what is going to happen with these original X-Men and it might attempt to streamline the X-Men's continuity.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Extremity (2017) #1

Mar 1, 2017

Extremity #1 is a great start to this series, this first issue could honestly work well as a one shot story. The story and art are full of emotion from creator Daniel Warren Johnson confronting his own fears through the lenses of this otherworldly tale. The post-apocalyptic alien world is a visual feast for the eyes and gives a good setting for the story to unfold. Extremity #1 is an emotional story of losing what defines you and how that affects your life and how do you press on. Johnson does feed this first issue with emotion and intrigue giving the reader questions to ask themselves about what actually defines yourself and what happens when that changes?

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Extremity (2017) #2

Apr 5, 2017

Extremity #2not only continues and moves the story along from issue #1 but greatly expands on the world and characters that inhabit this universe. Daniel Warren Johnson continues to impress with his story telling abilities combining his detailed art styling with his emotional writing/scriptingabilities to make Extremitya gripping story that attaches to the reader's psyche. Extremity is off to a great start with wonderful character work and beautiful art throughout the first two issues this is turning out to be must read series for 2017!

View Issue       View Full Review
9.9
Extremity (2017) #3

May 3, 2017

Extremity has become one of if not the best comic books on the shelves right now! With it's deeply emotional story telling and art that jumps off the page it is something to be marveled at. Extremity #3 seals the deal on this on this point, it not only continues the fantastic story of dealing with you “inner demons” and confronting the darkness in your life , but also is fun and energetic at the same time. Extremity should be on you pull list and if it is not rectify that situation right now.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Extremity (2017) #4

Jun 7, 2017

Extremity is one of the best comic books being published right now period. Daniel Warren Johnson has done an incredible job of getting the reader emotional attached to these characters in these few issues, it is really a great credit to his skills as a creator. It is very hard to get this level of “reader involvement” with characters and story within an issue or two and Johnson will have you fully invested after the first issue and he continues to draw you deeper in with issue #4. The art is absolutely gorgeous, with Johnson great pencil and inking work along with Spicer magnificent colors Extremity is a joy to look at. If you are not reading this series you are certainly missing out on one great comic book, do yourself a favor and pick this up now!

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Extremity (2017) #5

Jul 5, 2017

Extremity #5 is another emotional gripping entry into this series. Jerome has done some brutal things but he may have crossed the line in this issue and Thea may have traversed to far into her fathers darkness to return herself. If you only have money for one comic a month then make that comic Extremity, you will not be disappointed.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Extremity (2017) #6

Aug 2, 2017

Extremity is as good as a comic book can get and with only six issues left will this whirlwind of violence and destruction ever end in Thea's life?

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Extremity (2017) #7

Oct 3, 2017

Extremity #7 is the start of the new and final arc of this series. After six issues we have been brought on an emotional journey that only continues to pull the reader in this Issue. Extremity still serves as a wonderful character study of how we react to grief and loss and what happens to us when we lose what we perceive as our defining characteristic. This continues to be one of, if not the best comics out right now and I still stand by my word if you can only buy one comic this week, buy Extremity (you can also pick up the first six issues in trade now to get caught up!).

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Extremity (2017) #8

Nov 1, 2017

Extremity continues to be the best comic on the stands and Extremity #8 continues that trend. Daniel Warren Johnson packs each issue with great characters and has everything you want in a comic book. These characters he has built up since the first issue have really grown and, as a reader, you can connect with each and every one. I really cannot praise Extremity enough and it should be on everyone's pull list!

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Extremity (2017) #9

Dec 5, 2017

I say it every time, but I will say it again, if you only have money for one comic then buy Extremity;it is truly a story that is worth your money. The story is gripping, it is exciting and dramatic;Extremity has everything that you could possibly want out of a comic book, and it keeps getting better and better with each issue. I am running out of good things to say about this series, so just go buy it now and see for yourself

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Extremity (2017) #10

Jan 2, 2018

With only two more issues to go until the conclusion of this series, things are heating up. I really do not know if I am emotionally ready for what Daniel Warren Johnson may or may not do these next two issues. Johnson has brought these characters to life so well and has attached the reader to them that I don't want to see them go through more grief. In issue #10, the story continues to be great and the artwork is beautiful. I say it every time, but if you only have money for one comic, then buy Extremity. You won't be disappointed.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Extremity (2017) #11

Feb 6, 2018

If you have read any of my reviews for this series, you will know it is my favorite comic book out right now. Every issue of Extremity has been an emotional trip filled with great characters, hard-hitting action, and some incredible artwork. I am excited and sad that this is the second to last issue. I am excited to see how Thea and Rollo's story ends and also saddened that it may not be a happy ending. Extremity #11brings Thea and Rollo to face their father who has been consumed with bloodlust and revenge, he may have brought about the destruction of the whole world in the process. Will peace ever be found, and what happens when you've lost everything that makes you whole?

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Extremity (2017) #12

Mar 6, 2018

Extremity #12 is an issue I was happy and sad to read at the same time. Happy because Johnson got to tell his complete story and the saga of Thea got to come full circle. It was awesome to follow this character to her stories "end". Sad because it is over, after twelve issues I have grown to love these characters and world. It is sad to leave it.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Falcon & Winter Soldier (2020) #1

Feb 26, 2020

Falcon & Winter Soldier #1 was a solid start to this five-issue mini-series, but it didn't really blow my hair back either. The story and set up are okay but failed to really bridge that connection between Sam and Bucky that this series really needs. The story itself seems like it needs just a bit more “cooking time” to get going. The art is again solid, working well within the story delivering some nice visuals through the issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Falcon & Winter Soldier (2020) #2

Mar 25, 2020

I was excited about this series and glad that the 2nd issue picked up. Not that the first issue was bad but this issue brought what I was wanting from this series. The interaction between Sam Wilson and Bucky Barnes is excellent as they start this case. You get that bit of snarkiness from the films but there is also this un-easy bond between the two that I hope we get more into with the next issues. The art is excellent as once again Vicentini delivers some splendid action pieces in Falcon & Winter Soldier #2.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.6
Falcon & Winter Soldier (2020) #3

Sep 30, 2020

I almost forgot about this 5-issue mini-series, but was excited that it finally came back out. Though, again, sad about the Disney+ show still being delayed. The comic book is a good replacement and will whet your appetite as we await its arrival.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Falcon & Winter Soldier (2020) #5

Nov 25, 2020

We have come to an end to the series with Falcon & Winter Soldier #5. Overall the series was a fun little romp. It has held me over a bit while waiting on the Falcon and the Winter Soldier series on Disney+. I have had a few minor complaints but I think overall it is a solid, fun series and a good little story. I really enjoyed the ending to the issue/series; it had a nice, more sentimental aspect to it that ended everything on a good note.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Fantastic Four (2018) #1

Aug 8, 2018

The Fantastic Four #1 was a delight to read. Full of hope and adventure to come, along with some big changes for characters. The art by Sarah Pichelli is gorgeous and the highlight of the issue. The continuityof the series does drag the issue down for me; if you are reading Marvel Two-in-One or The Avengers you may be a little confused about a few different things in this issue. Besides that, I had fun reading it and I am very excited about what is teased for the future of the Fantastic Four.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Fantastic Four (2018) #2

Sep 13, 2018

The Fantastic Four #2 is a great issue that finally brings Marvel's first family back together. They are having to deal with a new threat that only the whole family will be able to take on. The new villain kind of came out of nowhere and maybe is not explained the best. But I like where it got us to. If you got to the final page of The Fantastic Four #2 and your heart did not jump a little bit, you might want to check your pulse, because that is a superb final page!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Fantastic Four (2018) #13

Aug 15, 2019

Fantastic Four #13 feels like a classic comic book in many ways. You could really just pick up this issue and enjoy without having read the past twelve issues. Slott lays everything out and all you really need to know is on the pages. So, this is a pretty good place to jump on as it finishes up a two-issue story and it is just a ton of fun. The art catches the battle between the Hulk and the Thing delightfully well and if you like superhero comics I can't really see you not closing this book without a smile on your face!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Fantastic Four (2018): Grimm Noir #1

Feb 28, 2020

If you are a fan of noir type stories or a fan of Ben Grimm then you really have no excuse not to pick up Fantastic Four: Grimm Noir #1. It is a great one-shot story that will keep you engaged throughout. The whole creative team all work excellently together to deliver this story, and it is a story that takes some nice twists and turns along the way, as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Fantastic Four (2018): Negative Zone #1

Nov 28, 2019

I enjoyed both stories in Fantastic Four: Negative Zone. They were both fun and interesting in their own rights. Although, I would say that it might need a different title, maybe. I was a little confused on whether it fell into the ongoing Fantastic Four story or if it dealt with the Annihilation Scourge event that just started. It does not deal with either one of those, which is great. I love one-shot stories and these are two good ones. But, I just think maybe it could have used a different title or something to avoid confusion. Other than that, great Fantastic Four story that is super easy for anybody to jump into and enjoy.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.2
Fathom (2018) #4

Oct 19, 2018

I wasn't expecting much when hopping onto Fathom #4 but was surprisedthat it was a pretty solid comic book. It is not the greatest thing I have ever read but it was not terrible either. It is a little harder to judge just because I jumped in right in the middle of a story. So, I am not taking any of that into account with my review. I liked Oum's art style for the most part, maybe a little more details and structured better but in general, I liked the more sketchy style and designs for the characters. Fathom #4 actually makes me want to go back and read the other previous issues, so it has gotten me a little interested!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
FCBD 2017: TMNT: Prelude To Dimension X #1

May 5, 2017

Overall this is a great issue for not only for fans of the series but new readers alike, you get the main ongoing narrative pushed along, a fun action story that has the turtles battling a new foe and a nice cliffhanger that will have new and old readers alike clamoring to pick up the next issue to follow the TMNT gang on their new mission.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Fear Case #1

Feb 2, 2021

While it may take a little for the art style to grow on you, it is wonderfully vivid and completes this moody, gothic detective story. If you are in the mood for something new, yet familiar at the same time, Fear Case #1 is something you may want to pick up for an interesting read.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Fear Case #2

Mar 2, 2021

Fear Case #2 throws us right back into the mix with Agents Mitchum and Winters. They are closer than anyone ever to solving the “Fear Case”. But their time on the case is running out, with less than 2 weeks to solve it. There is a reason they only let Agents stay on the “Fear Case” for only one year. It starts to mess with your mind. Mitchum and Winter are starting to realize that as they get closer and closer to it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Fear Case #3

Apr 8, 2021

Fear Case continues to be a great mash-up of True Detective and The X-Files. Or at least that is how it feels to me. Though Fear Case #3 reads rather quickly I am excited to see how Matt Kindt wraps all this up in the fourth and final issue. The mystery of the “fear case” continues to grow and there are a reason agents only stay on it for one year. Mitchum and Winter's time is up in 24hrs, but being so close to solving the case will they continue their journey, or has been so close doomed them both?

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
Fear Case #4

May 4, 2021

I am still a bit perplexed with what I think about Fear Case #4 and the series as a whole. I like the open-ended kind of interpretation of it. I am not really sure if I like where it leaves our characters. I am not just really sure and it is hard to put a grade or score on something like this. After the first read, I didn't really enjoy it. But then after reading it again and thinking about it I liked it more.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.2
Flash (2016) #39

Jan 24, 2018

The Flash #39 is a solid comic book, but it should have been so much more for the 700th issue (an oversized issue or something like Marvel is doing for Cap)! The new story arcs set up some nice plots and get the ball moving. The art, for the most part, looks good besides some minor coloring issues. I was really expecting a little bit more for a 700th issue, though.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Flash (2016) #52

Aug 8, 2018

Overall The Flash #52 is a pretty solid issue.As noted, I am not the biggest fan of these new Forces. But then again, it does add something new to Barry Allen's world. The art fits the story well, giving The Flash a good “superhero” feel and delivering some good action. The odd body proportions do drag it down, though. Barry Allen never gets to rest and it is back to the grind in The Flash #52 as new and old threats combine to take down the Scarlet Speedster!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Flash (2016) #53

Aug 22, 2018

The Flash #53 is a fun comic book and was an enjoyable read. Joshua Williamson is doing some interesting things with these new “Forces”. While I am not a fan of the whole “Force” thing at least Williamson is making it interesting. The art fits the story well and makes it a nice visual experience. Probably the biggest downfall is nothing is all that memorable. It is a fun and delightful read but nothing really sticks out either.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
G.I. Joe (2016) #1

Dec 28, 2016

GI Joe #1 is a good introduction into this new Hasbro centered universe IDW has created. Now, I am not saying if you are not familiar with any of these books you won't be a little confused (I was confused by a few pointsand I have no clue what an Action Man is?). But overall, it is a good comic and it was one of our 5 comics not to miss this week. The art has some good "energy" to it and its style fits this team of Joe's. While I would like to see some more details in character faces and backgrounds, it has a great action packed style to it that brings some great energy to this book. While it may take a few more issues to totally get me invested, this is a good start so Yo Joe! For now.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
G.I. Joe (2019) #6

May 28, 2020

GI Joe #6 is not bad, but it is not great either. From the perspective of someone just jumping into the middle of this series, I didn't really feel lost. The opening page catches you up to speed pretty much, but the story itself just kind of dragged along. It had some high points, but overall the characters and story were just lacking. The art is on the same level: not bad, but I am not entirely sure it worked all that well with helping tell a compelling story.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Ghost Rider (2016) #2

Dec 30, 2016

This new Ghost Rider series is starting right off the bat getting Robbie Reyes into the larger Marvel Universe. With The Hulk and Wolverine already making appearances Robbie Reyes is becoming a house hold name (being featured on Agents of S.H.I.E.L.D doesn't hurt either). Felipe Smith continues to do a fantastic job with this new iteration of Ghost Rider by giving him some great emotional depth. With some dynamic art work thrown in the mix and a fun comic book super hero team up coming our way, you should definitely jump in the "Hell Charger" and go for a ride with Ghost Rider #2.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Ghost Rider (2019) #1

Oct 2, 2019

I wasn't blown away by Ghost Rider #1, but it was a solid start to the series. I think Brisson did the best he could do to get everything where it needed to be to start this series. Now that everything is in place I am more interested to see what Brisson has in store later on in the series. There are some nice visuals throughout the issue. The Ghost Riders themselves look ferocious and devilish as ever. If you haven't been keeping up with the goings-on of the Spirits of Vengeance in other Marvel Comics you are going to be lost. But by the end of the issue, you should have enough grasp to enjoy the ride from here on out.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Ghostbusters: Year One #1

Jan 1, 1970

Ghostbusters: Year One #1 is an interesting look into the first year of everyone's favorite paranormal investigators. We get some much-needed detail to the character of Winston Zeddemore and how he came into the fold. If you are a fan of the Ghostbusters movie then this will be a fun and interesting read for you. I am no Ghostbusters superfan, but as someone who grew up on the movie and cartoon this was a fun read. Now, if you have no clue what a Ghostbuster is, then this is a terrible place to start.

View Issue       View Full Review
5.5
Ghoul Scouts: I Was A Teenage Werewolf #4

Jun 28, 2018

It is good for what it is but it doesn't hit the levels of a Misfit City or Mech Cadet Yu all-ages series.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Go Go Power Rangers #1

Jul 27, 2017

This first issue is a magnificent start to this series and exactly what I want out of a Mighty Morphin Power Rangers series. BOOM! Studios' other ongoing MMPR series is great for its own reasons, but this has what I am looking for. I love the focus on the characters as a whole and learning more about them as individuals. I also love that this is starting from the beginning and that they are still coming to terms with what has happened and how this is going to affect their whole lives. The whole creative team just nails the theme and tone of this book and they have me very excited to pick up the next issue! That "Morphin Time!" scene was just grand! Go buy this book today!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Go Go Power Rangers #2

Aug 29, 2017

Go Go Power Rangers is a wonderful read and is absolutely new reader friendly to anyone that wants to jump on board the Power Rangers train. That is a big deal for a series like this as it takes time to develop these characters and get you invested in them. It is fantastic for anybody just getting into the series or long time Power Rangers fans. I love what this series is doing going way back before the Zack, Trini, Billy, Jaso, and Kimberly became Power Rangers and were just “teenagers with attitudes” and focusing on their first days as Power Rangers. The creative team just a superb job of balancing the flashbacks with the present day story line and delivering a great read!

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Go Go Power Rangers #3

Sep 19, 2017

Go Go Power Rangers is absolutely stunning in all aspects of comic book storytelling! The story is fantastic it has drama, humor, and action. It will make you cringe, laugh and jump out of your seat in excitement; making you salivate for the next issue. The art team captures the “teenagers with attitude” perfectly making the story jump off the page! Power Ranger fan or not you are doing yourself a disservice if you are not picking up Go Go Power Rangers. It's the lives of the original Power Rangers you never knew they had, and in Go Go Power Rangers #3 things only get more mixed up in their already hectic lives.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Go Go Power Rangers #4

Oct 18, 2017

Go Go Power Rangers #4 is just another excellent entry into a series that has really surprised me at how good it is. The creative team is delivering exactly what I want from a Power Rangers series.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Go Go Power Rangers #5

Dec 26, 2017

Man, I just love, love, love this series. The creative team is wonderful and has made me fall back in love with the Power Rangers again. The story has been great following the Rangers as they begin their journey. And the new character, Matt, has made for some interesting dynamics and some different stories. Go Go Power Rangers #5 definitely starts to pull the Rangers in new directions, having this new Putty Patroller infiltrating the group and Rita possibly learning some of the Rangers' deep dark secrets. The kids look to be in for some harsh times.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Go Go Power Rangers #6

Jan 23, 2018

Go Go Power Rangers has been a fantastic series since the beginning, and issue #6 continues that trend. Parrott has really dug into these characters and brought out their personalities. Dan Mora and Raul Angulo continue to do wonderful artwork. There is really not much to not like about this series. With Rita's plan actually working and the Rangers struggling with their lives, things are not looking good; plus the big Homecoming dance is coming up!

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Go Go Power Rangers #7

Feb 27, 2018

Go Go Power Rangers continues to be a wonderful book and a series that I am excited to read every month. Every time I think this series cannot get any better, a new issue comes out and it tops the last. I really cannot praise this series enough; even if you do not like Power Rangers, I would still say you would like this series. Go Go Power Rangers #7 has the Rangers go to the Homecoming Dance, but Rita is not much of a dancer well except for “The Monster Mash”!

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Go Go Power Rangers #8

Mar 20, 2018

Go Go Power Rangers #8 is just another fantastic issue in this wonderful series. This continues to be a book I am excited to read each and every month. Now, this is a Shattered Grid prelude and I won't spoil anything with that, but I am a little worried the big event spilling into this little series may ruin some of the magic. Parrott has noted that though it does tie into Shattered Grid,it won't mess this series up, so I guess we will have to trust him. But, I do have my concerns.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Go Go Power Rangers #9

May 2, 2018

If you are worried about Shattered Grid “messing up” the ongoing story in Go Go Power Rangers #9 do not fret. This is another excellent issue of this series. Yes it does tie-in and it pushes that event along but Parrott does not let that take away from the focus of this ongoing story and what Go Go Power Rangers is all about. Plus, I cannot complain about Dan Mora and Ral Angulo getting to take a crack at these amazing designs!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Go Go Power Rangers #10

Jun 5, 2018

I am not the biggest fan of this tying in with Shattered Grid but Parrott has continued to make this series a great read. The core of the book remains intact and introducing the Ranger Slayer has opened up some interesting story points. Again, the art is phenomenal and I enjoy every second of looking at this series. There is really no reason any comic book fan should not be reading this!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Go Go Power Rangers #11

Jul 3, 2018

While Go Go Power Rangers #11 was not my favorite entry to the series, it still is a very solid story and still has incredible art. I might like it more if I was more invested in The Shattered Grid storyline, but for me personally, I do not care about that. I like this series with these Rangers. Ryan Parrott has gotten me very invested in these characters and their story. So, for me, it looks like it is good that this is probably the last issue involving the whole Shattered Grid thing. This issue does have an homage cover to Kevin Smith's Mallratsposter and I have never wanted a variant cover so bad in my life!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Go Go Power Rangers #12

Jul 31, 2018

Go Go Power Rangers #12 should be the last tie-in to Shattered Grid and hopefully it gets back to how the series started. Not that these past issues have been bad, just that Shattered Grid has taken some focus off some more intriguing storylines. Man, I am going to miss Dan Mora's art on this series. He has been wonderful since the beginning and I am truly sad to see him go. Though I am excited to see what he comes out with next. He has some incredible pages throughout this issue and leaves some big shoes to fill.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Go Go Power Rangers #13

Oct 9, 2018

Ryan Parrott gets the story back on track in Go Go Power Rangers #13. I am still flabbergasted on how he gets everything into one issue. He brings up some key story points and leaves us on a fantastic cliffhanger as well. I hate to compare artist but this is the first issue without Dan Mora so it is hard not to. Eleonora Carlini has a great style that fits really well with the tone and feeling of Go Go Power Rangers, it just is not as charismatic or energizing as Mora's. It is not bad art at all and I am sure after an issue or two it will feel more "at home". Overall I am glad "Shattered Grid" is over and we are back to just following the early days of the Mighty Morphin Power Rangers.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Go Go Power Rangers #14

Nov 13, 2018

Ryan Parrott keeps delivering some wonderful stories in this series. In Go Go Power Rangers he somehow continues to grow each and every character and continues to fill out their backstories in delightful ways. All the plots are equally interesting and he keeps the reader fully engaged from page to page and issue to issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Go Go Power Rangers #15

Dec 14, 2018

There is a lot going on in Go Go Power Rangers #15. I didn't even mention the subplot of Baboo maybe going behind Rita's back! Also, that ending, I have a lot of thoughts about it. Since this is spoiler free I won't talk about it, but I will definitely be reviewing issue #16 to give my thoughts on it! Again,Go Go Power Rangers is one of the best comic books out right now. I am not sure if being a Power Rangers book is why I do not hear many people talking about it, but seriously, you do not even have to be a fan of Power Rangers to enjoy the great story, character work, and incredible art delivered in this series.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Go Go Power Rangers #16

Jan 10, 2019

Go Go Power Rangers #16 is another great entry into this series. Though I am not the biggest Green Ranger fan I like that Parrott is slowly building it up in the background of the series. Oh, you thought Parrott forgot about Jason and Trini, mysteriously having papers written for them while they were gone? Well, you will be pleasantly surprised! The art also continues to deliver month after month. This series has been blessed with some incredible talent and it has always looked great. Go Go Power Rangers is a series that I look forward to every month. It is just consistently good with great plotting, character work, great art and just being fun to read comic book!

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Go Go Power Rangers #17

Feb 12, 2019

Go Go Power Rangers is the series I most look forward to reading each and every month. It is consistently that good. I mean I read a lot of good things and it is weird for me to say because I could really care less about Power Rangers in general, but man a good comic is a good comic. Go Go Power Rangers #17 continues to grow the series and was just another fun read. Alpha-1 appearing is a fun little twist and it looks like a lot of trouble for our Ranger pals!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Go Go Power Rangers #18

Mar 13, 2019

Go Go Power Rangers #18 is another solid entry into the series. While not my absolute favorite issue, it still does a lot of interesting things with the characters and sets up a ton of stuff going forward. Parrott continues to develop these character extremely well and has morphed them into something that the original television show could never have done. The art is top notch and fits the series perfectly. There are always some beautiful pages to stop and stare at with each issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Go Go Power Rangers #19

Apr 10, 2019

Go Go Power Rangers continues to be consistently good from month to month. Each issue is just a joy to read. I continue to love this look into the Power Rangers' more everyday lives. The whole creative team works wonderfully well together. Go Go Power Rangers #19 continues to push many different plots forward and has me very excited to see what comes next!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Go Go Power Rangers #20

May 14, 2019

Go Go Power Rangers #20 is a good mid-point issue for the ongoing Alpha-1 main story. Things start ramping up with that main plot while Parrott continues to develop things in the background. We also get some delightful background detail on Ernie and his juice bar that you never knew you needed. This just continues to be one of my favorite series on the shelves, the art is spectacular and a fantastic continuing story.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Go Go Power Rangers #21

Jul 10, 2019

Honestly, the writing itself is not bad, this issue just does not offer what I loved about the series. I just wanted to continue with what was happening in Go Go Power Rangers from the start. But, I mean obviously, that can't go on forever. Which is okay; I got twenty awesome issues of some lovely storytelling and art and not everything has to be for me. Hopefully hardcore Power Rangers fans dig this and enjoy! So the score could be higher for Power Rangers fans or people really into the Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers comic. For me, I think it is time to “Morph” out of the series.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Go Go Power Rangers: Forever Rangers #1

Jun 18, 2019

I am sure Parrot will continue to develop his ongoing stories and keep the focus on building these characters, but I can say that I am a little sad. I am going to miss just hanging out with these five “original” Power Rangers. These were the characters I grew up with and Parrott transformed them in amazing ways. I wouldn't mind having another 20 issues just following them until we caught up with other series. But things must change and go on. Plus I have all the old issues to look back on, with some beautiful artwork.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
God Complex (2017) #1

Oct 11, 2017

God Complex #1 is a good start to this series, while I am not completely sold on the series right now the story has enough to make me be interested and come back for more information and the characters are just wonderful to look at. I will be interested to see if the story picks up a little bit more from the first issue and if we get more information about this world in issue #2 as to not be totally lost. For now, God Complex #1 is a pretty solid first issue, not perfect, but it still has a lot to enjoy.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
God Complex (2017) #2

Nov 24, 2017

Overall, I am really enjoying God Complex even if I am not 100% sure of what's happening. I enjoy the world that is being built and the mythology around it. Plus, with those wonderful character designs, it is immediately eye-catching when the Rulers are on the page. God Complex #2 continues to build upon the mystery that we were introduced to in the first issue and by the end of this second issue, things only get more complicated for Seneca.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
God Country #1

Jan 11, 2017

God Country #1 is a fantastic first issue, the creative team puts together a fantastic story with a great hook to it. Personally, I really like that it's tackling the issue of Alzheimer's/dementia and the strain it not only places on the person afflicted with that disease but also the strain it puts on their family members as well. It's something you do not see talked about very often and rarely in the comic book medium and it's good to have stories like this out there that shine some light on it. The set up of the issue being told as a story passed down from generations is great and give it a feel of an old west folk tale that makes the book that more enjoyable.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
God Country #2

Feb 15, 2017

I am still loving this series especially how it is covering an issue like Alzheimer's while also bringing in a crazy fantasy story to boot. Shaw is building a wonderful story making Emmett a very poignant character. The scenes of an old man walking and talking with a god in the Texas landscape or both funny in a since and oddly heart breaking in God Country #2. Seeing Emmett so joyful in remembering something so simple as his name is heart breaking. It makes perfect since why he would not want to give up Valofax. The bigger question is what is that going to mean for his family and maybe the fate of earth itself? God Country #2is not only a great fantasy storybut a great story about family and disease and how that affects everything around you.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
God Country #3

Mar 17, 2017

By the end of this issue, you will be dying to read the next installment in the series. God Country continues to impress with great storytelling and beautiful art that mesmerizes the reader. The creative team has made this series a must read. The tale of a man with Alzheimer's and is family struggles are just as compelling as a "god sword" battling demons and that is what makes God Country such a great comic book.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
God Country #4

Apr 19, 2017

God Country #4 continues to impress with fantastic storytelling and a creative team that is firing on all cylinders. By the end of this issue, Emmett must confront that now wielding Valofax is truly affecting his family and putting them in great danger, he can't stand for that. War has come to Texas and Emmett Quinlan wants to let the gods know that now he is ready for battle! God Country is simply put and amazing book that shows comic books at its best.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
God Country #5

May 17, 2017

Issue #5 of God Country delivers on the all out war from the previous issue and Emmett has to decision to make and what is best for his family. The creative team on God Country has truly delivered an epic story thus far and with only one more issue to go, it will interesting where they take the Quinlan family and if they can stick the proverbial landing in concluding this series. Everything comes to a head and with one more issue to go Texas will never be the same again.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
God Country #6

Jun 22, 2017

God Country #6 is a satisfying conclusion to Donny Cate's and Geoff Shaw's epic tale of Quinlan family. The scope of this series was big being about “gods”, wars and such, but yet it was a small family tale that is the heart and “meat” of the story. God Country is all about family and is truly a heart warming story from beginning to end and has been one of the best books of 2017 so far. God Country will grab you attention and keep you with it from beginning to end so don't wait “Come and Take it!”

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Godzilla: Rage Across Time #2

Oct 5, 2016

Overall,Godzilla Rage Across Time #2 is not a bad book, however, it fails to deliver at the end. We get a good story of Godzilla fighting the gods of ancient Greece, but the art fails to deliver the epic feel it needs to hold the book up. While Godzilla fans will be happy to see him raging against the gods, I can't really see a casual reader wanting to go on to the next issue with no plot or story point to really hold onto.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Godzilla: Rage Across Time #3

Oct 19, 2016

Overall, this issue was disappointing. The first issue at least tried something different with the art, while these past two issues have just been bland and un-exciting which is a sin for a Godzilla book. Rage Across Time's story is not going to shock or amaze anybody so the art should be something that is really going to grab the reader and this just does not do that. There is really nothing here to excite the reader or have them clamoring for the next issue. Inherently that is the problem with a rotating creative team it's "like a box of chocolates you never know what you're going to get", well here is hoping issue #4 and #5 bring the rage back to this book.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Godzilla: Rage Across Time #4

Nov 18, 2016

Overall this is probably the second best issue of this mini series (the first issue still being the best overall), while issues #2 and #3 failed to deliver any excitement, at least issue #4 had a fun story and some nice art to look at. It is still not the greatest thing in the world, there is still no emotional connection to this comic or story line. These books really need to have big battles and set pieces to make it grab readers and keep them engaged; for the most part this issue does that. From the looks of it issue #5 should give us want we want from this series, Godzilla all out brawling with other Monsters/Dinosaurs. If you are not going to give any kind of emotional connection with a through story line or main protagonists you got to have these big set pieces and battles to have something for the reader to grasp onto. I am actually excited for issue #5 and hope it delivers!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.6
Godzilla: Rage Across Time #5

Nov 23, 2016

Conclusion: Overall all issue #5 delivers what the title of this mini serieshas promised all along an all out epic battle of Godzilla in a different time period! The creative team does a good job of capturingthis and delivering that. Issue #1 did deliver some fantastic art and story, but the other issues( #2, #3, #4) failed to deliver anything too exciting. If you are looking for a Godzilla book with a great story line and epic monster battles just go buy the collection of Godzilla: Half Century Warand you won't be disappointed. If you are looking for a single issue that has almost all of Godzilla's baddies and dinosaurs with some total weirdness sprinkled in then Godzilla Rage Across Time #5willat least make you smile.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.2
Goosebumps: Download & Die! #1

Mar 28, 2018

Goosebumps: Download and Die #1 is another fun issue and looks like it will be another delightful story. It does have the same pitfalls as the last three-issue arc. It starts off slow and it is a little hard to keep my interest (I ended up really liking the other two issues in the previous arc, though). I still feel like IDW would be better off taking a cue from Andrew Maclean's Head Lopper series and maybe releasing these as a nice three-issue collection every three or four months instead of one issue every month. The story follows the Goosebumps concept well, but I am not sure that transfers well into comic book form, broken up into three different parts instead of one whole story.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.2
Goosebumps: Monsters At Midnight #1

Oct 26, 2017

I am judging Goosebumps Monsters at Midnight #1 on what it is a revamp of Goosebumps in comic book form for a younger audience and I am wondering how that is going to go? Do kids read Goosebumps novels anymore? I know there was a movie released last year, for someone like me who grew up reading the books and watching the tv show I get all the little jokes and nods throughout Goosebumps Monster at Midnight #1 and characters that are in it, but I am just curious how someone younger and not as familiar with the franchise would feel about Goosebumps Monsters at Midnight#1? It is a pretty good all-ages book, nothing great but it is off to a good start and I am intrigued by the rotating format that if one story does not catch my eye I will be on the look at in a few months for the next one.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Goosebumps: Secrets of the Swamp #1

Sep 16, 2020

Goosebumps: Secrets of the Swamp #1 is a great start to another Goosebumps comic book volume. From the first issue, this might be my favorite one so far. I am still not completely sold on releasing these as single issues and just not one paperback collecting the story. But I am glad they are still coming out, and hope these show up at book fairs across the country (if those are still a thing?). Travel back to Fever Swamp and remember “who's afraid of the big bad wolf?”.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.8
Goosebumps: Horrors of the Witch House #1

Apr 30, 2019

Goosebumps: Horrors of the Witch House #1 is a solid start to a new three-part Goosebumps comic. IDW has been doing a good job of getting creative teams together to not only catch that Goosebumps "essence" for the series, but the art also has a very consistent tone to it as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Goosebumps: Download & Die! #2

Apr 10, 2018

Goosebumps: Download and Die has picked up steam with issue#2. Mitra's new mysterious phone is starting to take her over and bad things begin to happen. Will she getrid of her phone to save her friendship, or is it the only friend she needs now? This issue ramps up the spooky/creepy side of the story and has me very interested how the story isgoing to end. With one more issue to go, Mitra is in big trouble and, as we know in the Goosebumps world, we don't always get a happy ending!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Goosebumps: Secrets of the Swamp #2

Nov 3, 2020

Goosebumps: Secrets of the Swamp #2 was a solid entry into the series but I am not sure how much it is holding my attention. The pacing felt a little weird. I am not sure how it is going to hold up for three more issues. The art is solid but I would like a little more energy from the visuals. But I still enjoy a lot of things about the series. The issue did have a nice eerie, spooky feel to it. The werewolf designs are good, and for younger readers, I can see this being a good horror medium for them.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.8
Goosebumps: Horrors of the Witch House #2

Jun 11, 2019

Goosebumps: The Horrors of the Witch House #2 looks to be another solid entry into IDW's comic book Goosebumps series. Again I am not sure what age group they are looking for but, these seem like a good fit for younger readers or a kid that is easily scared. They have bits and pieces of scariness but as a whole are not that frightening. I would like them to maybe get a little scarier. I am not talking full-on horror, but it does feel like they could ramp it up just a tiny bit at times.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Goosebumps: Monsters At Midnight #3

Feb 13, 2018

Overall this first three-issue story arc for the Goosebumps comic series feels like a success. The only major problem would be that I do not like it coming out in single issues. When the three issues are combined it feels just like a Goosebumps book that would be great for kids, but being split up into three single issues the story kind of flounders. That is really the only downside and I really think this will sell great to kids as a collected story instead of in single issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Gotham City Monsters #1

Sep 11, 2019

Gotham City Monsters #1 was a great issue to get me into the “fall/Halloween” spirit even though it is early September and 96 degrees outside. Orlando does an exceptional job of writing Frankenstein and I am excited to see a lot more of that character. Orlando also makes it easy to jump into this six-issue mini-series with no prior knowledge and enjoy yourself and get invested in the story. The art is solid as well; it sets a nice tone and feel for the story and there are some good visuals throughout the issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Gotham City Monsters #2

Oct 10, 2019

Gotham City Monsters #2 is exactly the kind of book I like to read around this time of year. It has all types of weird monsters running around, it is a bit serious and it is a bit absurd and silly all at the same time. It is a little horror and a little comedy and it leans into each of those well throughout the story. While it is not “perfect”, I can't help but have a good time while reading this during the spookiest month of the year.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Grass Kings #1

Mar 8, 2017

The Grass Kingdom is a refuge for people wanting to live for themselves. This community is built upon people wanting to live apart from society and have a place under their own control. Three brothers rule the Grass Kingdom and control who comes into their refuge. When Bruce one of the three brothers is escorting a man out of town many questions are raised. Why is this land ruled deferentially, how come they can control who comes in and are they possibly harvesting a killer?

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Grass Kings #2

Apr 13, 2017

Grass Kings #2 sets the story of this series in full motion now that the series set up in issue #1 is done. We get some great character information and it leaves off with a fantastic cliffhanger. Kindt writes great emotional dialogue and has scripted a great family drama/mystery story that grips the reader's mind. Jenkins continues to give the series an almost "melancholy" feel with his art style. This issue of Grass Kings continues the mystery of "The Grass Kingdom", Kindt weaves drama and mystery together in a Twin Peaksesque town.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Grass Kings #3

May 10, 2017

Matt Kindt and Tyler Jenkins prove to be a great creative team and keep delivering a fantastic story in Grass Kings. Questions are still left unanswered but in issue #3 we do start to get an inkling of why Sheriff Humbert wants in The Grass Kingdom and get some more information about the possible serial killer in the midst. The introduction of Maria into the Grass Kingdom and why she is there introduces nothing but trouble for Richard and his brothers. It has never been easy to rule the Grass Kingdom and things just got a lot more complicated for the Grass Kings.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Grass Kings #4

Jun 14, 2017

Grass Kings has been a very interesting series so far with dream like art work from Jenkins and some very strange story and plotting, but great character work from Kindt it is definitely something that is not to be missed.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.7
Grass Kings #5

Jul 11, 2017

Grass Kings has been hit and miss with me so far. I really like Kindt's story-telling abilities and how he really brings each character to life and really has some heart wrenching things in this series, but the fact that it is set in the “real world” and the “Grass kingdom” is never really explained is very frustrating from a readers standpoint, especially after five issues. Jenkins's water colors are truly magical and stand out in this series, but as stated earlier his art style is not very well suited for this more action-oriented story. Grass Kings #5 is a good entry into the series and raises the stakes for what is to happen next, but it does have some major flaws to it.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Grass Kings #6

Aug 11, 2017

Grass Kings #6 is a satisfying conclusion to the first story arc, and it succeeded in setting up major characters and plots that will hopefully be touched upon in the upcoming issues. I was hot and cold on this series" while the premise is interesting and having Robert make some huge character developments throughout these six issues was great, it is what Kindt has set up going forward that has me really excited for the future of this series. I will remain spoiler free from what the last little teaser is, but it is a shocker that will have you clamoring for the next issue!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Grass Kings #7

Sep 13, 2017

Grass Kings #7 dives straight into the mystery of the possibility of a serial killer being in the Grass Kingdom, and it is a great turn for the series to take. After the bombastic first arc of basically going to “war” with Sheriff Humbert and discovering the history of the Grass Kingdom, it is nice to have a slow mystery that builds up tension in the kingdom and lets the reader get to know more characters in this series. Matt Kindt and Tyler Jenkins make a wonderful team and there is really nothing like Grass Kings on the shelves right now!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Grass Kings #10

Dec 12, 2017

Grass Kings continues to be one of the most intriguing comic books out right now. The story takes so many twists and turns, and all the characters are so interesting. With each issue of Grass Kings, the story just gets taken into so many different interesting areas that we never truly know who to trust. In a place where people came to get away from society and to live off the grid, people are going to have their secrets. But could the Grass Kingdom be harvesting a serial killer, and what other secrets does this land hold?

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Grass Kings #11

Jan 10, 2018

Grass Kings has slowly become one of my favorite comic bookseries. It has this story that is completely gripping and will have you thinking about it long after you put it down. The writing, the art"it is all fantastic and has built something special. I am not sure what happens after Grass Kings #11 as at the end it says “End Part Two,” but you bet I will be picking up the next issue!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Grass Kings #12

Feb 13, 2018

Grass Kings has gone from an interesting book, that I was not really sure what it was about, to an absolute must read for me. I have talked about it a lot in past reviews, but I love how this story has transformed. I am excited for each and every issue of this series. Kindt has done an incredible job with this story and characters. Coupled with Tyler and Hilary Jenkins “dream” like art makes Grass Kings stand out in a sea of comic books.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Grass Kings #13

Mar 13, 2018

Grass Kings feels like a good serial television show. Each issue gives the reader a little piece of a continually-building story that is slowly but surely building to a climactic ending. Kindt has woven a fantastic tale that has transformed into a superb mystery and suspenseful comic book series.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Grass Kings #14

Apr 25, 2018

Grass Kings surprisesme with each and every issue on how much I have grown to love it. The story is fully engrossing and the mystery has dug deep into my psyche. Grass Kings #14 is thepenultimate issue with only one more issue to go before the series conclusion! Everything is set up in this issue for the big finale and Ihonestly do not know what is going to happen and it has me very excited!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Grass Kings #15

May 29, 2018

Grass Kings #15 is a good ending to a great series. It does not wrap everything up in a nice, neat bow, but it will give the reader a lot to think about and it does not disappoint. The pacing of the final issue is done tremendously well and does not string along any of its big reveals. Grass Kings is a series that has grown on me with each and every issue. It is a series that, as each issue ended, it was satisfying but had me looking forward to the next one. I am very excited to read this all in one big collection now to see if there are any clues I missed in the first few issues about what was happening in the Grass Kingdom.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Green Arrow (2016) #30

Sep 6, 2017

Green Arrow #30 (Hard-Traveling Hero Part 5) is another great entry in this series. Ollie is in a lot of trouble, but luckily he has friends on the ground and in the air to help him out. Will it be enough to defeat the nefarious Ninth Circle? Benjamin Percy nails all the voices of the characters and is weaving a fantastic tale. Having Otto Schmidt on art duties raises this series to a new level, with his superb character detail and great visual story telling ability. The hard-traveling heroes road only gets harder from here and in space, where no one can hear you scream!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Green Arrow (2016) #31

Sep 19, 2017

Green Arrow #31 is an end to the Hard Traveling Hero storyline, but it may not be the end of Oliver Queen's life on the road. With beautiful art and an all-around fun superhero story, this is a must-read for Green Arrow and DC comics fans alike. This story has definitely pushed Green Arrow in a new direction and it is going to be very exciting to see where the creative team takes the Emerald Archer from here! The hard travels are over, but the adventures are just beginning!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Green Arrow (2016) #39

Apr 4, 2018

All in all, I am glad I jumped back on Green Arrow. The new creative team is delivering a very interesting story. Green Arrow is fighting against a new villain in Nothing and by the end of Green Arrow #39, the emerald archer is in some deep trouble.Jackson Lanzing & Collin Kelly create a good jumping on point for new readers and start this new story off with a bang, whileMarcio Takara andMarcelo Maiolo deliver some superb artwork. I hope the bi-weekly schedule does not throw Takara off of Green Arrow for the next issue. But, the story is interesting enough in its own right to hold me for another issue at least.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Green Lantern (2018) #1

Nov 7, 2018

The Green Lantern #1 is a solid start to the series. I don't think it will be as mind-blowing as people are expecting, but I also do not think that is what Morrison is going for, either. It fits his idea of "space cop drama." That has me really interested to continue this series to see what predicaments he puts Hal Jordan in. It also helps the art is marvelous in The Green Lantern #1. Sharp and Orzechowski bring a visual flair to The Green Lantern #1 that is a pure delight to look at.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.2
Green Lantern (2018) #2

Dec 5, 2018

The Green Lantern #2 is a hard book for me to judge. I like most of it. The story is intriguing and after this issue, I have somewhat of a better grasp on it. I enjoy the art as well; Sharp has a wonderfully detailed style and I love seeing all of these crazy aliens brought to life. On the other hand, I was very confused about a lot of things storywise in this issue and mainly my faith in Grant Morrison bringing this all together in later issues kept me. The art also is not very dynamic. It looks beautiful but I wish it had a little more “flow” or a sense of motion to it. The Green Lantern #2 is a solid issue with some flaws. For now, it has enough good going for it to keep me on board.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Green Lantern (2018) #6

Apr 3, 2019

I feel the same way after I read an issue of The Green Lantern as I do after watching an episode of Twin Peaks. I am not 100% sure what I saw or what it was about, but I liked it. We saw some crazy visuals and it had familiar story points, and then it went in an odd direction. And, much like a Twin Peaks episode, I immediately wanted to talk with somebody about it. The Green Lantern #6 is a great "episode" in this series; if you have been liking it so far, then you will adore this issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Green Lanterns #34

Nov 2, 2017

Being my first ever Green Lantern centered comic book experience, I was super impressed with Green Lanterns #34. Tim Seeley writes a really great comic book and this issue had everything that I look for in a good superhero story. The heroes have regular everyday life struggles that they have to deal with while still going out and doing something extraordinary. Simon Baz and Jessica Cruz have some great scenes together and I really like them as a team. Green Lanterns #34 was a really fun read for me and I will definitely be following the series for the near future!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Green Lanterns #35

Nov 16, 2017

I am loving Green Lanterns. The past two issues I have read have been just wonderful superhero books. Tim Seeley delivers what I want in a superhero story. We get to see our heroes doing ordinary things and extraordinarythings simultaneously. We get to see them rise up and become something greater while they attempt to live ordinary lives. The art is also amazing in Green Lanterns #35. The artwork is bold and fits perfectly in a superhero book. I continue to be impressed with how easy it was for a new reader (of Green Lanterns) to jump in on this series in the 34th issue and still enjoy the story. I am excited about this issue and what comes next and that's a great credit to the creative team!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Green Lanterns #36

Dec 6, 2017

Green Lanterns continuesto just be a great superhero comic book, it is tons of fun to read and the story continues to build upon itself having the reader anticipating the next issue. Tim Seeley has made me a fan of Green Lanterns Simon Baz and Jessica Cruz, so if you are looking for a good superhero comic book then you may want to check this series out!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Green Lanterns #37

Dec 20, 2017

alternate cover by Brandon PetersonGreen Lanterns is quickly becoming one of my favorite comic books to read. It is has a very “classic” comic-book feel to me. That is not putting itdown or anything. It just feels like Green Lanterns has that great superhero comic-book feel to it that I do not get from other series. The story is good and has a nice cliffhanger ending and the art is very solid (I just wish we could get a consistentteam on this series). I am excited to read Green Lanterns every time it comes out, and for me, that is the sign of a good series!

View Issue       View Full Review
1.5
Grifter (1995) #1

Apr 15, 2020

I don't want to stereotype '90s comics anymore than they already are. There are some great ones in this era. The same as with every era, there are stinkers in all of them. Grifter #1 just happens to play into just about every '90s comic stereotype. The storytelling is not very good and I lost my interest in this character after two pages. It is all a bit too self-serious and just not for me.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Grit #1

Jul 21, 2020

Grit #1 is another one of those books that I am liking the concept behind, but it felt like it is just missing a tiny something in this first issue to make it all come together. The art is good and the character is interesting, but it just needs maybe that "extra pinch of salt" to really bring out the flavor. Maybe the second issue will bring that; we will just have to wait and see, for now.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Grit #2

Aug 25, 2020

Grit #2 is a solid entry and a good second issue. If you liked the first issue then you will certainly love Grit #2. I am not exactly sure what the series is, what it is going for, or where it is going. But it is not boring and will keep you interested through each page-turn. The art delivers from page to page. For right now, Grit is about an old man killing goblins, witches, demons, and who knows what else. In Grit #2 he may even make a "frenemy".

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Grit #3

Sep 16, 2020

Grit #3 was a good issue and a pretty solid ending to the series. But I am a bit torn with the series as a whole. On one hand, I really just like the feel and tone of it. The setting, Old Man Barrow, Ari the Witch are all wonderfully done. It was a fun three-issue romp and I want more. But at the same time, the story itself told in these three issues really didn't knock my socks off. It was okay, but felt like it needed more breathing room.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.6
Grumpy Cat/Garfield #1

Aug 1, 2017

Overall this comic delivers just about exactly what it promises, so in that, it is a success. The main take away from this Issue is that Grumpy Cat and Garfield apparently live in the same universe, on the same earth and relatively close to each other. That makes the differing visuals and colors all that more striking and odd. Shouldn't they look somewhat the same or at least be from alternate Earths or realities. I am probably thinking way too much into a Grumpy Cat Garfield comic if you like either one of these cats you will find this somewhat entertaining.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
HaHa #1

Jan 12, 2021

I am not exactly sure what to tell you about Haha #1. The story is a strange one, something that I just can't quite put my finger on. It is one of those stories that, after you put it down, still kind of sticks with you for an odd reason. Not for the normal reasons, just because it is so odd and that, for me, I keep coming up with different reasons for what Prince may have been going for.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Hal Jordan And The Green Lantern Corps #37

Jan 24, 2018

Hal Jordan and the Green Lanterns #37 has a pretty solid story with some beautiful art. Hal and Kyle are going toe to toe with Zod while John has his own internal battle with giving the Guardians a second chance. All around this is a fun comic and a good jumping-on point for a new reader. The story arc is off to a solid start, and if the art stays this stellar, we are in for a ride. I like what is set up in this issue and will be coming back for more!

View Issue       View Full Review
6.8
Hal Jordan And The Green Lantern Corps #38

Feb 14, 2018

Overall, I am liking the story being told in Hal Jordan and the Green Lantern Corps #38. Again, it is not a groundbreaking story or anything, but it is a solid superhero story. It is cool to see the Lanterns go up against unusual villains and how they are going to deal with them. The only major let down is the art stumbles a little with issue #38 when compared to issue #37. While still good comic book art it lacks the energy of issue #37.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Hal Jordan And The Green Lantern Corps #40

Mar 14, 2018

Hal Jordan and The Green Lantern Corps #40 is just plain and simple a fun superhero comic book. The story is not groundbreaking or anything super special, but it does not always have to be. Sometimes I just want my heroes to do superhero stuff and that is exactly what this story arc is delivering. It is letting the Green Lanterns looseon some Kryptonianfoes and it is just fun! The art really shines in Hal Jordan and The Green Lantern Corps #40. It is wonderfully detailed and fills the issue with tons of excitement and energy. No, it is not the greatestthing I have ever read or seen, but man it was a joy and a delight to read!

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Hawkeye: Freefall #1

Jan 3, 2020

Rosenberg weaves a fun and dramatic story and looks to be putting his own stamp on the character of Clint Barton. Meanwhile, Otto Schmidt delivers some splendid visuals that add in a fun and adventurous tone to the series.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Hawkeye: Freefall #3

Feb 13, 2020

Hawkeye: Freefall #3 confirms that there is no logical reason you should not be reading this series. It is fun and dramatic and keeps the reader on their toes throughout. The art is a visual splendor to look at and fits the tone of the series perfectly. Since the mystery is out that Hawkeye is Ronin, Clint's life has gotten a lot harder. Can he trust a former henchman of The Hood to keep his secret? Why would Clint Barton, the Avenger, do this, and exactly how is he doing this? Find out in Hawkeye: Freefall #3.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Hawkeye: Freefall #5

May 20, 2020

Hawkeye: Freefall #5 is another great issue in this series. As I spoke about before I love the tension and tone it builds throughout the issue. You can feel and know something is going to go wrong and when it does it goes from bad to worse for Clint Barton. Even though it is only digital know I am glad the series is at least getting to get finished up and maybe we will get a nice print collection soon! Plus I mean hey new comics so can't complain too much right now!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Hawkeye: Freefall #6

Jul 1, 2020

The art, obviously, I love, and Otto Schmidt continues to do stunning work. I hope Hawkeye: Freefall #6 is not the last we see of him at Marvel. There are a ton of other characters I would love to see him draw. Just great work all around; the art has been fantastic through each and every issue of this series.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.5
Hawkman (2018) #5

Oct 10, 2018

I mostly enjoyed Hawkman #5; it was a fun story that harkened back to the golden age era. I do wish we would stop focusing on Hawkman's past and just let him do some adventure stuff orhave some kind of other stories though. The art, for the most part, is good sequential work. There is one big error in Hawkman #5. In one panel toward the beginning, The Atom is supposed to be explaining to Hawkman that he is in the Microverse but the balloon dialogue boxes are on the wrong characters. In all fairness, I am reading an early digital review copy so hopefully, this got fixed. But it is a pretty big error and it threw me off for a few seconds.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Head Lopper #5

Mar 14, 2017

Everyone's favorite warrior is back for another adventure and it does not take long for the heads to start flying! Head Lopper is back for another adventure! He is joined by his fellow warriors Zhaania Kota K and her apprentice XHO. Oh yes and Agatha is still hanging with Head Lopper making snippy comments. Zhaania has a score to settle and the battle begins at the Crimson Tower. Beast will be battled, the adventure will be had and yes heads will be lopped!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Head Lopper #6

Jun 23, 2017

This issue is another great entry into the Head Lopper series. Maclean continues to deliver a story that has action, adventure, and drama that should not be missed by any comic book fan. Having Jordie Bellaire join in on the fun enhances the story and art to another degree. Ulrich "The Twice Damned" will try to stop Norgal "The Head Lopper" at any cost, will it be Norgal and his warrior friends blood that fills The Crimson Tower or can they conquer Ulrich and his devilish trials?

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Head Lopper #7

Sep 19, 2017

Head Lopper continues to be one of the most exciting and best-looking books on the shelves; with a great adventure fantasy story that will have the reader on the edge of their seat and will have their eyes gleaming with excitement. The quarterly installments of this series fit perfectly and you get more than your money's worth with Head Lopper #7. With only one more issue to go the warriors a getting closer and closer to getting to the end of the Trial of the Crimson Tower, with so many warriors already lost will they be able to defeat the Trails of the Crimson Towers or fall to its might?

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Head Lopper #8

Dec 19, 2017

Head Lopper #8 alt cover by Skinner, Alexis ZirrittHead Lopper and the Crimson Tower is an absolutely fantastic read and Head Lopper #8 has a near-perfect ending for this storyline. MacLean pulls out all the stops and will definitely have the readers on the edge of their seats while reading this issue! It is the big finale of the Crimson Tower storyline and blood will be drawn, tears will be shed and, oh yes, heads will be lopped!

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Head Lopper #9

Sep 12, 2018

Head Lopper #9: And the Knights of Venoriah Vol. 3 (1 of 4) starts off another head-lopping adventure you are not going to want to miss out on! Andrew MacLean brings Norgal and Agatha back for another exciting adventure. With 56 pages of action, adventure, drama, it is well worth $4.99.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Head Lopper #11

Mar 12, 2019

Head Lopper #11 is another good entry into the series. I like the quarterly format; it is just that in this Vol. 3 of the series there is a lot more going on with multiple characters, and at times it is a little hard to remember the main story thread. It still remains a wonderful sword-and-sorcery, fantasy, hack-and-slash story like none other. The art is stunningly good. And I am always excited to see what Andrew MacLean has dreamed up for each new issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Head Lopper #12

Jun 26, 2019

Head Lopper #12 is a very satisfying ending to the third volume of the great quarterly adventure comic. While I do feel like the story may have had a bit too much going on at times, it did not deter my overall enjoyment of the series. We get some interesting new insights to our favorite Head Lopping hero and really, this issue feels like the ending to a big movie. We get the huge sprawling battle against a vast variety of foes and a nice setup for the continuing adventures of Norgal and Agatha. I do also continue to really enjoy the quarterly format, even though this volume maybe had a bit too much going on for it. It is nice to get a big bulky story.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Head Lopper #13

Sep 16, 2020

If you are a fan of Head Lopper then you have been foaming at the mouth to get your hands on Head Lopper #13. If you are new to the adventure you probably want to pick up the first three volumes. Head Lopper and the Quest for Mulgrid's Stair Vol. 4 (#1 of 4) is a wonderful start to another quarterly adventure for Norgal. Full of intrigue, deception, and secrets revealed (and of course head-lopping), this is an issue not to be missed!

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Head Lopper #14

Dec 15, 2020

While Head Lopper #14 might not have had as "full" of a story as previous installments, it is still an incredibly good issue and just continues to be a fantastic series, overall. I don't think there has been a bad issue of Head Lopper. If you are looking for an adventure comic full of sword, sorcery, monsters, and intriguing characters, you have to be reading Head Lopper.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Head Lopper #15

Mar 16, 2021

A quarter of the year is already done and we get a Head Lopper issue to celebrate. Head Lopper #15 is an excellent issue and a great entry to this series. Maclean gets a lot more in-depth with our bearded, head-lopping hero, Norgal. Has slowly started to peel back the layers to him, with great effect. MacLean also does a great job of bringing us back into the fold of the story. After three months away, it can be a little difficult to remember where we left off. MacLean has seemed to have found that sweet spot of not totally recapping the issue, but yet, still giving us enough information to jog our memories.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Head Lopper #16

Jul 31, 2021

If you love fantasy adventure comics you should be reading Head Lopper. The quarterly format is fantastic and you get a wealth of story for your money. Head Lopper #16 wraps up the most recent story arc with some wild action. Maclean also sets things up for the next quarterly adventure in fantastic ways. I am truly excited to see what he has in store for Norgal and the crew as their journey continues.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Home Sick Pilots #1

Dec 8, 2020

It is hard to pin down what exactly Home Sick Pilots #1 is, or wants to be. As solid as the first issue is, it still hasn't completely sold me yet. But I am interested to see where the creative team wants to take this story.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Home Sick Pilots #2

Jan 12, 2021

Home Sick Pilots #2 is an odd book. From a high school punk band finding a place to do a show, to a girl dealing with her own self and tragedy by becoming a specter of a house and findings its lost objects, it is a weird setup. But man, I am certainly digging it right now. I won't say it is perfect, but I find myself captivated by it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Home Sick Pilots #3

Feb 9, 2021

Home Sick Pilots is a weird adventure and I am all aboard for it. It is heartfelt and emotional, yet fun and goofy at the same time. It is scary and morose, yet still fun and full of mystery. A mixture of a bunch of different things that, when I say out loud, totally shouldn't work together. But I find myself excited for each issue now.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Home Sick Pilots #4

Mar 9, 2021

I just don't know what to really think about Home Sick Pilots #4 or the series. Look, I am very much enjoying myself with each and every issue. It mixes and matches seriousness with fun. It is weird and interesting. I just wish I had a little more of the story to hold onto. We get some interesting developments in this issue, but it also opens up a whole new set of questions, while others have yet to be answered.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Home Sick Pilots #5

Apr 13, 2021

Home Sick Pilots #5 wraps up the first story arc for the series. It is a weird one to end on, just in that, it is five issues and not the standard four or six issue story arc for the trade paperback. But also that by the end of this issue we are on a completely different story than what the series started. And that first story still has a thousand questions from me. I thought this was going to be series about a high school punk band and a haunted house. Which is kind of is, but also turned into a Power Rangers, Ghostbusters series as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Home Sick Pilots #6

Jun 24, 2021

But, man do I really continue to like it and want more at the same time. These ghosts/mech/creature things continue to be great. I mean you mention '90s power rangers, punk rock and giant battles I am coming for more.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Home Sick Pilots #7

Jul 22, 2021

Home Sick Pilots continues to be a series for me that I like, but have a hard time with at the same time. I think the first few issues not focusing on the characters hurt it a little bit. As these issues start to connect us back with the friends/bandmates of The Home Sick Pilots. Bt, the concept and overall "idea" of the story coming together is a ton of fun. Giant walking, fighting haunted houses, controlled like mechs powered by ghosts! I think this series is starting to slowly morph into what it needs to be, just hope it is not too late for it.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Home Sick Pilots #8

Aug 19, 2021

Home Sick Pilots #8 is another solid entry in the series. But, I wish it would lean a little more into the "campiness" of it all. I wish that "Power Rangers" vibe bled a little bit more through with the series. As much as I like the idea and most parts of the story it still just feels like it is missing a little something to make it great.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.4
Home Sick Pilots #10

Oct 14, 2021

There are a lot of good things I like about Home Sick Pilots. The characters are well written and the story concept is fantastic. I mean ghost powered giant robots fighting ghost powered haunted houses and 90's high school punk bands! Plus the visuals are tremendously well done and the overall design of the series is fantastic.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Home Sick Pilots #11

Jan 22, 2022

For me Home Sick Pilots #11 fulfills what this book promised to be. It is a highly fun and imaginative book that is all sorts of goofiness that a plot of giant mech type things powered by ghosts should be. But it also, plays with that serious note as well. The story tone is balances wonderfully well in this issue. It is that high school, punk band, coming of age, power rangers esq book that was promised. It is wholeheartedly serious and dramatic story telling, yet silly and fun all at the same time!

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Home Sick Pilots #12

Feb 16, 2022

Home Sick Pilots #12 brings a wild Scooby Doo adventure to the punk rock kids. Having to chase down the final ghost for the Old James House opens up the mystery and the history of how this all came to be. The series has been on a big upswing for me recently and I dug everything about this issue. From the drama/friendship between Rip and Buzz to the wonderful creature designs featured. I do still find myself wishing this series was more episodic. I mean I know I said Scooby Doo, but just imagine Scooby Doo episodes but with a Home Sick Pilots twist!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
House of X #1

Jul 24, 2019

House of X #1 was a hard review for me in the writing. Like most of Hickman's stuff is, it is dense and high-concept and usually takes a while for a payoff. I like it and don't like it at the same time. It has me very interested to see what he has in store down the line and what happens with Marvel's mutants. Which is a very good thing to do. At the same time, I don't know how enjoyable the single issues are. The art is good; while not my favorite style, it looks good and has some great detail throughout the issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
I Walk With Monsters #1

Nov 24, 2020

There is a lot to like about I Walk With Monsters #1. Strong opening scene, with great artwork. It digs into some hard subjects and keeps you guessing. The only major fall for the issue is the length and/or pacing. The first issue just feels all too short and we do not get enough story. I Walk With Monsters #1 really needed to be a double-sized issue. It would have let the story breathe a little bit more, while also let us get to know the characters more. Everything is still surrounded by this haze of vagueness. Which, overall, is not a bad thing; I just feel as a reader I needed a little more to hang onto. It would have had me excited and ready for the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
5.5
IDW 20/20: Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles #1

Jan 15, 2019

I feel bad for giving such a harsh review, but it feels like the idea of TMNT 20/20 had a lot of potential but was squandered on too big of an idea for the story. The story had some bright spots, as Allor always shines on the dialogue of the TMNT characters. The whole plot of the story and framing just fell flat for me. The art, while very solid art, just lacked imagination and storytelling. There was a lot that Daniels could have done with the characters' design, but they for some reason they were kept exactly the same. TMNT 20/20 is not a terrible comic, but it is definitely doesn't do anything that memorable either.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Immortal Hulk #1

Jun 6, 2018

Overall I enjoyed The Immortal Hulk #1. I like the more horror-themed take on the Hulk and the questions that arise. The art is great and fits the mood and tone of the story perfectly. It is hard to judge from here where exactly the story is going to go and how it will unfold. It is a new, interesting take on the Hulk, and while I did not love everything about it, this first issue definitely has me coming back for #2.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Immortal Hulk #17

May 16, 2019

The Immortal Hulk #17 is really just a creative team firing on all cylinders. The writing and art all match the tone and feel of the story being delivered. They each build upon one another in fantastic ways. Immediately from the opening pages, you get a sense of tense dread as we go through the story being told. Just wonderful storytelling being done! If you are not reading The Immortal Hulk I implore you to give it a chance.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Immortal Iron Fists #1

Jul 23, 2017

I was a really big fan of Kaare Andrews Iron Fist The Living Weapon run and when this series was announced last year I was very excited to see Pei back and have a follow up to her story. Kaare Andrews delivers a very intriguing story in Iron Fists #1. It is too bad the art just does not fit the series. The faces and characters just feel really out of place and take the reader out of the story.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Immortal Iron Fists #2

Aug 11, 2017

Immortal Iron Fists #2 is a fun entry into this six issue bi-weekly Comixology exclusive comic series (you can check it out for “free” on Comixology Unlimited right now!). I still have the same continuity hang ups as in some other Marvel series (I am looking at you The Defenders) I am not sure when or where that this takes place in the larger Marvel Comics Universe, but it is best that I do not think about that. Pei is finding out that public school may be a lot harder than anything she experienced inK'un L'un. Still trying to find her place, learning the teachings from her Thunderer the Iron Fist himself Danny Rand and making true friends is tougher than she thought.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Infinity Wars (2018): Prime #1

Jul 25, 2018

Infinity Wars: Prime #1 has an ending that you definitely will not see coming and is a great start to this event. I am not the biggest Marvel Cosmic fan or a fan of events, but this one has me hooked for a little while just to see how the things that happen in this issue shake out. I do have some hang-ups story- and art-wise, but overall this was pretty interesting, and the whole Marvel Universe should be on notice after this issue!

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Infinity Wars: Arachknight #1

Oct 26, 2018

I was looking forward to Infinity Wars: Arachknight #1, as I am a big Moon Knight fan. and the Soldier Supreme issue was excellent. Sadly this was just a very basic by-the-book story. I did like the framing of the Green Goblin as a werewolf-like creature; that was cool. Other than that, the story and art just felt very uninspired. Not that it was terrible"far from it. It's just not anything special either.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Iron Fist (2017) #1

Mar 23, 2017

Iron Fist #1 is a great entry into a new Iron Fist comic series and from the end of the first issue, it looks like it is going to be a long brutal road for Danny to get his power back. This first issue sets up the series nicely and has the reader looking forward to what new warriors Danny is going to meet in the future. If you Just try not to worry about the continuity or the larger marvel universe then Iron Fist #1 excels in putting together a fantastic start to a new series.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Iron Fist (2017) #2

Apr 6, 2017

Maybe it is because I have been watching old Kung-Fu movies on Netflix recently or I have been listening to too much Wu-Tang Clan but this issue is exactly what I am looking for right now in an Iron Fist book. We get a great classic set up of Danny having to battle his way through seven different masters of Kung-Fu each with their own style, design, and name, much like the classic films Five Deadly Venoms (Five Venoms), The Mystery of Chess Boxing, and The Five Elements of Ninjas, along with some other great Kung-Fu movie tropes, it is just fantastic having this series embrace those roots.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Iron Fist (2017) #3

May 5, 2017

With each issue of Iron Fist, the series keeps getting better and better. Each introduction of a new master leaves the reader with intrigue and questions of what they bring to the fight and how or if Danny will be able to defeat them. Brisson also is creatinga great story behind the Trial of the Seven Masters that has double crossings and other sneaky business going behind the scenes of the battles. The art team is just fantastic and bring these brutal fight scenes to life. Iron Fist is definitely not a series to miss if you dig Bruce Lee or old Kung-Fu movies you will adore Iron Fist #3!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Iron Fist (2017) #75

Dec 7, 2017

Iron Fist continues to feel like a wonderful Kung-Fu movie that just keeps adding more and more layers to it. With superb writing from Brisson who knows how to take the series seriously but also knows when to keep the mood light, to some wonderful action panels from Mike Perkins,Iron Fist continues to be a fun read and great all around comic book.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Iron Fist (2017) #76

Jan 4, 2018

I have been loving this series since the beginning and it looks like this storyline is concluding with the next issue. Ed Brisson has developed this story perfectly and it is paying off. Mike Perkins and Andy Troy continue to convey the Kung fu action perfectly and spectacularly. The whole creative team has made Iron Fist feel like an epic Kung fu movie and I am loving every second of it. Danny Rand pulls out all the stops to defend K'un-Lun in Iron Fist #76.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.2
Iron Fist (2017) #78

Mar 22, 2018

So, Iron Fistis in a pretty strange place. It has not been solicited past issue #80, so that means the series is canceled and probably going to end during this crossoverwith Damnation. I have faith that Brisson can still end the series well as he has been doing a stellar job since the beginning. It is sad thatDamian Couceiro is only getting three issues. I would like to see more of what he can do with Iron Fist. Well, we still have at least two more issues to look forward to and, in issue #79, Danny Rand finds himself in a cage fight against a familiar face!

View Issue       View Full Review
6.6
Iron Fist (2017) #80

Apr 20, 2018

I have really liked this Iron Fist series since it started and it has been one of my favoriteMarvel Comics on the shelves. I hate to see it go out like this. It feels like Ed Brisson had some bigger ideas that had to get smashed together and or sidelined. It is not that Iron Fist #80 is bad, but I feel like it could have been so much more if given more time. So, that being said Iron Fist #80 does leave Danny Rand in an interesting place in his life. I will be excited to see if/when he gets a new series if these plot points are picked back up. Plus Danny still has to help save Las Vegas in Doctor Strange: Damnation #4.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Iron Fist: Heart of the Dragon #1

Jan 20, 2021

Iron Fist: Heart of the Dragon #1 is a solid start to this limited series. Now, would I say it is a must-buy or a great introduction to the character Danny Rand? Probably not, but if you are a seasoned Marvel or Iron Fist fan then you will certainly find a lot to enjoy in this series and look forward to the next installment.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Iron Fist: Heart of the Dragon #2

Feb 17, 2021

You know I was not super-excited about Iron Fist: Heart of the Dragon #2. I mean, I enjoyed the first issue and I am a huge Iron Fist fanboy, but it just didn't have me super-hyped. But, man, this was a fun issue. I loved every little bit of it. Hama builds up the story well, while Wachter and Menon drop some beautiful artwork. I am very excited for the next for issues after what has happened here.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Iron Fist: Heart of the Dragon #3

Mar 17, 2021

Iron Fist: Heart of the Dragon is extremely fun and exciting! Heart of the Dragon #3 continues to build the series up and tease some very interesting things to come. I love the "team" aspect of this issue and series. Hama deals with each well, while not neglecting our main character Danny Rand and continuing to build an intriguing story. The art brings the superhero action to life, with some mesmerizing dragons. Hama has also done an excellent job of involving the whole Marvel Universe adding in new and old lore alike. I am excited to read this series every time it hits the stands.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Iron Fist: Heart of the Dragon #4

Apr 14, 2021

Iron Fist: Heart of the Dragon #4 is the strongest issue yet of this six-issue mini-series. If you are an Iron Fist fan this is a must-buy. Now, none Iron Fist fans or those not familiar with the lore might be a little perplexed, but all in all the story goes to 11 by the end of the issue. The art also continues to be great and honestly seems to be improving with every issue. Maybe not the best book released this week, but definitely the book I enjoyed reading the most!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Jim Henson's The Storyteller: Ghosts #3

Jul 1, 2020

I enjoyed my time with Jim Henson's Storyteller: Ghosts #3. It makes me want to pick up the other two issues and awaiting the 4th and final one as well. It also has me wanting to pick up the other books and maybe even checking out the show. I guess the only minor complaint is that it does feel very short. I feel it may service the series better when all four short stories in the anthology are collected. But this short story, in particular, reminds me of things like Scary Stories to Tell in the Dark and such great haunting collections from my childhood. So, if you are looking for something in that vein then check out Jim Henson's Storyteller: Ghosts #3.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Jim Henson's The Storyteller: Ghosts #4

Aug 4, 2020

Honestly not much to say about Jim Henson's Storyteller: Ghosts #4. If you liked the other issues you will like this one. If you enjoy short stories about folklore mixed with supernatural then you definitely need to check this issue (and the other three) out. VER does a great job of capturing the essence of this series and you will not be disappointed. This is going to make a great collection for kids and adults that I hope they have out in time for Halloween this year!

View Issue       View Full Review
6.6
John Carter: The End #1

Feb 8, 2017

Not being a big John Carter person this story has really piqued my interest. It is very intriguing with this new emperor and how our main protagonist is going to deal with what he is doing. The destruction and overtaking of Baroom is interesting, but the real story is going to be how John Carter and Dejah Thoris deal with theemotional aspect of who this new emperor is. I really like Sherman's art besides the lack of detail, but his "scratchy" style makes the story feel that more desperate and the area "war-torn". This is a great creative team and they are delivering a John Carter story that will peak anybody's interest.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.2
John Carter: The End #2

Mar 7, 2017

John Carter The End #2 is gaining steam as a nice mini-series in the "John Carter universe". With Brian Wood and Alex Cox driving a more emotional story by driving a wedge between Dejah and Carter and building the stakes with the possible extinction of Mars native race. Sherman's art styling brings the brutal action to life but lacks some finer details to fully engulf the story

View Issue       View Full Review
7.1
John Carter: The End #3

Apr 11, 2017

The story in this issue is exceptionally well done. It has great action and political intrigue that will have you guessing even after the final page, setting up the next issue perfectly. It is too bad the art does not follow such a great story.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
John Carter: The End #4

May 10, 2017

Issue #4 of John Carter The End continues to be a fantastic entry into Dynamites John Carter comic series. With great political intrigue and a mystery that keeps unfolding it will definitely have readers guessing until the end. The art team really picks up steam in this issue and does probably their best work of the series. Sherman does a great job of getting emotion out of his characters while O'Halloran shows off his coloring skills effectively using some more brighter tones that really shine off the pages.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.1
John Carter: The End #5

Jun 16, 2017

John Carter: The End #5 is a good ending to a very intriguing mini series. The writers did a great job of telling a more emotional;, political John Carter story. While it does have its hiccups and it can be a little confusing for those of us not so well informed about this universe, they successfully tell a complete story that will have the reader invested in these characters throughout. The art as stated early is a mixed bag, it is good at times and bad at times depending on the scene set up and shot, but as with the writing it successfully gets the characters story across. John Carter: The End did not make me into a John Carter fan but it did get me to enjoy a John Carter comic and that is not nothing.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Journey Into Mystery: The Birth Of Krakoa #1

Sep 14, 2018

I am not sure why or who decided to go ahead with Journey Into Mystery: The Birth of Krakoa #1 one-shot, but I am glad Marvel let the creators tell this story.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Judge Dredd: Deviations #1

Mar 22, 2017

Howl of the Wolf is a fantastic one shot Deviation book that is a lot of fun and really is a high point for IDW's Deviation line. McCrea does a great job of making the book feel "serious" while all along having that "wink" and "nudge" throughout the story that it is obviously not taking itself too seriously. If you are a fan of Judge Dredd, werewolves or just all around fun comics you are not going to be disappointed. IDW is also releasing a reprint the original story line Cry of the Werewolf available the same day as this issue so readers and get a double dose of "Wolf Dredd" action, don't miss out.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Juggernaut (2020) #1

Sep 23, 2020

I was not expecting much out of Juggernaut #1, besides some splendid Ron Garney art. Well, we get that and an actually pretty good start to an interesting story, as well. Cain Marko is not a character I think of much besides it's pretty cool when he shows up to a fight, but in Juggernaut #1 finds him maybe turning into something a bit different and I find myself invested in his personal journey.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Juggernaut (2020) #3

Nov 18, 2020

Juggernaut #3 is a solid issue that just lacked a bit of the heart the other two previous issues had. Still not a terrible issue, but it could have been more. I do like that we get a little more backstory on this new armor, and the continued friendship of Juggernaut and D-Cell continues to be a highlight. The art once again is fantastic; all-around great work from Garney and Milla, who always collaborate well together.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Jughead: The Hunger (2017) #1

Oct 26, 2017

I thoroughly enjoyed Jughead The Hunger #1 as much as Jughead The Hunger one-shot, it is a perfect continuation of that story and the creative team is building a fantastic werewolf series. These Archie Universe characters lend themselves very well to horror type stories as we have seen in series like Afterlife with Archie, Chilling Adventures of Sabrina and not so much horror but in the Riverdale tv show. Jughead The Hunger #1 continues that great storytelling and will hook you in with a fantastic story and art that pops off the page.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.2
Jughead: The Hunger (2017) #2

Dec 14, 2017

Jughead: the Hunger continues to be another hit for Archie's more horror-oriented line of comics. While I do wish the art was maybe a little “creepier” in the vein of After Life with Archie,The Chilling Adventures of Sabrina orthe original Jughead: the Hunger one-shot, it does the job for the most part. The story is getting a little murky with several things going on, but I have faith that Tieri is going to make it all become a little clearer very soon. Jughead: the Hunger #2does have some high points that outweigh the low, and is worth a read.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.9
Jughead: The Hunger (2017) #3

Jan 26, 2018

Jughead: The Hunger #3 starts to push the story into new directions, but it is still having a little trouble keeping me interested through the whole issue. The art is good, but I wish it had a little more impact to it and the story. For the most part, I am enjoying the series. It is not the best of the Archie Horror books, but it is still an enjoyable read.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Jughead: The Hunger (2017) #4

Mar 9, 2018

All in all, I am happy I picked up Jughead: The Hunger #4.The focus on Elena Cooper and her past was a welcome change to the story and helped flesh out this worldsuperbly well. I enjoyed learning about her past and what made her become the person she is today. The art continues to be okay. I think a changeup in the art may help the series in the long run. This issue at least got me back on board with this series and with a wonderful final page teaser has me on for at least one more issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Jughead: The Hunger (2017) #6

May 31, 2018

The story of Jughead: the Hunger has started to win me over and I am really liking what is starting to happen in the series. The halfway switch with the artist still bugs me and just feels like it changes the whole tone of the book. On another note, this series has to have some of the best collection of covers of any series all three look amazing and every month they have some glorious covers, but Michael Walsh's homage cover to The Company of Wolves poster is absolutely fantastic and I could not pass it up!

View Issue       View Full Review
6.3
Jughead: The Hunger (2017) #7

Aug 17, 2018

The story in Jughead: The Hunger #7 picks up a lot of steam finishing up this story arc and starting in a new direction has me excited to see what happens next. Art continues to be a big issue and I really wish they would have some consistencyin that department. Michael Walsh once again delivers a stunningly beautifulcover for this issue and Adam Gorham has an astounding cover for issue#8 that has me wanting it for my ever growing werewolf cover collection!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Jughead: The Hunger (2017) #1

Mar 30, 2017

Jughead: The Hungeris a howling good time (sorry, had to do that). With great pacing, twist and turns along with some beautiful art this is a fantastic one-shot story from beginning to end. It is almost sad that this is only a one-shot with all the great stuff in this issue I could definitely could have seen this stretched out into another issue or two. That being said it works very well as a single story that has a great beginning, middle and an ending that leaves the door open for the reader's mind to wander. The horror line of Archie Comics continues to impress and this is another entry readers are not going to want to miss!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Jupiter Jet #1

Dec 7, 2017

Jupiter Jet is superb all-ages read from Action Lab. The creators do a wonderful job of creating an exciting story where action, comedy, and mystery abound. Jupiter Jet #1 is really just an all-around fun read and honestly just a really well done comic book. I was really surprised at how much fun I had reading this issue. It is not easy to pull off an all-ages book that is actually good, and I think the team does a great job of presenting this story, having fun with it, but also not talking down to their readers. Jupiter Jet #1 is awesome and I am very excited to see where the story goes from here!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Jupiter Jet #3

Feb 16, 2018

Jupiter Jet #3 continues the story of Jacky “the flying girl”! She learns that being a hero is not always fun and games and what real danger she is in! Will she overcome her fear and fly again or is it too late for the flying girl to soar once again? If you are looking for a fun adventure comic book for a younger kid then Jupiter Jet may be right up your alley. The characters immediately grab your attention and the story is a great mixture of comedy and adventure!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Justice League (2018) #9

Oct 3, 2018

Justice League #9 is not the greatest issue ever, but there is a lot to like in it as well. I love the idea of Superman rebuilding the moon. It feels very “golden age” era thing to happen. Scott Snyderbrings up a lot of interestingthings throughout the issue and the scenes describing the characters and how they live and why are excellent. The art is good, Jimenez and Sanchez make a good team and they have some fun sequences in Justice League #9.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Justice League (2018) #19

Mar 6, 2019

Normally I am not a huge Justice League fan, but man, is Justice League #19 just a delightful read! The issue was well-plotted and well-developed. The characters were well-written and the whole issue just flowed nicely together. The art was outstanding with some imaginative structure and layouts, with some truly remarkable cartooning with the characters' body and facial expressions. If you haven't read Justice League in a while (like me) Justice League #19 is a great place to jump on, and you won't be disappointed!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Justice League (2018) #20

Mar 20, 2019

I don't know what to say, Justice League #20 is just a delight to read. This is a great second issue to a new story arc and it also continues to push forward a much longer ongoing story. I had not read a Justice League book in a hot minute until the previous issue and have found myself completely encapsulated by this story. It is fun and engaging with some nice twist and turns. With some fantastic art, this is honestly just a pleasure to read. Seriously, just go pick up issue #19 and read this and have yourself a good time!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Justice League (2018) #23

May 1, 2019

I may not fully understand the “larger” world ending story completely that is going on, but I get the gist of it and that is all I need to enjoy this issue and story arc. Justice League #23 is just again another fun issue from this creative team. Everything is just good about it. The story is interesting and engaging. The characters get some great moments throughout and it has me very intrigued to see what comes next. The art continues to be just delightful! From action scenes to talking head scenes the art team does a tremendous job of capturing the moments throughout the issue. All around this was just a great super-hero comic.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Justice League (2018) #31

Sep 4, 2019

Justice League #31 is another solid entry into the series. While the story may not be firing on all cylinders for me right now it was still a ton of fun to read and has me on board for the rest of the arc. The artwork is fantastic. The art team continues to shine throughout the issue and is a highlight of the book.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Justice League Dark #20

Feb 28, 2020

If you have fallen off of this series then Justice League Dark #20 is a nice place to jump back on. The whole Parliament thing is not my favorite thing in DC comics; if you are not familiar with it then start Google searching. Other than that, I did enjoy the story in this issue, and it made me at least want to finish the rest of this story arc with its strong horror vibe. The art is the real show-stopper here. Kyle Hotz and FCO Placencia do some incredible work in this issue and you really shouldn't miss out on it.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.1
Justice League Dark #21

Mar 25, 2020

Though I am still confused about the overall plot of this story arc in Justice League Dark, James Tynion IV and Ram V make it an exciting read and something I cannot stop turning the pages on. The character work is great and I love the interactions between Zatanna and Constantine. The art is wonderfully done with some fantastic pages and panels. On its own it is great art and visually fantastic, but if I compare it to the previous issue it loses that bit of "oomph" to the story being told when I first opened the pages. Not taking anything away from the artist on this issue. Just for the story itself I feel the art from the previous issue served the story better.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Justice League Dark (2018) #1

Jul 25, 2018

This is the best Justice League Dark Team ever and I really don't care whether you agree! Come on, it has Detective Chimp and Man-Bat!

View Issue       View Full Review
6.5
Justice League Dark (2018) #5

Nov 21, 2018

The middle part of Justice League Dark #5 is a little rough, it is not bad but it was a little trudge to get through at times. The beginning in ending definitely pick the issue up. The art while not jaw-dropping, it is good art and fits the series well. I continue to love the team of this New Justice League Dark team. Wonder Woman makes a good leader; with Zatanna packing a magical punch, Swamp Thing adds a nice elemental theme and Detective Chimp and Man-Bat are two standout characters.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Justice League Dark (2018) #7

Jan 16, 2019

This was a great issue of Justice League Dark. I loved that it leaned heavily on the more horror themes. It felt right out of something like Tales from the Crypt or other golden age horror comics, while still driving an ongoing story. The whole creative team did a fantastic job throughout the issue. Justice League Dark #7 is well told, laid out, and plotted. The art team does a superb job of keeping the creepiness of the series throughout each page and the book looks great. This also seems like a pretty solid jumping-on point for new readers. Maybe not the greatest, but it is a solid starting point.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Justice League Dark (2018) #20

Feb 27, 2020

If you have fallen off of this series then Justice League Dark #20 is a nice place to jump back on. The whole Parliament thing is not my favorite thing in DC comics; if you are not familiar with it then start Google searching. Other than that, I did enjoy the story in this issue, and it made me at least want to finish the rest of this story arc with its strong horror vibe. The art is the real show-stopper here. Kyle Hotz and FCO Placencia do some incredible work in this issue and you really shouldn't miss out on it.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.1
Justice League Dark (2018) #21

Mar 25, 2020

Though I am still confused about the overall plot of this story arc in Justice League Dark, James Tynion IV and Ram V make it an exciting read and something I cannot stop turning the pages on. The character work is great and I love the interactions between Zatanna and Constantine. The art is wonderfully done with some fantastic pages and panels. On its own it is great art and visually fantastic, but if I compare it to the previous issue it loses that bit of “oomph” to the story being told when I first opened the pages. Not taking anything away from the artist on this issue. Just for the story itself I feel the art from the previous issue served the story better.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Justice League: No Justice #1

May 9, 2018

Look, this is not the greatest comic ever, but it is a heck of a lot of fun and has a great ending that has me excited for the next issue! So, pick up Justice League: No justice #1 with some popcorn and enjoy the ride.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Kamandi Challenge #9

Sep 27, 2017

The Kamandi Challenge #9 serves as an interesting one and done story from Tom King that finds Kamandi in a battle he cannot win. With some fantastic art from Kevin Eastman and Freddie Williams II, it is an Issue that will not disappoint. They literally leave the door wide open for the next creative team (Greg Pak/Joe Prado) to take the last boy on Earth on another adventure!

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Killing Red Sonja #1

Mar 24, 2020

Not ever reading a Red Sonja series or the series that came before this issue, I was surprised how easy it was just to jump into Killing Red Sonja #1. The team does a great job of setting everything up and letting you get right into this series. It also helps, I guess, that Red Sonja does not feature in this issue either. The only major hangup I have is the overall tone of the series. Mark Russell feels a bit toned down, which isn't an overall bad thing, but it is just hard to figure exactly what this series is. The art is well done; it is nothing spectacular, but it serves the story well. I do wish it was a little more fluid and maybe "fit" a bit better with the story.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.2
Killing Red Sonja #2

Jun 16, 2020

That all doesn't want me to come back for more. But I also kind of want to see how it all plays out, as well. So, I am giving this series one more issue to pick up before I drop it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
King Conan (2021) #4

May 11, 2022

This team has been doing Conan together for a long time and whenever they are all together the book shines. Great writing and beautiful art that captures exactly everything you would want from a Conan book. I am not the biggest Conan fan but every once in a while I want me some hard hitting Conan and King Conan delivers that and more!

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
King In Black #1

Dec 2, 2020

Knull is here in King in Black #1 and his arrival does not disappoint. With so many events happening recently in the Marvel Universe, it can be easy to get burnt out. You could possibly see this issue and all the tie-ins and think “I should skip this”. I wouldn't blame you and maybe, yeah, you should skip those tie-in issues. But King in Black #1 absolutely delivers; from art to story, it builds something truly epic! I was not really too excited about this event. I mean, with Donny Cates and Ryan Stegman, I knew it would be good, but it truly lives up to the hype.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
King In Black #2

Dec 23, 2020

I think the biggest praise I could give King in Black #2 is that after reading the final page I immediately wanted issue #3. It made me want more of it. For me and, I assume, many others, that is a pretty solid sign of a good book. I am not even really that big into what has been going on in Venom recently, but man, King in Black has grabbed ahold of me and I am loving every minute of it! This is what an “event” comic should be. Full of action and intrigue, but still finding some heart and soul through all of it as well. King in Black #2 is a definite winner.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
King In Black: Ghost Rider #1

Mar 31, 2021

King in Black: Ghost Rider #1 one-shot does exactly what you are expecting, which is not a good or bad thing in particular. Brisson does what needs to be done to set the story he was telling previously straight and to bring some pieces back together to wrap everything up nicely.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
King In Black: Thunderbolts #1

Jan 13, 2021

Thunderbolts #1 is a hard one for me to judge or to "critique". I mean, story-wise, it is a fun and interesting story that I will follow the next two issues, but I wouldn't say you absolutely must pick it up. If you want any and everything King in Black then, yes, grab it. Or just looking for something more lighthearted to read. Juan Ferreyra always delivers spectacular visuals and that is no different in Thunderbolts #1. So, I guess if you are wanting something fun and good to look at then you won't be disappointed in Thunderbolts #1.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
King In Black: Thunderbolts #2

Feb 10, 2021

The hard thing about rating something like King in Black: Thunderbolts #2 is that it is a good book. I enjoy reading it and it is fun. But at the same time, do I really care what is going on in it? The answer is "no, not really". The characters are fun and I get a nice laugh out of it, but at the same time, I don't really honestly care about anything happening in it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
King of Nowhere #1

Mar 3, 2020

If you like a bit of fun, fantasy, mystery, in your comic books, then King of Nowhere #1 is something to check out. Though we have seen many "fish out of water" tales like this before"normal person gets somehow transported into wild, weird world"it seems that Prince and Jenkins look to put a little different spin on it. It will take more than one issue to confirm whether their spin on the tale is worthwhile, but it is off to a good start in King of Nowhere #1.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
King Of Spies #1

Dec 1, 2021

As noted previously King of Spies #1 is a hard judge after the first issue, it does not offer up anything besides the basic one last run story. Will Millar switch up the format going forward and give us a different twist, only time will tell. Story wise though it is serviceable to the genre an exciting read, but nothing of real substance yet. The saving grace is that delectable Matteo Scalera artwork; it alone makes King of Spies #1 at least worth a flip through just to gander at its beauty.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Klaus: The Witch Of Winter #1

Dec 21, 2016

Conclusion: Klaus and the Winter Witch is a fantastic one shot back into the world of Klaus.Grant Morrison and Dan Mora come back together just in time to save the Yuletide for everyone. You will want to read the first collection of Klaus to get the full effect of this book and really get into the story. If you like your Santa with a little edge to him while still being jolly and bringing joy to children all over the world and/or you like Christmas specials then there is no reason not to pick up Klaus and the Winter Witch for a fun holiday read.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Klaus: The Crisis in Xmasville #1

Dec 5, 2017

Klaus and the Crisis in Xmasville is another great entry to the Klaus mythos. When Klaus has to battle the Pola-Cola corporation and an evil Santa, things get ugly quick and he may need some help to save Christmas! If you haven't, you really need to pick up all the books in this series. Plus, it would make anexcellent gift for any comic book fan. I am just saying if somebody wanted to put the hardcover of Klaus, a copy of Klaus and the Witch of Winter, and Klaus and the Crisis in Xmasville in my stocking I would not be upset!

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Klaus: The Life and Times of Joe Christmas #1

Dec 17, 2019

I love the Klaus series and am happy I have got to review them all (except for the first mini-series). I look forward to a new installment every year and Klaus and the Life & Times of Joe Christmas #1 does not disappoint. It is filled with all the Christmas Spirit you will need. The stunning art by Dan Mora will have you examining each and every page with an eagle eye. Add a wonderful scripted story by Grant Morrison you are in for a Christmas treat.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Klaus: Klaus and the Crying Snowman #1

Dec 21, 2018

Klaus and the Crying Snowman #1 is another great entry into the series. Even though I feel the story could have used a few more pages, it is still a great holiday read. It has everything we come to expect from a Klaus book. Great action, adventure, and heart as well. Dan Mora and Grant Morrison make a great creative team and this is another story not to miss!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Legion of Super-Heroes (2019) #1

Nov 6, 2019

The more I read Legion of Super-Heroes #1 the more I enjoyed it. I am still not completely sold on it as a concept; Bendis's story has me interested for now. I enjoyed the artwork throughout the issue and there are some fantastic pages in it.

View Issue       View Full Review
5.5
Little Girl #3

Aug 7, 2018

Little Girl #3 is an okay horror book. The story could use a little more work. I think we see the ghost of Abby a little too much; by this third issue, seeing the little ghost Girl loses its scariness, especially with the cartoonier vibe of the art. The art is good, but it does not fit the horror story that the Little Girl series is going for. It is just not scary, and this is coming from a guy who is very easily scared by creepy ghost stuff. I want to stress again, the art is good, it just does not fit the story and that is why the score is so low.

View Issue       View Full Review
3.5
Loggerhead: Bloody Bayou #1

Jun 23, 2020

I mean, I hate to be so harsh, but honestly, if I paid $3.99 for this I would be upset. I mean, there is really nothing here besides a great character design. If you really want to see a giant turtle kill some people then, by all means, grab this. Otherwise, you can probably skip this altogether.

View Issue       View Full Review
5.2
Lucifer's Knight #2

Apr 22, 2020

I hate to come down so hard on Lucifer's Knight #2 but the story has good potential, it is just not living up to it right now. The characters are kind of bland and we do not have any real connection to any of them. The art, while not bad, does not help tell the story that well and also is severely lacking in background and character details.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Lucky Devil #1

Aug 4, 2021

I was very surprised by Lucky Devil #1. I am not a huge horror fanboy, but I usually like to check out Cullen Bunn's work. This series captured me by its odd premise and just how well Bunn and artist Fran Galan work together. The art and story mesh perfectly as one. The horror/comedic tone is fed through the art and writing alike and it seems like both creators feed off each other. This is one of those series where writing and art feel perfectly matched together. From a series I knew nothing about to eagerly awaiting the next issue; I say that is a win for Lucky Devil #1.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Lucky Devil #2

Sep 1, 2021

Lucky Devil #2 is a wonderful second issue for this mini-series. It rev's up the main thrust of the story and starts to bring some tension into the series. Stanley is doing some wild things with his power and garnering attention from all the wrong people. If you are like me and like your horror with a little fun then you should be reading Lucky Devil.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Lucy Claire: Redemption #1

Dec 12, 2019

All in all, Lucy Claire: Redemption #1 is a good start to a new series. I am not 100% sold on it just yet. There is a lot to like in this issue and it has me wanting to read the second issue. I Just have a few hang-ups on art and the tone of the story that keeps me from being all in on this series just yet. But it definitely was not a disappointing read, either.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Made Men #1

Sep 8, 2017

This was just a great surprise on just how cool this book was and I really wish everyone could have the experience I had reading the first issue of Made Men. Not knowing anything at all about this series really made it a terrific read for me, I thought I had the story figured out and then it would throw a little twist in that would catch me off guard. I also love that final page it is the perfect set up and teaser for the rest of the series. Made Menis superbly done and will have you clamoring for more once you hit the final page.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.1
Made Men #2

Oct 19, 2017

Made Men #2 feels a lot like a “set up” issue, everything was laid out for the series to continue on from here, while that is not a bad thing I believe a lot of information given in this issue could have been played out throughout a couple of issues to avoid a huge information dump and a rather boring issue. Don't get me wrong I still really likeMade Men and still think the concept is fantastic, it is just compared to the first issue I was a little bit disappointed at what Made Men #2 delivered. Hopefully with all this out of the way the series can take off again in issue #3.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
Made Men #3

Nov 22, 2017

Made Men #3 almost lost me until a nice turn at the end that started to congealthe story a little bit better and set it back on a good path. I still really like the basic concept of the story; it just feels like the creative team is still getting its footing with these characters and what the series is all about. The art is not spectacular, but does a good job of setting the tone and feel of the series. I will probably give Made Men one more issue to decide if I should continue on or not. Hopefully, with the next issue it gets a foothold and continues in the right direction.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Made Men #4

Dec 19, 2017

Made Men #4 got me excited again for this series; after the past two issues, I was losing my interest about what was going on, but this issue pulled me back in with some good story developments and with a wonderful ending it has me very interested to see what will happen next. Made Men has become a very interestingcomic book these past four issues; part horror, part action, part mystery with some drama thrown in and you got yourself one heck of a comic!

View Issue       View Full Review
6.8
Made Men #5

Jan 16, 2018

Every time I say “I am getting tired of Made Men, I am jumping off,” they have a wonderful cliffhanger that keeps me on for one more issue. I still love the overall concept of the series. It just feels like the issues are floundering to really catch hold of the story. Things are happening, but then again nothing really “happens” story wise. Five issues in and I still feel like we aren't moving past what happens in the second issue. Made Men #5 is a good comic with some pretty art and a story that feels like it could be much more than what it currently is.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.2
Mall #2

Sep 12, 2018

I am really liking the story in The Mall #2. After setting everything up in the first issue the writers seem to be getting into these characters and the plot of the series. I enjoy how in depth the three main characters are and how well rounded in two issues they have become. The dialogue continues to need a little work, though.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Mall #5

Sep 5, 2019

If you are looking for something that might combine your like of Stranger Things '80s nostalgia, the high stakes of organized crime and the feeling of teen movie drama then you are looking for The Mall.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Man Goat & Bunny Man #1

Apr 7, 2021

I don't know what to really say about Man Goat and the Bunny Man #1. It is a strange horror/buddy-comedy that doesn't quite know what it wants to be and also has a little bit too much going on. Look, I was not expecting much, and it did exceed my expectations. The story is not terrible, and it got a few smiles out of me. The art is actually very well done comic-book art. But altogether, it is not something that is amazing, or that I will be telling everyone to pick up, either. More than likely if you are looking at this series then you know what you are in for. It has some interesting things happening and I do like the general concept; it just does not all come together quite as well as it should.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Man Without Fear (2019) #1

Jan 2, 2019

I was not the biggest fan of how the "Death of Daredevil" storyline ended. But I like what we are getting from it with Man Without Fear #1. The insight into Matt Murdock's mind and his friendship with Foggy Nelson was a great start to the five-issue weekly mini-series.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
Man Without Fear (2019) #3

Jan 18, 2019

Man Without Fear #3 is another valid entry into this five-issue weekly series leading up to the relaunch of Daredevil. The more I thought about the issue the more I enjoyed the story. MacKay does a great job of defining what is going on in Matt Murdock's head at the moment and relaying that to the reader. The art, again, is solid comic book art: nothing terrible, but also nothing stands out as spectacular either, but all-around good. I guess that might be the bad thing about this series. If you are going to put a book out for 5 weeks straight for $3.99 apiece it had better be great. While not bad, I am not sure it is worth it, either.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.8
Man Without Fear (2019) #5

Jan 31, 2019

Man Without Fear #5 is a solid conclusion to the weekly mini-series. It got to the heart of what Matt Murdock is going through and brings him to a new starting place. Which is the ultimate goal for this series to give Daredevil a new starting spot for Chip Zdarsky and Marco Chechetto launch of Daredevil #1 in February? I am not sure that we needed a five-issue weekly series to do all this but that is what we got. All in all Man Without Fear was an okay series. Nothing great, but not terrible either. It does boast some of the greatest Daredevil covers ever, so it does have that going for it!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Marvel Action: Avengers #1

Dec 27, 2018

I am digging this all-ages Marvel Action line from IDW Publishing. They have a Spider-Man book already out and a Black Panther series coming out soon. These are fantastic all-ages series that I wish we had more of. These characters are extremely popular right now and it is great to have something you can give to younger readers. What makes these so great is that they work well for adult readers like me, too. I love all of these characters and Marvel Action: Avengers #1 was a delightful read and has me excited to see what this creative team has in store!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Marvel Action: Avengers #5

Jun 4, 2019

A lot of people probably look over the Marvel Action line due to the All-Ages tag, and they are missing out! The story is tons of fun and the artwork is really great. If you have younger kids that dig superheroes this is definitely a series you should check out, that you and a younger reader can both enjoy together!

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Marvel Comics Presents (2019) #4

Apr 24, 2019

Man, if these creators want to keep doing Moon Knight short stories like this I am all for it! It just bleeds all sorts of noir coolness, from Percy's inner dialogue for Marc Spector to the fact that he drives a white Cadillac with “moon” license plate. The story focuses on other aspects of Marc's character and not solely on his mental illness, which is a breath of fresh air for the character. It is just a superbly well done short story, and honestly, the other stories in Marvel Comics Presents #4 are fine but for a Moon Knight fan this is well worth the $4.99.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Marvel Knights: 20th #1

Nov 8, 2018

Overall Marvel Knights 20th Anniversary #1 was a good start to this six-part story bringing back the Marvel Knights imprint. It did not live up to the great expectations I had for it, but it was still good.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Marvel Knights: 20th #2

Nov 22, 2018

Marvel Knights #2 (of 6) is turning into a pretty good little mini-series. Donny Cates and Matthew Rosenberg continue to let this story slowly developand simmer. The rotating artist for each issue also keeps me interested. I would normally like a single artist but it feels it feels like having a different artist with each issue fits the tone of the series well. Niko Henrichon delivered some great pages in this issue and I am excited to see what Damian Couceiro brings with the next issue!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Marvel Two-In-One (2017) #1

Dec 21, 2017

I was very surprised by Marvel Two-in-one #1;it is a very emotional story and hits all the beats a book about the Fantastic family needs to. Anybody complaining about Marvel not having the Fantastic Four on the roster needs to be picking this up, as it is obviously leading to some big things to come. With Ben Grimm and Johnny Storm back together on the hunt for their family, with Dr. Doom being “helpful”, it is going to be a wild adventure for sure.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Marvel Two-In-One (2017) #3

Feb 14, 2018

Marvel Two-in-One is a superb comic book series. It has action, drama, and an intriguing storyline that will keep the reader wishing for more. Johnny Storm finds out why his powers are on the frits, and it might not be the answer he is looking for. The Thing continues to struggle with the lies he has told. Could Reed, Sue and the kids really be alive and well? There is only one way to find out: to explore the Multi-verse, and it starts in Marvel Two-in-One #3.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Marvel Two-In-One (2017) #4

Mar 15, 2018

I am really enjoying Marvel Two-in-One. It has turned into a delightful little series. Zdarsky balances his silliness with the more serious aspects of the story and Schiti and Martin deliver some beautiful art. With the setup out of the way and the team finally exploring the multiverse, exciting things start to happen in Marvel Two-in-One #4. As the team arrives on their first new world, who or what will they find? Only way to find out is to pick up this book!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Marvel Two-In-One (2017) #5

Apr 5, 2018

Marvel Two-in-One is a tremendously fun series! It combines action, adventure, andcomedy with a little mystery all into one jam-packed story. Combining some superb writing with beautiful artwork, Marvel Two-in-One becomes the Fantastic Four series that we have all been missing in our lives. Seriously, if you are one of those people that have been complaining about not having a FF series you should be reading this. If you are not, and are still complaining, well, shame on you!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Marvel Two-In-One (2017) #6

May 31, 2018

I may have small hang-ups here and there about this series but all in all it is consistently fun and engaging. Chip Zdarsky continues to balance the action/adventure, mystery, and comedy well, keeping the reader interested and on the edge of their seat. The art is wonderful as well; changeup in artists can be bad but when they are all talented it is all good!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Marvel Two-In-One (2017) #7

Jun 28, 2018

I am loving this series! Zdarsky is doing some fabulous work and paying off on some of the story teasers earlier on in this series (we learn some more about the Mad Thinker also!). The switch-up in artists is probably the biggest downfall of Marvel Two-in-One #7. The art is not bad, just the constant switching is getting a little old with the series only being 7 issues deep. Overall I am truly enjoying this story, and even though I have a general idea of how it will end I still want to see how it gets there!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Marvel Two-In-One (2017) Annual #1

Jun 13, 2018

Marvel Two-in-One Annual #1 is a great issue. It ties in well with what is happening with the regular series while answering some old questions about Dr. Doom that have been lingering on for quite a while. Plus, how can you not like the art duo of Declan Shalvey and Jordie Bellaire delivering some sequential goodness? Has Dr. Doom truly turned over a new leaf or will the truth finally set him free? One way to find out read Marvel Two-in-One Annual #1.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Marvel Zombie (2018) #1

Oct 19, 2018

Marvel Zombie #1 is a great read to get ready for Halloween. I would have liked it to be a little longer to really get the story across but it still does a good job of making an exciting entry into the Zombie story. It is not easy to create a new and exciting take on zombies or the undead-apocalypse but the creative team did a solid job of making Marvel Zombie #1 worthy of your time and money.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Marvels Snapshot (2020): X-Men #1

Sep 17, 2020

X-Men: Marvels Snapshots is a great look into the character of Cyclops. If you do not know much about Scott Summers it is a nice look into his character and how he came to be. It also skips all the crazy, confusing X-Men continuity, which is lovely. I like the use of Marvel lore and legend to help form the character. It was an all-around different look into a character that is often overlooked or maybe misrepresented, giving a clear look into who Scott Summers is.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Marvels Snapshot (2020): Captain America #1

Jun 25, 2020

It is always also interesting to look at these fictional happenings through a more real-world lens. Like, what is happening to the actual people after all these big battles and such. If you are a fan of Marvels or stories like that then you will have to pick up Captain America: Marvels Snapshots #1.Though maybe everything does not land perfectly in the book, it is, all in all, a good tale.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.2
Master of Kung Fu (2017) #126

Nov 12, 2017

For a new reader, I hate to say it but Master of Kung Fu #126 is a poor introductionto Shang-Chi if you have never been introduced to this character before. The story has great potential, but CM Punk needs some work on basic comic book storytelling, he relies too much on his writing and jokes instead of letting artistDalibor Talajic take the reins. Hopefully, Marvel will give Shang-Chi another chance at a series; because in the right hands you can tell some fantastic stories with his characters (may I suggest Ed Brisson he has been on a role with the current Iron Fist series). The art on Master of Kung Fu #126 is the highlight asDalibor Talajic andErick Arciniega really shine throughout the issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Mayday (2016) #1

Nov 2, 2016

Mayday #1 is a tale of Cold-War espionage, spies, murder and a traverse through 1970's America. The adding of a music to play while reading scenes will definitely set this book apart and give a different reading experience. While the plotcan be a little muddled and moves quickly, with four more issues to go we should be able to get to know the characters more and really start to be invested in this story.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Mech Cadet Yu #1

Aug 3, 2017

Mech Cadet Yu #1 is a fantastic first issue. Stanford Yu is the classic underdog character that gets to do something extraordinary and just because the basic plot of the first issue is very "by the books" Greg Pak introduces some elements that will have you coming back for more (you are going to have to read the issue to find out). If you are looking for something to scratch that giant robot itch pick up Mech Cadet Yu #1 and enjoy.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Mech Cadet Yu #2

Sep 13, 2017

Mech Cadet Yu #2 is just a fantastic issue and a really fun read. Stanford Yu is a great character and his enthusiasm will bleed onto the reader within a few pages. If you are not reading this series you are missing out on a great comic book! Luckily it has been picked up as an ongoing series so we are going to get a lot more of Stanford Yu and his adventures for a long while.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Mech Cadet Yu #3

Oct 11, 2017

Mech Cadet Yu is a perfect all ages book, you can hand this to anyone and I feel they would love it. The creative team hits that perfect spot for an all ages book to where it is serious yet fun, a little goofy, but it does not talk down to its readers;Mech Cadet Yu has something for everybody. BOOM! Studios should be praised more for putting out such great all-ages series like this and Misfit City. More publishers should take cues from BOOM! Studios and learn that you can publish books that can be appropriate for all ages and still tell fantastic stories. Mech Cadet Yu #3 is a superb comic and will literally have you salivating for the next issue!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Mech Cadet Yu #4

Nov 15, 2017

Mech Cadet Yu has quickly become one of, if not the best of the all-ages comic books out right now. The creative team has crafted a wonderful story of an underdog kid that never gives up. It is a classic tale that pulls from a lot of different story tropes, but it is also a fully original tale. Mech Cadet Yu #4 solidifies this series as a classic. It does seem to end a little quickly, but I would be satisfied with the story told if it ended with this issue. I am certainly looking forward to this series continuation and to watching these characters grow; if you haven't already, you need to pick up this series now!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Mech Cadet Yu #5

Jan 9, 2018

Mech Cadet Yu is an absolute blast to read. Fun, adventure and excitement, this series has it all. I cannot imagine anybody young or old not enjoying this series. Pak just knocks the storyout of the park, while Takeshi Miyazawa andTriona Farrell make for an exceptional art team. The cadets are grounded in Mech Cadet Yu #5, but that does not mean they are out of the fight!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Mech Cadet Yu #6

Feb 3, 2018

No surprise,Mech Cadet Yu continues to be a great series and Mech Cadet Yu #6 is a great entry into its storyline. Pak continues to write a fantastic story with some wonderful characters. The art also continues to be stand-out and fantastic with a great eye for detail and character acting. This is absolutelyone of the greatest all-ages series in comic books and should not be missed. Fans will be shocked by the ending in issue #6 as the Cadet training academy will never be the same again after this most recent attack!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Mech Cadet Yu #7

Mar 6, 2018

Mech Cadet Yu continues to be a superb all-ages comic book. The overall story is a delight to read and just overall delivers an enjoyable time. While I do wish maybe the story would slow down just a little so we could get more character time, it is not a huge deal. The art team continues to deliver some fantastic artwork throughout the series that brings the story to life. With the Sharg continuing to attack and the Cadets on the run, the Cadets are finding out that some decisions in war are not as black-and-white as they seem.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
Mech Cadet Yu #8

Apr 3, 2018

I am still enjoying Mech Cadet Yu, even though it feels like it has stalled out a little story wise with Mech Cadet Yu #8. The art continuesto be as impressive as ever. The story just needs a little jump start in my opinion. Mech Cadet Yu is still a great all-ages comic book that deliversa fun story with wonderful giant robot action. Hopefully, this is just a little slip and it can return to form in the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.5
Mech Cadet Yu #9

Jun 12, 2018

I guess maybe I am just getting a little bored with the story in Mech Cadet Yu #9. Some interesting things do happen and by the end of the issue it puts the characters in a differentstruggle, but I do not see how they are going to spread it out into three more issues. The art continues to be great and as always Mech Cadet Yu looks fantastic from a visual standpoint. The art team makes each issue look fabulous. The story has just stuttered these past few issues and it is getting harder for me to really care about what is going on.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Mech Cadet Yu #10

Jul 10, 2018

Mech Cadet Yu #10 got the series back on track. With action, adventure, and heart to its story Mech Cadet Yu is not only a great all-ages comic book but just a great comic book in general. The Cadets have gone through a lot and come out on top, but this time it does not seem they can win without making a giant sacrifice!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Meet The Skrulls #1

Mar 8, 2019

Meet the Skrulls #1 (of 5) is an excellent start to this mini-series. We get a great introduction to the characters and what this series is about. It has a great espionage film feeling, while also looking like a solid family drama as well. If you are looking for something a little different or “out of the ordinary” from Marvel Comics, I would definitely give Meet the Skrulls #1 a shot. It is a surprisinglyengaging story that will have you hooked from page to page.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Meet The Skrulls #2

Mar 21, 2019

Meet the Skrulls #2 was a solid entry into this mini-series even though it felt a little short in the story department. I am still enjoying the series and it has me interested to see where it is going with these characters. Henrichon delivers some really solid art throughout the entire issue. The spy-thriller tone coupled with a little family drama works surprisingly well and I do feel myself becoming a bit more attached to these characters with each and every issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Meet The Skrulls #5

Jun 7, 2019

Marvel has been putting out some lovely little mini-series lately. I loved the Winter Soldier mini-series that ended a few months ago and now Meet the Skrulls #5 wraps up another thrilling mini-series. The creative team did a great job of creating a captivating story of Skrull spies and built it into a story about a family finding out who they are. It is an engaging story about what family is and finding out who you are when you are always somebody different. Great work from everybody on board and this is something everyone should check out.

View Issue       View Full Review
5.5
Midnight Sky #1

Sep 5, 2019

Midnight Sky #1 from Scout Comics has a very intriguing story but there may be one too many twists for its own good.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Mighty Morphin Power Rangers / Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles #1

Dec 3, 2019

This is the Mighty Morphin Power Rangers/Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles meet-up you have been looking for. No, this one never happened. MMPR/TMNT #1 feels like more than just fan-service or banking on nostalgia for sales. Ryan Parrott starts off what seems to be a very interesting story for the two teams, while Simone di Meo, Walter Baiamonte and Igor Monti deliver some delightfully dynamic art.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Mighty Morphin Power Rangers / Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles #2

Jan 7, 2020

MMPR/TMNT #2 is just plain and simple fun. If you are a fan of either of these properties there is no reason not to enjoy this. If the other three issues are just as good then we are in for a treat. It is hard for me to read this issue without a smile on my face, and the final page stinger is just wonderful. It really does deliver everything you could want from both of these properties. The story nor the art is "phoning it in" either. There is a lot of heart and love going into it.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Mighty Morphin Power Rangers / Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles #3

Feb 4, 2020

MMPR/TMNT #3 continues to deliver just about everything you could ever want from these two franchises meeting. It is just a crazy fun series!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Mighty Morphin Power Rangers / Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles #4

Mar 18, 2020

There is a lot to love in MMPR/TMNT #4. If you are a fan of either of these classic series then you will find something to enjoy. If you are a fan of both of them (like me) then you will find yourself smiling throughout the issue. While the plot may not be earth-shattering it does what it needs to do to get these teams together and delivers some fantastic fan serviceable moments. Parrott also continues to excel with every character.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Mighty Morphin Power Rangers / Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles #5

Jun 17, 2020

MMPR/TMNT #5 wraps up the mini-series in a fun way, as well. It is just a pure fun book. If you are looking to escape this wild world for a few minutes then you need to grab this and hold on for a shell of a time!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.6
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016) #8

Oct 27, 2016

The creative team is still doing a fantastic job on this Power Rangers book. They are taking the original "90's" rangers and making them there own. They do a fantastic job of making this universe serious but not so dark and gritty that it forgets it's campiertv show roots. I cannot see fans of the Power Rangersnot liking this book. Nostalgia can only hold a book up for so long, if the creative team wasn't doing such a fantastic job this book would be cancelled by now, I for one am looking forward to where they take these characters in future issues!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016) #9

Dec 2, 2016

Conclusion: Mighty Morphin Power Rangers continues to be a great read that goes beyond what the original show ever was. I enjoy where the story line is going and how it is breaking away from the tv show. I would like a little more downtime with the characters so they could be fleshed out more, but with so few pages and a back up story thrown in a can see where this is hard to do. MMPR is a fun book that will draw readers in just for nostalgia purposes but the story and art will keep them coming back because its an all around good comic book.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.6
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016) #10

Dec 28, 2016

This is a really fun off-shoot issue of the main story and it gives some great development of my favorite Ranger Billy (I think this storyline may continue into the next issue). The only problem is that the previous issue followed the main ongoing story and left us with a big cliff hanger of a new Ranger/alternate dimension being introduced. Going to that to this story is a little weird. I think MMPR might benefit from how IDW's Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles will have "micro-series" that do off shoot stories like this. I know they are doing something like that with Mighty Morphin Power Rangers: Pink,this might have benefited more being in something like that instead of on the main book. Other than that mild complaint it was a good issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016) #1

Jul 21, 2020

If you are a Power Rangers fan you absolutely need to buy this. I will go out on a limb and say even if you don't care about Power Rangers you could still read and enjoy this. I don't really care much about the “franchise” of Power Rangers but this issue made me want more! I know they recently announced some new ongoing Power Rangers books, but this needs to be an ongoing. The story woven within the 42 pages is fantastic and I want more of this universe! I guess some of the highest praise for a one-shot issue is that it tells a captivating, developed story with a solid beginning, middle, and end that leaves you satisfied, but also wishing and hoping for more at the same time.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Misfit City #1

May 10, 2017

Misfit City #1 is just a great first issue and a great start to what seems like an incredible adventure series. With great characters that are well established right off the bat, an exciting story with adventure and mystery, and a great art team it is hard to come up with a reason, not to at least check out Misfit City #1. This is a great series especially for younger female readers that are having trouble finding comics for themselves. You not only get a great cast of widely diverse female charactersbut some great female creators on this series also that are getting a chance to show off some immense talent. All that to the side the main thing is that Misfit City #1 is an all around great comic that will have readers clamoring for more, I for one wish this had been a double-sized first issue to get more of this wonderful story into my brain.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Misfit City #2

Jun 14, 2017

Misfit City continues to be a really fun “mystery” comic that is really just a joy to read. The creative team is doing a top notch job of slowly building the mystery of Cannon Cove and this treasure map. They have introduced a great core group of unlikely friends that makes the book a lot of fun seeing them interact and quip with one another. The two main “villain' characters are great stereotypical “evil doers” that have their own motives for the map and this new mysterious forearm tattoo man really ramps up the mystery to a new level. Get in on the fun and pick up this issuenow!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.1
Misfit City #3

Jul 11, 2017

Misfit City has been a great "all ages" series so far, with a great cast of characters and an exciting mystery adventure tale there is not much to not enjoy about this series. I am really liking that the creators are injecting a little "super-natural" eliminate into the story, it really makes the series all that more entertaining. That being said Misfit City #3 is a little bit boring and slows the series down a little bit. That does not take away from how much "energy" this series has brought to the reader and I feel as this will read a little bit better when collected in the trade than it does as a single issue. The mystery continues and things get truly strange for the gang in this Misfit City #3.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Misfit City #4

Aug 16, 2017

This issue of Misfit City is probably the best issue of this series so far; while the other issues have been good I feel as if we finally have a grasp of these characters and are finally just settling into this mystery. I am really invested in this story as a reader and it is a lot of fun to try and figure out the mystery along with the gang and the creative team keeps dropping new things into the story that keeps making it deeper and deeper.Misfit City is a fantastic series especially if you have a younger reader in your household. It has great characters, a really fun/creepy mystery story and is just a joy to read!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Misfit City #5

Sep 21, 2017

Misfit City #5 is another great entry in just a really fun comic book series. The cast of characters are just delightful and it is great to see them put into this ever increasing crazy situation. The creative team has done a fantastic job of slowly developing this mystery story while still keeping the reader intrigued and just making Misfit City a joy to read. This series is one of the few really good all-ages comic books that can really be enjoyed by anybody.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Misfit City #6

Oct 19, 2017

Misfit City #6 legit goes full-on Scooby-Doo by the end of the issue and I cannot wait for issue #7, the only thing that could make it better would be if it came out before Halloween! The writing continues to make the story engaging and a whole lot of fun; there is hardly a dull moment in Misfit City #6. The art team also continues to do a superb job as well, with great cartooning and coloring Misfit City is an all-around solid comic book series. If you like mysteries, adventures and just an all-around good time, you are not going to want to miss out on Misfit City.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Misfit City #7

Nov 15, 2017

Misfit City continues just to be a really fun engaging series that somehowkeeps you on the edge of your seat while smiling the whole way through. I really thought I would be bored of this series by now, but I look forward to reading it every time it comes out. The creative has done a superb job of just making Misfit City a great comic book. Misfit City #7 in itself is just a fantastic read, with the Halloween settingand the mystery getting closer and closer to being solved. The gang has gone through a lot to get this close to finally solving the mystery, but with a new mysterious person popping up in Misfit City #7 and their enemies hot on their tales will the mystery be solved or will the gang end up like Black Mary, buried at the bottom of the sea?

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Misfit City #8

Dec 27, 2017

Misfit City #8 was a satisfying conclusion to a really fun series. It was a little rushed but satisfyingall the same. Misfit City is going to make for a really awesometrade and perfect for younger readers. It has a great adventure story that combines elements of horror, mystery, adventure, and tales of friendship all rolled into one. But saying it is for a younger reader is not a put-down. Adults like me will thoroughlyenjoy this series as well. It is great just to have a series like this that does not talk down to younger readers, but just tells a fantastic story!

View Issue       View Full Review
6.3
Monarchs #1

Dec 5, 2018

That seems like a great idea; the one downfall is that trade does not come out until March. That is a long time in comic books. I would be interested in that trade, but so many things will come out between now and then. Will I or other people remember? I wish they could release it closer to the first issue. It is a really good idea but not sure how it will work out.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Moon Knight (1980) #25

Apr 28, 2022

Looking back at Moon Knights original run and issue #25 is a pretty solid storu, it has all the staples you want and a little bit of political intrigue as well. I am a fan of the bronze age of comic writing style it has an overall serious tone, but very silly at the same time. Great artwork and honestly couldn't ask for anything better than what is delivered on the pages. Hopefully the Moon Knight tv show will have so people going a little further back into the archives to pull out some of these Moon Knight gems!

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Moon Knight (2016) #14

Jun 2, 2017

The Moon Knight creative team has stuck the landing with this final issue in the series. With the effective handling of Marc's mental illness Jeff Lemire has shown a new light onto Marc Spector.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Moon Knight (2017) #188

Nov 10, 2017

Moon Knight #188 introduces a new, terrifying villain into Moon Knight's rogues' gallery. While Marc Spector himself does not show up, we do get a fully fleshed-out villain in Moon Knight #188. The art and story are a great departure from the last series, which is welcome, and I am glad that the creative team is trying something new and different with Moon Knight. Plus, I cannot be too upset that Moon Knight was not in this issue, as we are getting double Moon Knight this month: Moon Knight #189 is due out on November 29th!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Moon Knight (2017) #189

Nov 30, 2017

I am really liking how Bemis is dealing with Moon Knight's mental disorder for now. We had a 14-issue series that dealt with it in every issue, so I like that Bemis addresses it, but it is also not the sole focus of the book. I get that we can't completely ignore it, but I also like to see Moon Knight deal with other things besides that aspect of his character. It is nice to see him doing some superhero stuff and not letting the mental disorder completely define him. Hopefully, that trend continues throughout the series. The art in Moon Knight #189 continues to be fantastic and very unique. I am happy to say as a longtime fan of Moon Knight that I am really enjoying this new series. The story is taking some interesting turns and the art is fantastic.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Moon Knight (2017) #190

Dec 27, 2017

Max Bemis is definitely pulling Marc Spector in new directions with Moon Knight #190. Moon Knight fans will be shocked by the revelations in this issue! While I would like to see Moon Knight do some regular superhero stuff, I still enjoy what Bemis is doing so far with this series. It also does not hurt that the art team is doing a pretty stellar job. This issue had me pretty stunned as a long-time Moon Knight fan. I am very excited to see where things go from here!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Moon Knight (2017) #191

Jan 31, 2018

I am liking this new run and creative team on Moon Knight so far, for the most part. It is pushing the character in new directions, and it puts him in a very different situation. Moon Knight #191 also features Moon Knight fighting without pants, and that is something you do not see often! Joking aside, Moon Knight is a solid comic book. The story continues to build and bring the character to new and interesting areas.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Moon Knight (2017) #192

Feb 28, 2018

The story is starting to come together in Moon Knight #192. We learn a little more about what is driving our hero and villain, while at the same time literally bringing Moon Knight in new directions. Bemis's story points with the Sun King are starting to take hold and he is developing Marc Spector well. While I have some nit-picks here and there, overall Jacen Burrows and Guillermo Ortego do a tremendous job on art and they have some fantastic scenes in Moon Knight #192 and Lopes's colors are wonderful. This storyline is starting to really grow on me and I will be very interested to see how it ends and where it leaves Marc Spector afterward.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Moon Knight (2017) #193

Mar 29, 2018

Crazy does not even begin to explain this series! Two avatars of “gods” are at war and it looks like the sun is rising in Moon Knight #193. Max Bemis brings the crazy whileJacen Burrows,Guillermo Ortego, and Mat Lopes' visuals are pure lunacy! Moon Knight #193 is an issue that will have Moon Knight fans talking. Whether it is good or bad is up to you, but right now I like where Marc Spector is heading.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
Moon Knight (2017) #194

Apr 26, 2018

Overall Moon Knight #194 was a pretty solid issue. There are things I liked and disliked about it. I am not crazyabout having to continually deal with Marc's mental illness with every issue, but it is also nice to know what it stems from. I really enjoyed the moments of Marc being a father. It's an interesting direction to take for the character. The art is solid. Templeton has some good layouts and Smith does good work on colors. The art is good but it also does not stand out in this issue either. All in all a good issue. Nothing great but it does reveal some interesting points for the character of Moon Knight.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Moon Knight (2017) #195

May 23, 2018

Moon Knight #195 is another good issue. We get introduced to a new villain and Moon Knight has a whole new raft of problems to deal with. The pacing did feel a little off and I do wish we got to spend a little more time with Marc Spector getting to know his daughter. Overall it is a fun start to a new storyline. The art change, while vastly different than what we have been getting, works surprisingly well and delivers some great moments throughout the issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Moon Knight (2017) #196

Jun 27, 2018

Moon Knight #196 wraps up this two-part story as Marc Spector must fight off the Collective from inside its own mind. Max Bemis continues to do a good job of bringing our hero to new and different places while expanding his rogues' gallery with new and interesting characters. I do wish Moon Knight had a little more “family time” but I am overall enjoying what Bemis is doing with him. Paul Davidson and Mat Lopes deliver some superb visuals in Moon Knight #196, and honestly, it was just a lot of fun to look at!

View Issue       View Full Review
5.9
Moon Knight (2017) #199

Oct 1, 2018

I hate to sound mean or anything but I am happy Max Bemis's run on Moon Knight is done after issue #200. I did like what he was doing at the beginning but it seems somewhere along the way he got too focused on one aspect of Marc's life and left everything else out. Moon Knight #199 just continues that same story path. Paul Davidson and Matt Milla's art is tremendous though, they do an incredible job and I hope to see Davidson on more Marvel books in the future.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.4
Moonshine (2016) #2

Nov 18, 2016

Moonshine #2 is a great book if you are looking for a good horror read. I really enjoy a good werewolf story whether it be a book, movie or whatever type of media and it can be an easy one to screw up. The werewolf design is good by my standards, it has a that monster look you need for a werewolf story (I have wasted a lot of my life thinking about werewolves). I do kind of wish they would have held off on showing the full werewolf maybe for another issue. I enjoyed how we were just getting glimpses of it. I am interested to see were Lou goes from the end of this issue and how this book will continue to play out.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.4
Moonshine (2016) #3

Dec 15, 2016

Conclusion: Overall Moonshine#3 is a good crime comic book, it has a great story plot with a noir feel to it. I really don't know if the whole “werewolf” part is even necessary and that's coming from a guy who really likes werewolves! This book would be perfectly fine leaving that part out and would make a great just straight crime story. Maybe the whole Wolf-Man thing will play a bigger role as more of the mystery unfolds. This is still a very interesting comic and still has a lot to unravel in its story.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Moonshine (2016) #4

Jan 15, 2017

Moonshine #4 boast some fantastic art from Eduardo Risso that really makes the issuecome alive in a noir/horror vibe that keeps the reader's eyes entranced. The mystery continues as Azzarello reveals little by little about Lou's past and what is going on in the Holt family. While the story is good it still runs the risk ofbecoming stale if we don't get some big reveals in the next few issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Moonshine (2016) #5

Feb 7, 2017

Moonshine #5 has picked up its pace and things are coming to a head with the next issue. Lou's bosses have had enough of the Holt family and realize they are not going to give up their moonshine without a fight and they are bringing some heavy artillery to the mountain town. Moonshine went from being a little bit dull after that last issue to completely upping the stakes in issue #5 and with the combination of Eduardo's art styling, I am really looking forward to the battle that is coming to ahead in the next issue. If you like noir, pulp, crime, mystery, and werewolves Moonshine has what you are looking for.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Moonshine (2016) #6

Mar 29, 2017

Moonshine #6 is a great end to the first story arc. We get a great battle between the Holt's and the New York gangsters and finally get to see the werewolf unleashed in all its glory. The issue also superbly sets up the next arc introducing some new characters and building tension between those that we have come to known. Werewolves, gangsters, hillbillies and shootouts! Moonshine has exactly what you are looking for.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Moonshine (2016) #7

Feb 17, 2018

While the story did not grab my attention much in Moonshine #7, the art had me hanging on each and every page. I feel like they dropped the ball not having a recap page, as the series has been on hiatus for almost a year. I think this would have helped continuingreaders and would have definitelybeen a plus if a new reader decided to jump on with this issue. Even though I have my problems with the story, it does set up some interesting plot points as the series continues.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Moonshine (2016) #8

Mar 21, 2018

Moonshine #8 is a mixed bag for me. I like how the story is told and what is happening, I am just not too sure exactly where the story is going or if I really care. I like the story, but then again I really do not care about any of the characters, so it is a little hard to get excited about it at times. The art does continue to be stellar and a real highlight of the series. Lou Pirlo has hit some hard times. Chains may hold a man, but can they contain a beast?

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
Moonshine (2016) #9

Apr 17, 2018

I like what is happening in Moonshine #9 for the most part. The story has some interesting details and twist, but it does have trouble keeping my attention at times. I am hopingthe Lou Pirlo storyline starts to pick up with the next issue as it has been very slow. The art continues to be the main sticking point for me at this time. It continues to be a beautiful series to look at. With a solid ending in Moonshine #9, Azzarello does know how to hook the reader for another issue and I am interested to see where he is taking this story.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Moonshine (2016) #10

May 16, 2018

Moonshine#10 is probably the best issue of this second story arc. Things are finally starting to happen and the story feels like it is coming together more. I like what Azzarello is doing. I just wish it was paced a little bit better. Eduardo Risso continues to be wonderful with the art. Moonshine may have dipped a little bit in the past few issues but it looks like the full moon is about to rise again!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.4
Moonshine (2016) #12

Jul 24, 2018

Overall I like the story of Moonshine; it just feels like it could be a little tighter. Some big things happen in Moonshine #12 that have me excited to see where Azzarello is taking this series, but it is also trying my patience. Some characters, I wish we would get a little more information on, and I wish things would happen just a tiny bit quicker. The art continues to be extraordinarily good; there are beautiful scenes throughout Moonshine #12. Eduardo Risso is doing some masterful work in this series.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Moonshine (2016) #13

Nov 12, 2019

I am very happy that Moonshine is back and this is probably the best start to a new story arc since the first issue. Now, Moonshine #13 is not a good jumping-on point, but you can easily pick up the two trades to catch up. The art continues to be fantastic and just a delight to look at. If you are looking for a horror/crime story then you really need to jump on the Moonshine train.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Moonshine (2016) #14

Dec 10, 2019

Moonshine #14 adds a lot to the story of Lou Pirlo and puts another twist into his already curvy life. The setting of Prohibition-era New Orleans makes for some delightful visuals. This is slowly turning into my favorite story arc of the series. Mystery and intrigue abound, while the beast continues to lurk in the background of every page. The creative team is doing some fantastic work and making this series into a must read.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Moonshine (2016) #15

Jan 7, 2020

I think readers may overlook this book, and that would be a travesty. It is really hitting its stride now. One thing I haven't talked about a lot is, I really enjoy that they don't show the werewolf that often. It is teased a lot and we see glimpses of carnage and what-not. We rarely clearly see the monster, which makes it more "special" and shocking when we do see the beast.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Moonshine (2016) #16

Feb 11, 2020

Moonshine #16 is another wonderful entry into this series. It is another one of the issues where the werewolf horror them hits hard. We learn why Jean-Baptiste has set his eyes on Lou Pirlo and it is not just for his beastly alter ego. The series continues to be visually stunning and this issue is just tremendously pleasing to look at in a grisly type of way.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Moonshine (2016) #18

Jun 16, 2020

Somehow, some way, Moonshine combines werewolves, Prohibition-era gangster crime, love, and drama all into one wild, intriguing story. You get a little horror, a little heartbreak in this increasingly captivating story in Moonshine #18.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.5
Moonshine (2016) #19

Jul 14, 2020

Moonshine #19 was not a strong issue for the series. It does not push anything forward with the stories or characters. While introducing these new detectives a possible serial killer and the likes started an interesting concept in the previous issue. Moonshine #19 failed to capture any momentum for the series and lost my interest after the first few pages.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.9
Moonshine (2016) #23

Mar 23, 2021

Moonshine #23 is a surprising book, in that I was sure it was over. I guess the series needs a better ending than what was presented in issue #22. The issue actually does start off strong with some interesting story points happening. But, that does not give me high hopes for this story arc. Hopefully Azzarello starts bringing some story points together. Moonshine continues to chug along and I hope it stays on the tracks this time.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Moonshine (2016) #24

Apr 20, 2021

Man, after Moonshine #24 I am excited to read this series again. Azzarello might be turning a corner with this story and actually bringing it back around. I think Moonshine #24 also shows that maybe this series didn't need the whole werewolf element to it. It plays no significant role in this issue and I think if you left the whole thing out and just had this prohibition, mob crime era drama the story would have maybe faired better? And this is coming from a guy who really likes his werewolf stories. But, none the less a solid issue of Moonshine and one that has me excited for the rest of this storyline.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Moonshine (2016) #26

Jul 14, 2021

Moonshine #26 is a tricky one for me. The story starts to be compiled a bit more into what seems to be a big showdown. I still have trouble with finding the main thread or what Azzarello wants this story to be? But, the artwork is fantastic and there are some fantastic werewolf action in the issue, so that kept me distracted from the disjointed story mostly.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Motor Crush #1

Dec 7, 2016

Conclusion: Batgirlcreative team fans can rest assured that Motor Crushis gearing up to be another hit series.Motor Crush #1feels like a great opening to a classic 1980's dystopian future typemovie! With some great character work and designsMotor Crush will have the reader locked in. While the book runs at a break neck pace and some things are left in the dust, overall Motor Crush #1is a fun comic that ignites the imagination.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.6
Motor Crush #2

Jan 15, 2017

Conclusion:Motor Crush #2 is a fun book that nails the action scenes and the creators have built a really interesting vibrant world, where motorcycle racing rules the streets. The colors are very eye catching and enhance the feel of the worldand the character designs are fantastic, they really set the book apart. The story still needs that catch to keep the reader coming back. This being only the second issue it still has time to get that. Only other gripe is I don't really get the big reveal at then end, I won't spoil it but she wears a clear pink face mask and drives the same bike and wears the same clothes in all of her races so are people not supposed to know who Domino Swift is?

View Issue       View Full Review
7.6
Motor Crush #3

Feb 8, 2017

Motor Crush #3 continues Domino Swift's downward spiral attempting to live a double life. With her addiction to "crush" starting to affect her pro racing career will she be able to keep it together to save her family and herself? I like the idea of Motor Crush and it has some really great characters and concepts, but it is just moving a little bit too fast (I know that is weird to say about a book that is about motorcycle racing). The characters need a little bit of time to settle down and maybe have a one-shot issue that does not follow the main story line. The art team still does a wonderful job and their colors pop off the page along with their fantastic character designs, the art still remains the main catch for this series.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Murder Falcon #1

Oct 9, 2018

If you are a fan of Daniel Warren Johnson then obviously you will want to pick this up. If you have never read any of his stuff then what are you doing with your life? But seriously, if not, you really should buy Murder Falcon #1; it is a fun, high octane romp that also has a lot of heart to it as well. I have been following Johnson on social media as he has been talking about this project, and to see it finally in the "flesh" is awesome. I can't say enough good things about this issue. Just go pick it up and enjoy!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Murder Falcon #2

Nov 13, 2018

Daniel Warren Johnson is an incredible artist and he continues to show that in Murder Falcon #2. After his emotional Extremity series it seems like he is having a little bit more fun with Murder Falcon. He still has some heart in the series, but it is also a lot of wacky fun as well. Having some seriousness to the series with dealing with loss and coming back from it helps it keep from being a one off joke.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Murder Falcon #3

Dec 11, 2018

Murder Falcon has just enough seriousness to it to make the whole absurdity not become old and stale. That was the biggest obstacle this series had to overcome. If books are weird and goofy just to be weird and goofy, that usually outstays its welcome after two issues. Usually the jokes become old. Johnson injects some true heart into the story and focuses enough on our characters and their relationships to keep all the goofy aspects fun and enjoyable. Murder Falcon is not a perfect book, but you are missing out on a lot if you are not picking it up!

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Murder Falcon #4

Jan 7, 2019

I was close to writing Murder Falcon off. Yes, I was enjoying it and was going to keep reading it but I felt like it was missing a little something. Well, with Murder Falcon #4 it got what it was missing and I cannot wait to see what else is in store for this series! I really can't praise this team enough really just a fantastic comic book.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Murder Falcon #5

Feb 14, 2019

Even though the story in Murder Falcon #5 didn't have as big of an emotional impact as I felt it should, the series as a whole continues to be good. Seeing Jake continue to deal with his past and try to become better continues to be an interesting story point. Having Johnson draw all these crazy monsters and characters is a high point for the series. I thought Murder Falcon might get a little old after a few issues, but somehow Johnson keeps introducing new things that make it fun and interesting, and I can't wait to see what he does in this next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Namesake #1

Nov 9, 2016

Conclusion: I hate to say it but this just is not a good book. With the very confusing concept and layout it just makes it tough to get through. It feels like the same fantasy wheel house of books like Rebornand Seven to Eternity,but where this book fails they shine. Those two books are also fantasy worlds that throw you into the mix but you don't feel lost or confused with those books like I did with Namesake. The writers and artist in those books do a much better job of bringing the reader into this strange world and not letting them get too lost in all the differences and concepts. For a four issue mini series Namesake has already floundered out with being an confusing first issue and what could be a promising story ends up dull and uninteresting. I feel like this could be a great concept but it is just very poorly executed in story and art.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Namwolf #1

Apr 28, 2017

Namwolf #1 is overall a fun read, it has a quiet catchy name and hook of a werewolf in Vietnam (the tag line feels a lotlike the movie Wolf Cop) the name and basic story plot is what draws the reader in. The story is intriguing and flows as a good general war story with a werewolf twist. The art is overall good but when you are publishing a werewolf story in a visual medium it is going to come down to what that creature looks like and that is where Namwolf falters with a lackluster beast.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Nancy Drew & The Hardy Boys: The Death of Nancy Drew #1

Mar 31, 2020

I was not expecting to like The Death of Nancy Drew #1 as much as I did. Wow, what an exciting mystery story this creative team has delivered. No worries if you have never read a Nancy Drew or Hardy Boys story, or you have not read the previous series. If you want to read a good mystery comic book then you can just jump right in on this series. You won't be disappointed.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.8
Nancy Drew & The Hardy Boys: The Death of Nancy Drew #2

Jul 8, 2020

So, I am at a weird point with The Death of Nancy Drew #2. I liked the first issue, but this second issue after the first few pages lost my interest. The story just did not captivate me as much and the art just didn't feel as tight as on the first few pages. I still liked the issue and the mystery does have me at least coming back for the 3rd issue, I just hope it picks the steam back up after this issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Naomi #1

Jan 24, 2019

Naomi #1 is another solid release for this Wonder Comics imprint. The characters are well done and the mystery is actually pretty intriguing. The art, while the style is not my personal favorite, looks great and fits the series perfectly. I did not know anything about Naomi #1 coming into it but it has me hooked for the second issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Naomi #2

Feb 21, 2019

If I had just read the solicit for Naomi I probably would have skipped it. It sounds a little boring or clich. An adopted girl, small town, mystery, probably has powers. It doesn't sound anything really that interesting, but the creative team has woven a fantastic tale and really wrapped me up in this story as a reader. While the art style is not a favorite of mine, Campbell does some stunning work in this issue; those couple of two-page spreads are something to marvel at. If you skipped over Naomi I suggest you give it chance; the creative team on this series is doing some fantastic work.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.8
Naomi #3

Mar 20, 2019

Naomi continues to be an interesting series. I like this mystery surrounding this new character and some of the teases and questions that are brought up in Naomi #3. I guess the big thing is do I care? My interest in or caring for the character started to wane a little bit on this issue. I am still on board, but if issue #4 doesn't pick up the story a little bit I might be jumping off.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Naomi #5

May 15, 2019

This is the issue that answers almost all of our questions! Where we learn all about Naomi's past. Who are her birth parents? Where did she come from? Does she have special powers? All the secrets are revealed in Naomi #5. You can't miss this issue if you are a fan of the series. It really is a solid origin story and actually, a fun read. Some crazy things are revealed that are going to affect the DCU big time and sets up what seems to be an exciting next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
5.8
New Men #1

Apr 23, 2020

I think this is a series with a ton of potential and I am excited to see where it goes from here. It just needs some work.

View Issue       View Full Review
5.8
New Men #2

May 29, 2020

New Men #2 does a good job of getting more development on the character Shade, and builds this world up a bit more. The series still needs more of a focal point and something for readers to latch onto, though. The art, again, has some high points, but it also continues to be too bland in look and layout. It also just needs more sequential storytelling work. Again, I like the idea and concept of New Men. The creators have a lot of talent in them, but there is a lot of refining to still do to this series.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
New Mutants: Dead Souls #1

Mar 15, 2018

It is probably going to take me one more issue to decide if I am going to stay with New Mutants: Dead Souls for the entire six-issue run. I liked the concept and most of the characters, but I am not completely sold yet. The information dump at the end threw me off a little bit and I am not completely sure where the story is going. I liked the majority of this issue, but it was not without its flaws either. Like I said earlier, it is an odd team on an odd adventure, but for me, that is part of its charm. It does have me looking forward to the next issue, so that's something.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
New Mutants: Dead Souls #2

Apr 4, 2018

New Mutants: Dead Souls is what you get when you cross superheroes and The X-Files, and it works fantastically well! Having this odd group of mutants investigating these paranormaltype mysteries makes this series a joy to read. The characters are well written and engaging, while the art gives the series an ominous atmosphere.New Mutants: Dead Souls #2 was a lot of fun and has me looking forward to the rest of the series!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.6
New Mutants: Dead Souls #3

May 11, 2018

New Mutants: Dead Souls #3 is another solid entry into this mini-series. We are officially halfway through and we have been introduced to our main “bad guy” of this series. Our heroes have had a tough time getting along and after the events of this mission, they may never come back together again. That is if they survive. Look, I am not going to tell you this is the greatest comic book ever, but I look forward to reading it every timeit comes out. It has a fun story that balances comedy, drama, and action well. I love the paranormal aspect and the team interactions. This all comes together to make New Mutants: Dead Souls one of my favorite books.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.4
New Mutants: Dead Souls #4

Jun 13, 2018

New Mutants: Dead Souls #4 is another great entry into what is shaping up to be a fantastic six-issue mini-series. Rosenberg throws the reader for a loop in this issue and well, let's just say it is a crazy issue of New Mutants. The art continues to be good with some great character work and superb coloring. Again, I am digging this supernatural mutant fighting team and each issue has been a lot of fun.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
New Mutants: Dead Souls #5

Jul 12, 2018

This was my favorite issue so far of this mini-series, and with only one more issue to go, it has me excited to see how it ends. Matthew Rosenberg has balanced emotional storytelling with some great comedic beats. I still do not know what is going on with Warlock. Let us just say this issue ends with a bang for his storyline. I am intrigued to see if the Warlock storyline ties into this main one or not. Time is up for the New Mutants"after the shocking conclusion of New Mutants: Dead Souls #5 our team might be truly down for the count!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
Night Owl Society #1

Apr 25, 2017

Night Owl Society #1 is a good first issue if a little bit rushed. The team up story of high school kids fighting a mob boss seems like it is going to be a lot of fun and with the ending to this first issue, things are definitely going to get a little hairier. It would be nice if this could have been stretched to a four or five issue mini series instead of three, to let the story and characters breathe a little bit more in this first issue. That being said it is a solid first issue, but the story feels like it had a lot more possibilities given some breathing room.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.5
Night Owl Society #2

May 18, 2017

Night Owl Society #2 is a good continuation of this four part min series. Venhaus is telling a good story and it is great to see these different people band together and become friends, Bak does some great more emotional shot in this issue and really gets the characters feelings off the page. The story is just moving a little to fast and the art needs a little more refining to make this series into something special. That being said Venhaus has left this issue with a fantastic cliffhanger that will definitely have me coming back for issue #3.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Night Owl Society #3

Jun 7, 2017

Venhaus and Bak are both talented creators and I believe if given more time with this series they could have really made this into something great, maybe IDW Publishing will see this and give them a longer series next time. Until then Night Owl Society may have its flaws, but it is still a fun three issue mini-series.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.1
Nightwing (2016) #29

Sep 20, 2017

Nightwing #29 is what it is and the creative team does its best to make this an interesting tie-in story and get the reader involved in this event series. There is not much else to say about it, if you are just looking to read Nightwing you can definitely skip over this issue and wait until the next to follow his adventures, if you are all aboard the Dark Nights Metal event train, then obviously you are going to want to pick this Issue up as it does reveal some key things in that storyline.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.8
Nightwing (2016) #43

Apr 18, 2018

Nightwing #43 is a one-shot superhero story that was fun to read. But, it being a one-shot is a good and a bad thing. It is a lot of fun to read and the artwork is solid, but it is easily forgettable as well. Nothing really stands out after the issue is read and done with. I am a fan of one-shot stories and like having a one and done story being told in a single issue. Nightwing #43 delivered some thrills, but overall just lacked a truly gripping story being told.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.3
Nightwing (2016) Annual #1

Aug 30, 2018

The story in Nightwing Annual #1 was odd. The characters' dialogue felt off and the story as a whole did not flow very well. The saving grace is some delightful artwork from Otto Schmidt. His character work is fantastic and is always stunning to look at. Nightwing is a character I always want to like and get into, but Nightwing Annual #1 did not help that out.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
No One's Rose #1

Mar 24, 2020

No One's Rose #1 has a lot going for it. The art is beautifully done and is the high point of the issue. There is a lot done, visually, that makes the story worthwhile. The story itself also has a lot going for it. The basic concept is interesting and intriguing. The characters also have a lot of potential, as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Nocterra #1

Mar 2, 2021

Nocterra #1 is a tough one to judge. If you like Scott Snyder's work then his style bleeds through in this series and you will find something to enjoy. I like the horror/sci-fi feel of the book but also mixed with this almost campy type tone of this post-apocalyptic world and its citizens. The art is all-around solid as well. But, I feel like we have seen all this before. Nothing really jumps out in Nocterra #1. From the story to the art, there is nothing that stands out to me, to say you have to pick this series up. Hopefully that changes in the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Occupy Avengers #2

Dec 23, 2016

Conclusion: Overall, after the first two issues I am on board with Occupy Avengers. While I am not completely on-board with the art, David F. Walker is doing some fantastic work with this book and talking about some real world issues. If you are looking for a “super hero” book with some heart that's also knows how to have a fun time then join up with Occupy Avengers and take back justice!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Occupy Avengers #3

Jan 15, 2017

Occupy Avengers #3 is another great entry into this series. Including Nighthawk and Nightshade on the team really brings in a fun dynamic, especially with the tension of not so serious Clint Barton and the overly serious Nighthawk. The art team has changed this reviewers mind and they do some really awesome panel layouts that are just amazing to look at. Occupy Avengers is a great more "down to earth" superhero story and it's great to see hero's fighting for the everyday people. The whole creative team is firingon all cylinders and this is a Marvel book that should not be overlooked.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Old Man Hawkeye #1

Jan 11, 2018

I was a little surprised at how much I liked Old Man Hawkeye #1. Maybe it was because I was not expecting much out of it or was not too hyped about it, but it was a fun read. Although, I am still wondering what the real endgame is here? Hawkeye obviously lives at the end. It was a solid start for this twelve issue series. The art is fantastic and, even if you do not like the story, the art is beautiful enough just to stare at for a long time. All in all,Old Man Hawkeye #1 was a good start to a series I never knew I wanted and has me onboard for now.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Old Man Hawkeye #2

Feb 15, 2018

Old Man Hawkeye is a wild ride and it is just getting started! Things are heating up for Clint Barton"as his eyesight goes he has one last score to settle and it is not going to be easy. With Madrox, Venom, and Bullseye out to get him, the agingarcher is going to need more than luck to stay alive. Ethan Sacks is bringing back the world of Old Man Logan with greatnew insight and an intriguing story to tell. Checchetto and Mossa continue to be an incredible art team that delivers stunning detail on each and every page!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Once & Future #1

Aug 13, 2019

Once & Future #1 is a pretty solid start to this six-issue mini-series. The story has a solid premise and delivers some great action, intrigue, and chuckles along the way. I do wish this first issue did slow down just a tad bit, though. The art is, once again, spectacular; you really can't go wrong with Dan Mora and Tamra Bonvillain. If you are looking for a fun new series to jump into this is a fantastic choice! It seems pretty popular already going into its third printing before release.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Once & Future #2

Sep 17, 2019

It is no secret that I love Dan Mora's art, and it continues to shine. And even if I am not fully engaged in the story it is still worth picking up Once & Future just to see Mora do his thing. Pairing with Tamra Bonvillain on colors is the icing on the cake.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Orphan and the Five Beasts #1

Mar 16, 2021

Look, I love old kung-fu movies and I adore James Stokoe, so obviously Orphan and the Five Beasts #1 was made for me to praise. I loved every second of it. Now, not much happens story-wise besides the setup, but Stokoe lays everything out and by the end, I was immediately wanting the second issue. The art is splendid and, as always, a treat to look at every single panel and page. Stokoe's art is like nothing else on the shelves. I am superbly hyped to see what Stokoe has created in that mad mind of his for the next three issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Orphan and the Five Beasts #2

Apr 20, 2021

For me, Orphan and the Five Beasts #2 is exactly what I wanted from this comic book and if you are a fan of old kung-fu movies this is a must-buy. But, I can also see why some people may not dig the story or not be fully engulfed in it like I am. That is fine, everyone does not have to like everything. But, if you have aesthetics like me, then you absolutely must pick up this series. If you appreciate incredible comic book art then this deserves a gander as well. While the story might not be your thing, you cannot deny James Stokoe's artistic talent and it is always something to behold.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Orphan and the Five Beasts #3

Nov 6, 2021

If you are a fan of old Kung-Fu movies like Five Deadly Venoms, Five Masters of Death, and many others then Orphan and the Five Beasts is a must read. Stokoe pays homage to those films while putting his own wild twist on the genre.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Orphan and the Five Beasts #4

Feb 23, 2022

Orphan Mo battles the second of the five beasts. Chopper Teng the master of the Water Strider Buoyant Fist Style stands in her way of avenging her master. Can Orphan Mo defeat Chopper Teng or will the wily chef make her taste a terrible defeat?

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Planet of the Apes / Green Lantern #1

Feb 1, 2017

I am not really sure if anybody at all was clamoring for a Planet of the Apes Green Lantern crossover, but we got one and the first issue is actually pretty good(well there was also that Green Lantern/Star Trek crossover also so). Now I am not a fan of either series but this actually had me very interested just as a weird crossover. Thompson and Jordan are making a very good crossover of two very unrelated properties and they are taking their time to make it (at least for the first issue) not only fun but "logical" (well comic book logic). As weird as it is to say I am very much looking forward to the next issue to see what happens next. That final page was classic and will make just about anybody at least crack a smile.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Plunge #1

Feb 19, 2020

I was not expecting to like Plunge #1 as much as I did. I mean I knew the visuals would be spectacular with Stewart Immonen and Dave Stewart but I am not a big "horror" person and as most people know hate being scared. Plunge #1 just had a wonderfully creepy, ominous vibe to it that just sucked me right in. The story and characters were all engaging and really just captured me throughout the issue. After the last page, I immediately wanted more. It is not gory scary or visually scary. It just has a delightful ominous dreadful tone to it that engulfs you.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Power Man and Iron Fist (2016) Annual #1

Dec 22, 2016

This is a great annual! I generally like these "one and done" stories for annuals. You don't really have to worry about the ongoing narrative, you can just jump in and get a satisfying story from beginning to end. Power Man and Iron Fist is one of the most well-written thought-provoking, fun books on the stands right now. This annual could have just been a "phone it in" story but this creative teamreally gave the fans something very enjoyable and a fantastic read! It is a "Sweet Christmas" read indeed!

View Issue       View Full Review
6.3
Proxima Centauri #1

May 23, 2018

Look, I know if I had read The Wrenchies the story might have made more sense, but I have to judge this on what I was given and story wise I have no clue what in the world is happening. It is weird"very, very weird. The art in Proxima Centauri #1 is very good and that wacky weirdness does very well in the visual aspect of the book.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Punisher (2016) #219

Dec 13, 2017

I was a little skeptical about having Frank Castle in the War Machine armor and how that was going to be, but the story really makes it reasonable why Castle needs the armor. As someone who is not a regular The Punisher reader and just jumped in with this issue I was super impressed with the whole creative team and how much I liked this story. If you watched The Punisher series on Netflix and want some more Frank Castle with a little bit more comic-book twist then you should definitely check out this series!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Punisher (2016) #224

May 18, 2018

The Punisher #224 is another solid entry in this run and honestly a pretty good jumping-on point for new readers. The creative team has been doing a spectacularjob on this series and has made it a great read since the beginning. I do not hear a lot of people talking about it, and that is a shame because this team is very very good!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Punisher Kill Krew #1

Aug 14, 2019

Punisher: Kill Krew #1 (of 5) is probably not a book anybody is going to rave about. But, man, is it some good comic book reading fun. It has that nice balance of silly yet still serious (check out the cover for issue #2) that Duggan does perfectly. The art is all-around solid and Ferreyra has some great creature designs that I can't wait to see more of. If you are having a little bit of a light week or need a little "pick me up" then pick up this issue for just a fun time.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Punisher Kill Krew #2

Sep 11, 2019

Punisher: Kill Krew #2 was probably the most fun I have had reading a comic book in a while. I am not saying it is world changing or the greatest thing since sliced bread, but man I just had a good time reading it. That is sometimes all I want or need. Everything about it is just splendid to me and it had me entertained from beginning to end. Heck, I am even excited about the next issue and another new addition to the "Kill Krew" that is coming!

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Punisher Kill Krew #3

Sep 25, 2019

The writing is near perfect as Duggan digs into the silliness with a touch of heart. Adding Foggy Nelson and the Juggernaut is fantastic and made the series even better. Juan Ferreyra truly does some stunning sequential work; from action to comedy, it all looks fantastic and just fits the story perfectly. Drop what you are doing and read this series!

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Punisher Kill Krew #5

Nov 20, 2019

Punisher: Kill Krew #5 wraps up the story perfectly well and has a truly emotional ending. If you haven't, I implore you to go pick up the past four issues and just enjoy yourself

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Punisher: Soviet #1

Nov 14, 2019

If you are a Punisher fan then you don't need me to convince you to pick up Punisher: Soviet #1. If you enjoy Garth Ennis's work then you are probably going to enjoy this six-issue mini-series as well. I am not a huge Punisher "mark" and a six-issue mini-series is probably the perfect length for me. Ennis is also a writer you can trust to deliver a solid story, as well, with a hard-nosed Frank Castle.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.4
Ragman #1

Oct 11, 2017

Ragman #1 serves as a good jumping on point for anybody that has ever been interested in the character and wanted to read about him. The story starts off strong and brings the reader along slowly getting to know this character. The art, for the most part, is good comic art and the action pages are where it really starts to shine. Ragman #1 is a solid pick up if you are in the mood for a little something on the supernatural side, but still in the superhero universe, much like Marvel Spirits of Vengeance.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.6
Ragman #2

Nov 8, 2017

Ragman #2 (of 6) continues to introduce this “new” character into the DCU. Things are getting more heated as demons and other creatures are after Rory; he is going to have to learn how to use his newfound power quickly before it gets taken away from him. This series has definitelybeen new-reader-friendly. Fawkes does a great job of keeping you interested in the story and wanting to come back to learn more about this “hero”. While the art is not bad, it could use a little refining in the story-telling department, but that does not mean some scenes are not well done and a lot of fun to look at.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Ragman #3

Dec 13, 2017

Ragman #3 is the best issue of this mini-series so far. While the other issues were not bad, they felt like they were lacking a little something in them. In Ragman #3, it seems like the creative team has really gotten a hold of this story and characters, and things are starting to come together. Etrigan the Demon fits perfectly in this world and in this storyline, and he is a welcome addition to the story adding some intriguing plot points that have me very interested in what exactly his motives are. Ragman is turning into a very interesting six issue mini-series and definitely has me on board until the end!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Rai (2019) #1

Nov 18, 2019

Again, much like Roku #1, I was hoping to jump into the Valiant Universe with Rai #1. While not the worst place to start, it isn't the best, either. I was a bit confused about different things throughout it. It seems like Abnett has started an interesting journey with these characters; I just needed a little something more to get me invested.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Reborn #1

Oct 15, 2016

I had actually forgot this book was coming out this week, so this was just a real nice surprise! Mark Millar has been releasing some great material for the past few years that have been surprisingly really emotional and shying away from his more "violent" past. Rebornis combining those two into a wild violent/emotional ride. Co creator and artist of Reborn Greg Capullo shows why he is one of the best in the business and does not disappoint. In one issueMark Millar and Greg Capullo have createdsprawling scifi/fantasy epic andworld with with sprawling battles and mythical/alien creatureswhile keeping the "human" emotions intact.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Reborn #2

Nov 17, 2016

Reborn is turning into a fun fantasy adventure with plenty of twist and turns ahead. Greg Capullo and Mark Millar have created wonderful world that feels alive and vibrant. The only complaint I would have would be that this current issue and issue #1 both are really set up issues. I think it would have served the book better overall if issue #1 would have been and over-sized issue to start with, but that is the only flaw I could see. The basic world and concept are set up and Bonnie is off on her adventure and I am very muchlooking forward to what happens next!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Reborn #3

Dec 15, 2016

Conclusion: Reborn is still a great read form month to month. While this issue was not as tight as the previous two, it still is a great book! Reborn has a very distinctive style and flair to it that sets it apart from other scifi/fantasy books out on the shelves right now. It's always great to pop open an issue and see what wonderful/creepy creatures the creators have come up with for each issue! I don't know where things will go after this issue but it is definitely going to be a wild ride!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Reborn #6

Jun 9, 2017

Reborn #6 is the end to this fantastic mini-series from "Millar-World". The team has delivered a fantastic story as Bonnie goes from a frail old lady to being born back into a powerful warrior. They created a fantastic world and Issue #6 leads up to a gorgeous end battle that will have readers talking for a long time after. Reborn is the summer blockbuster that you can hold in your hands and enjoy throughout the warm days, so grab some popcorn and soft drink, sit back and enjoy the show!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.4
Red Dog #2

Jan 10, 2017

Conclusion:Issue #1 of Red Dog was a great introduction to this limited series (six issues) and gave the reader a little bit of info into Kyle's life. In issue #2 we really get some great insight into Kyle and his struggles with his family life. We also get some great interactions between Kyle, his uncle, Q and some new friends. Red Dog #2 is just a really fun issue. Red Dog looks like it is going to be a great six issue series that's going to give the reader a great story with some wonderful characters. If you want a sci-fi story that's not all doom and gloom pick up Red Dog,I guarantee you will have a smile on your face.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.9
Red Hood and the Outlaws (2016) #18

Jan 10, 2018

I jumped in toward the end of a storyline in Redhood and the Outlaws #18 and was pretty surprised by the issue. It was not the best thing I have ever read, but it was not bad either. I was not completely lost story-wise and, while it did not make me want to pick up the back issues, it does have me vaguely interested in continuing this storyline. The art again is serviceable; it does have its hang-ups, but overall not terrible art. The coloring really helps, as Atiyeh does an incredible job. Plus, come on, The Creeper is in this issue so it gets brownie points for that!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Redneck #1

Apr 20, 2017

Redneck is a good first issue, it sets up the story well and by then end of the issue the reader is well versed in this world and where the characters stand. It is hard to tell where the story will go from here. Obviously, there is going to be some retaliation and more blood spilled, but Cates leaves the reader with some deeper mysteries about the Bowman's vampire heritage and exactly why the Landry's have been feuding with them throughout the years. The art is good, especially the scenery and background details, but the more "cartoony" proportions of the characters sometimes throw off the "vibe" of the first issue. Overall Redneck #1 is a good start o a new series and delivers a tale of family feuds and how one bad night and make for a whole mess of trouble.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.6
Redneck #2

May 24, 2017

Redneck has turned into a very interesting “vampire” story. Cates continues to prove he is a fantastic writer that really knows how to tell a gripping story in a variety of settings. Whether it's a vampire family running a BBQ joint or a family dealing with their father wielding a “god sword” Cates knows how to transform these stories into emotional family dramas. Even with some art complaints which is just my opinion (obviously) Redneck is worth the price of admission and should not be overlooked.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Redneck #3

Jun 28, 2017

Redneck #3 is a great issue that by the end raises a multitude of questions for the readers, and the creative team does a fantastic job with the final page, building up some great interest in the next issue and where the series is going to go from here. The creative team on Redneck continues to bring something different to this vampire tale and it has definitely caught fire with many readers, so jump on board and as The Wu-Tang Clan would say “Protect ya Neck”!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Relay #1

Jul 10, 2018

While I am not 100% certain what exactly is going on in Relay #1, it still has me hooked. My confusion is not enough to draw me away from the story just yet, as the sci-fi angle and mystery have kept me thinking for a while after putting down this issue. The art in Relay #1 is fantastic and it is truly a beautiful book to look at. The art team brought this world to life with some stunning detail that will absolutely mesmerize your eyes. Relay #1 is a solid, yet confusing, start that will have you thinking long after you set the issue down.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.4
Remnant #1

Feb 6, 2020

The story of Remnant #1 is a novel look at a sci-fi trope. It was interesting to look at the concept of making another planet a "new Earth" through three different generations. I wish it would have been a bit longer to really get into the characters and more into the story. I just can't get over the art; comic books are a visual medium and I feel the art took away from the story instead of enhancing it. Still, it was a good one-shot story, with an interesting ending.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Resonant (2019) #1

Jul 24, 2019

Resonant #1 is an excellent first issue and new comic at Vault Comics. It is fast-paced and effective in not only building a new world and introducing us to new characters but getting us invested in them quickly. While the main plot may not be the most original thing ever the characters and their emotions surrounding it is what will draw the reader in.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Revenge of the Cosmic Ghost Rider #1

Dec 18, 2019

I wasn't really excited about picking up another Cosmic Ghost Rider series, and the start of the story did have me concerned. But by the end of Revenge of the Cosmic Ghost Rider #1 (of 5), I was all on board with this mini-series. Hallum delivers some new and interesting dynamics and I am excited to see what he does in the next few issues. The backup story from Donny Cates is a fantastic, emotional short story that hits all the right beats.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Revenge of the Cosmic Ghost Rider #2

Jan 15, 2020

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Revenge of the Cosmic Ghost Rider #4

Mar 24, 2020

Another adventure of the Cosmic Ghost Rider is almost in the books, but could this be his last? Cammi comes to the rescue, but is it a bit too late for our heroes? The Revenge of the Cosmic Ghost Rider has been a fun ride. While at first I wasn't excited about it, after the first issue it turned into something I couldn't wait to pick up. That continues into Revenge of the Cosmic Ghost Rider #4. The second-to-last issue adds in a few twists and turns you will not be expecting, and will have you questioning how all this will be solved.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Revenge of the Cosmic Ghost Rider #5

Jun 3, 2020

Revenge of the Cosmic Ghost Rider #5 somewhat sticks the landing for the end of the series for me. It is a good ending that will shock you and you will not see coming. It sets up perfectly for another series. The problem is whether we will get that series or not.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Rogue Planet #1

Mar 31, 2020

I think the best thing about Rogue Planet #1 is that the whole creative team works perfectly together to build the sci-fi horror tone of the series. From the writing, to the art and colors, it all works seamlessly together to have this overarching tension-filled horror feel to the series. The first issue does a lot of things well. It drops us into this future world and gets the story started right away. There is no confusion about what is happening and why. The only big deal is that there are a lot of characters and once they suited up I really had no idea who was who.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Rogue Planet #2

Jan 1, 1970

Rogue Planet #2 adds a bit more to this series. It builds upon the first issue and ratchets up the horror vibe even more. Cullen Bunn does a great job of keeping the story focused and not straying far from the sci-fi/horror elements. The art is wonderful, as well. The art team does an awesome job of building that nice fearful/dreadful tone for the series.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Rogue Planet #3

Jul 28, 2020

I am not huge into horror comics but I have been digging Rogue Planet. It is a nice, ominous, sci-fi horror book that slowly sucks you in. Rogue Planet #3 continues to do that as it starts to reveal what the true intentions of this planet may be. We follow along as the crew members of the salvage ship Cortes find out more horrific truths.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Rogue Planet #5

Jan 1, 1970

Rogue Planet #5 wraps up this sci-fi/horror tale. It is one of those endings that you kind of need to sit down and talk to somebody about. It completes the story but also leaves some things to be figured out. A little frustrating, but also fun to think about as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Roku (2019) #1

Oct 29, 2019

Overall I enjoyed Roku #1. It was a solid first issue and easy for a new reader to jump into. I don't know how well it gets me involved or invested in the character, but it is a solid first start. It feels like a "What If"" story if Marvel combined Medusa and Black Widow with some psychic powers. Which isn't a bad idea. Despite a few technical things, overall, I dug the art as well. The more animated styling felt at home with the writing of the character.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Ruins Of Ravencroft: Dracula #1

Jan 23, 2020

Look, I am not saying you are going to have an outer body experience, our make a huge revelation about yourself after reading Ruins of Ravencroft: Dracula #1. What I am saying is that if you can't have fun reading a comic book about Captain America fighting Dracula " and I am talking "old school" Marvel Dracula Dracula, like Count Dracula Bela Lugosi style " then something might be wrong with you. Also the flashback story is framed a bit like Bram Stokers Dracula novel and that was just delightful.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Savage #1

Dec 1, 2016

Conclusion: Savage #1 is a great book for any comic book reader to dive into. If you have never read a Valiant book it won't matter; it really has no connections to the overall universe at this time. Being one of four issues Moore does a great job of setting up the story and characters with this first issue and will have the readers coming back for more! The art team really brings the name Savage to life, fitting LaRosa's rough styling with Henry's more clean style is a great contrast for the story. I was not expecting much of Savage #1 but I am now on board and ready for more (as it seems everyone else is to).

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Savage #3

Jan 25, 2017

It is really hard for this reviewer to put his finger on just what is making Savage such a compelling read. It is, in all fairness a basic story, but it just oozes this dramatic feel to it. Maybe it is the flash-forward and flashback set up with the contrasting art that makes Savage such a good read or it could be the fascination of seeing this baby/young child turn into a vicious beast of a killer that strikes fear into men. Whatever it is this creative team has it.Savageis a must read. With only one more issue to go, it will be interesting to see where this book goes for here and how exactly Savage fits into the larger Valiant Universe.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Savage (2021) #1

Feb 15, 2021

I was very excited that Kevin Sauvage was coming back to Valiant Entertainment and Savage #1 did not disappoint me. Fantastic writing and just a great story start and character introduction for a #1 issue. Nathan Stockman and Triona Farrell also do not disappoint on art, either. Just a great style that fits perfectly with the story. You are missing out if you do not read Savage. A great #1 issue that new and old fans will surely enjoy.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Savage (2021) #2

Mar 15, 2021

Man, I really was excited about this series and the first issue was promising. But Savage #2 has toned down the hype for me. After his Moon Knight run I was not too excited about Bemis' writing, and it seems that he is falling back into what he did over at Marvel, a bit. But, I like what he did at the end of this issue. So, it does have me interested in issue #3. The first part of this issue was a slog to get through and a little eye-rolling at times. The art is really the savior for Savage #2. If not for the tremendous visuals from Nathan Stockman and Triona Farrell, I am not sure I would have made it through the first few pages.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Savage (2021) #3

Apr 14, 2021

Despite some dialogue issues I am loving Valiant's new Savage series. It is fun and highly interesting when we get is Kevin Sauvage's head. Nathan Stockman continues to be a force to be reckoned with. It seems each issue has some weirder and weirder creatures and Stockman ups his game with each one.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Savage Avengers (2019) #1

May 3, 2019

Overall, Savage Avengers #1 is a good start to the series. We get the basic setup and premise, and the clash between Wolverine and Conan is worth the price of admission. I do wish I got a little bit more out of the story than what was delivered in the first issue. The art is solid as well; while it does have some hang-ups, overall he fits the tone and feel of the story well. I am definitely picking up the next issue to see where this goes, and, I mean, Wolverine is in the tan and brown costume, so you can't hate on that!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scout's Honor #1

Jan 12, 2021

Scout's Honor #1 is a solid first issue. I was not really expecting much out of it, but by the end it had me hooked to pick up the second issue. It does follow a lot of tropes and feels very familiar. But the creative team does do a good job of still telling a unique individual story, as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Sentry (2018) #1

Jun 27, 2018

I am still divided after reading The Sentry #1. I still do not care about the Sentry; the story didn't grab me and have me clamoring for the next issue, which isn't the best thing for a five-issue miniseries. But the story does have a nice twist and I am interested to see what Jeff Lemire does with it. The art is basically in the same category: it is good art, but again, it didn't do anything amazing either. Basically, what has me coming back for at least issue #2 is to see what Jeff Lemire can do with the rest of this story.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Seven Secrets #1

Aug 11, 2020

Seven Secrets #1 is another issue where I am in a bit of a conundrum when giving it a "score". I like the idea behind it and the story was fun and engaging, but at the same time, I don't feel like I got enough of it. We don't get enough of the characters and story to really get a "feel" of what this series is all about.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Seven to Eternity (2016) #2

Oct 26, 2016

This is another great entry for this series, I liked the first issue but the second issue makes this a must read! Remender is weaving a fantastic sci-fi tale that promises many twist and turns. WithOpea on art and Hollingsworth on colors it is a feast for the eyes! There is so much going on in this book and with the second issue plots and characters are starting to come together and it is going to be a very interesting ride. Why should you not listen to The god of Whispers offer well I will leave you with a quote from Adam's father from this issue "Once a man convinces himself that what he wants is what he needs, well, once you do that taking the path to damnation can feel like a justifiable position".

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Seven to Eternity (2016) #3

Nov 30, 2016

Seven to Eternity #3 has officially made me invested in this story and has me hooked. The creative team has been fantastic and are setting the bar high for this series. By the end of the issue we are set up for the adventure at hand and find the reason why the book is titled Seven to Eternity. You can't ask for much more from a comic than what Remneder, Opea and Hollingsworth are delivering. If you like Sci-fi/ fantasy adventure then hop on this book and enjoy the ride!

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Seven to Eternity (2016) #4

Dec 27, 2016

If you are not readingSeven To Eternity you need to fix that right away! It is a comic you are not going to want to miss. The creative team has put together a great story that keeps developing and is becoming so engrossing that I can't wait until the next issue comes out! This issue for me is the best so far, while the others have been extremely good, this is just about perfect. The story sticks with you and makes you think if Seven to Eternity was a Netflix series I would be binge watching from one episode to the next! I am glad it's not though because it gives the reader time to absorb the story completely and really think about what is going on. If this series keeps up how it is going now it will be a book that is talked about and revered for years to come!

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Seven to Eternity (2016) #5

Apr 14, 2017

Seven to Eternity is what you get when some of the best current comic book creators collaborate together. The story is magnificently woven together and each issue brings new wonders and intrigue. It is compelling and keeps the reader involved, while still having characters that are very well crafted and feel real to the reader while being set in this futuristic fantasy world. The art duo of Opea and Hollingsworth is a dream come true, they collaborate so well with each other and each issue s a treat for the eyes of the reader. If you are not reading Seven to Eternity you definitely should be, buy the first trade and this issue and enjoy one of the best comics out right now.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Seven to Eternity (2016) #6

May 24, 2017

Seven to Eternity continues to be a very emotional, deep story. What could have simply been a straight “sci-fi” story, Remender has transformed into something that will have readers questioning about themselves and their own life decisions. Opena and Hollingsworth continue to make for a beautiful art team that brings this series to another level. Each issue of Seven to Eternity is a treat and should not be missed.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Seven to Eternity (2016) #7

Jul 5, 2017

This issue is a good entry into the series and pushes the main story along, but the change in art style really just does not fit the main story. Personally, I think the team would have been better off just telling a flashback story of Jevalia's time before the "the god of whispers" came to her home. Harren's art style fits much better for that type of story and it would not be such jolt to the reader if it was not set in the main story line where we are so used to Jerome Opena's art style. It is not a bad issue, but when a series has been so good it is a noticeable drop-off.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Seven to Eternity (2016) #9

Sep 7, 2017

This issue of Seven to Eternitypops the reader right back into the main storyline of the series. Remender continues to weave an emotional sci-fi tale and with Opeaon art, the series just excels to a new level. Seven to Eternityreally makes the reader think throughout, about decisions, actions, and the things that influence us all to say or do the things throughout our lives. The series also delves into families and the relationships, while still delivering a really exciting sci-fi story. With this issuesignaling the end of the second chapter to this story you are not going to want to miss out!

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Seven to Eternity (2016) #10

Jul 31, 2018

With the long layoff, some plot details and characters are very hard to remember. That is really, for me, the only downfall of this issue. The "core" of the series is still very easy to get back into and Remender continues to explore some very in-depth more psychological themes with this series. The art by Jerome Opea and Matt Hollingsworth is well worth the wait and it is as beautiful as ever.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Seven to Eternity (2016) #14

Nov 17, 2020

Seven to Eternity is back and looking to close out the series with only three more issues to go! Remender starts off Seven to Eternity #14 strong, focusing on Adam and The Mud King as they finally make it to their destination. The art continues to be stunningly beautiful and a visual pleasure. As the series starts to wind down, will Adam finally find what he is looking for, and what will be the fate of Zhal?

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Seven to Eternity (2016) #15

Dec 15, 2020

Seven to Eternity #15 is a strong issue and maybe one of the best in the series yet. Things are starting to come to an end to Adam's story and it is anyone's guess how things will wrap up in the final two issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Seven to Eternity (2016) #16

Jan 20, 2021

Seven to Eternity #16 is a perfect setup for the final issue. These past few issues have hit an emotional peak and I am excited to see where all this ends. I do think the different layoffs and long time between different story arcs did hurt some of the emotional beats in this issue. But only slightly. The art is fantastic, as always, and is just a visual treat. The series continues to have me thinking about it long after reading, and I am excited for the big finale.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Shadow Service #1

Aug 18, 2020

Though maybe Shadow Service #1 jumped the gun a little bit on the supernatural thing, altogether, I adored this first issue. It built upon an interesting concept in a unique way and the issue immediately sucked me into this character and this world. It is also just a very well done first issue. From introducing us to a new character and world, from the writing to the art, everything is just top-notch work.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Shadow Service #2

Sep 23, 2020

Shadow Service #2 is an excellent second issue and this is probably my favorite new series out there right now. The creative team has captured me with this new character and story. While we have seen elements of this type of story a lot the way the creative team has brought them together delivers a splendid character and world that captures the imagination. This has become one of those series I can't what to get the next issue in my hands and one everyone should be reading!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Shadow Service #3

Oct 20, 2020

Shadow Service #3 is still all around a solid issue into the series. Even though I still do not like the idea of Gina in the MI-666 and her jumping into this large story so quickly. I would like some smaller stories with just her. It was still a fun and enjoyable read. If you are looking for something and little spooky and fun then I could not recommend Shadow Service enough for a new read especially around this Halloween season.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Shadowman (2021) #1

Mar 26, 2021

Shadowman #1 is a great introduction to the character for new readers and I feel a solid story for longtime Shadowman fans. Bunn does an excellent job of mixing horror and a bit of super-heroics. He makes Jack a compelling lead character and one I am interested in following. The art is very well done with a wonderful eye for detail. Shadowman #1 has an excellent horror vibe and tone that the character needs and fans will surely enjoy.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Shirtless Bear Fighter #1

May 29, 2017

All around Shirtless Bear Fighter is exactly what it says it is, a story about a man who does not wear a shirt and fights bears. It is a funny concept and the creative actually puts a little story behind it to keep the reader's attention and to drive onto the next issue. The only real problem with a series like this is how long does it stay funny?

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Silk (2021) #2

Apr 29, 2021

If you are looking for a classic Marvel Comics/ Spider-Man story then look no further. This is just classic comic-book goodness. From Cindy Moon's alter ego, double life coming together in fun ways, to a wild story; everything about Silk #2 was a joy.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Silver Surfer: Black #1

Jun 11, 2019

If you like Donny Cates' writing you are going to like this series. You dig Tradd Moore's art, then you will dig this series. If you are a fan of Donny Cates and Tradd Moore you are in for a treat with Silver Surfer: Black #1. Cates weaves a tragic, melancholic tale of the Silver Surfer, which brings him into a whole new direction. With the wild, energetic visuals of Tradd Moore, Silver Surfer: Black #1 is something that is truly like nothing else on the stands.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Silver Surfer: Black #2

Jul 20, 2019

Look, I can see why some people may not like this Silver Surfer: Black five-issue mini-series. The past two issues have been all sorts of moroseness and gloom. It is not super happy or joyful, but that's kind of what I like about it. I like that we are getting into the Silver Surfer's head and dealing with his inner “demons”. I can also see why some people may not like the art. It is far, far from the norm, but again, this funkiness fits right in with this story and just brings a little light to the doom and gloom, balancing it out. Silver Surfer: Black #2 also adds a nice wrinkle to the story that has me interested to see what happens next.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Silver Surfer: Black #5

Oct 30, 2019

The story is truly touching and you can feel the heart put in it. The art is, visually, just something to be amazed at. It all works sequentially as a visual story as well. The art isn't just crazy to be crazy, but it serves a purpose and helps tell the story. The story also helps build the character of Norrin Radd and brings the Silver Surfer in a new direction.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Slots #1

Oct 3, 2017

Slots #1 is a good opening issue to this series, Stanley Dance is the guy that you like and dislikes all at the same time, you will root for him, but know he is going to fail all at the same time, that is what makes Slots an interesting read. From this first issue you know Stanley is not a good guy and somehow he is going to screw up trying to be “good”, it is going to be heartbreaking, but you are intrigued to see how it all goes down. If you like Billy Bob Thorton's character from Bad Santa then you will feel right at home with Slots Stanley Dance.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Slots #2

Nov 7, 2017

Slots #2 is a good second issue in this series, it builds upon the first issue well and has me excited to see what is coming next in Stanley's grand plan. Slots #2 also confirms if after the first issue did not convince you that Stanley is still a terrible person (I am not going to spoil anything, but the man really he is awful). While I am still a little confused on some of the characters and a little bit about Stanley's overall plan, Slots #2 was still an enjoyable read. Now that the pieces are in place it is time for action that means Stanley has to lace up his gloves and step into the ring once again to attempt to make things right.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Slots #3

Dec 12, 2017

I am still on the fence about Slots. On one hand, the story still does not have me completely sold, I am still confused about some characters, their relationships to Stanley, and honestly, I am still not 100% sure what exactly is happening. On the other hand, I really like the character of Stanley Dance; he is very interesting and someone that even though he is a “bad guy” you still want to see what he is up to. And the art continues to be great. Slots #3 did start to congeal the story a little for me, so, for now, I am going to continue on the journey with Stanley to see where he takes us next.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.5
Sonata #1

Jun 11, 2019

Sonata #1 is an interesting futuristic alien-world type tale. I really enjoyed the overall character, creature, and general world design of this series. The story, though, for the first issue at least, is not that gripping. I think it may have needed a little bit more character development rather than focusing on explaining everything happening in the issue. The second issue will be key to this series' staying power. If we get more character involvement it could turn into something interesting. If not, it turns into another comic with a cool design and no character.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Spencer & Locke #1

Apr 12, 2017

This book is a fantastic comic and a surprisingly good debut issue. This is an idea that could have been a disaster very easily, really does anybody want a dark, gritty, noir style crime Calvin and Hobbes story? Well, yes if it is done like this I do. The creators toe that line of being dark and serious but also still having some great fun with the concept of having an imaginary friend help you out through life. This really was a surprise and this reviewer was not expecting such a great issue. If you are looking for a new series to pick up do not let Spencer and Locke slip past your radar!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Spencer & Locke #2

May 31, 2017

Spencer and Locke has turned into a great mystery/noir Detective story with a little psychological twist with with Detective Locke. I could see people passing this up just because of what it is and how it was advertised as the "gritty" Calvin and Hobbes, but it has turned out much more than that. We are getting a little in depth to the psychological make up of what would make someone create a best friend out of a stuff animal and how that helps him deal with the past and we get a great mystery/thriller story to boot.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Spencer & Locke #3

Jun 23, 2017

With only one issue left Spencer and Locke have a lot to overcome. Can Spencer find his friend Locke, will Locke even recognize Spencer with the drugs running through his veins, can they solve Sophie's murder in time and save her child and why was she mixed up with this criminal organization in the first place? Spencer and Locke continues to be a great crime/mystery/thriller of a story, it is something that you are not going to want to miss out on!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Spencer & Locke #4

Jul 18, 2017

Spencer and Locke has been a really great series (no wonder it has been optioned for film). With a great crime/mystery as the base of the story, Spencer and Locke is also a psychological thriller that will keep you on your toes until the very end. The creative team has been all-around great, delivering a wonderful comic book that delivers on all ends.

View Issue       View Full Review
4.4
Spider-Man 2099 (1992) #33

May 13, 2020

The art in Spider-Man 2099 #33 is okay as well, but also nothing memorable. The character designs are good but other than that not much stands out. Still, I did like the trip down memory lane.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Spider-Man Noir (2020) #2

Jul 29, 2020

I am not sure if I am 100% sold on the story in Spider-Man Noir #2. It is interesting and fun, but that middle part really took me out of the issue. It is also not super captivating, but an interesting mystery at the same time. Maybe if I could remember the first issue it would have helped get me into the story more. The real show-stopper is the art. Juan Ferreyra continues to impress me with everything he does. Spider-Man Noir #2 is a visual treat that you really should not miss! Even if you didn't know what Spider-Man Noir is, I think just looking at this book would sell you on it.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.2
Spirits of Vengeance (2017) #1

Oct 6, 2017

With angels dying and demons on the prowl it is going to take more than one spirit of vengeance to solve the mystery and save the Marvel Universe, luckily Daimon Hellstorm, Blade, Ghost Rider and Satana are teaming up in Spirits of Vengeance #1 (of 5). While the art may not be best suited for the story, Spirits of Vengeance is a fun delve in Marvels darker corners. Victor Gischler scripts an interesting mystery that has only barely begun in issue #1. Will our heroes be able to figure out what is happening before it is too late?

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
Spirits of Vengeance (2017) #2

Nov 9, 2017

Spirits of Vengeance #2 isa wild ride into the supernatural corners of the Marvel Universe. The story is starting to pick up steam, and I am really enjoying seeing these lesser-used, more supernatural characters getting the spotlight. While the art is not my favorite style and I feel it does not fit the series, it is not bad art and there are still some great panels, and fans of Ghost Rider will not be disappointedin his action sequences. The main draw here is just getting the characters together and in action, and by the end of Spirits of Vengeance #2, the team has been brought together and they are ready to fight heaven and hell to save the Marvel Universe!

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Spy Island #1

Mar 31, 2020

Spy Island #1 has a lot of potential in it. There is a ton of stuff to like about it. The lead character, Nora Freud, oozes all kinds of charisma and I am genuinely interested in her. The visual aesthetic of this book sets the tone and feel immediately as you are transported into this world. It is full of wonderful visuals throughout (those odd fish pictures notwithstanding). It is just that I have no clue what this book is about. With only three issues to go, that is not a good start for this series. Luckily it has all that other stuff going for it. But for a first issue of a series, it does not do a good job, storywise, of letting us know really anything.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Stake (2021) #1

Dec 29, 2020

Overall I enjoyed Stake #1. It is not the greatest first issue ever, but it gets you involved with the story and characters. The overall vibe and tone of the issue are fantastic. Stake #1 has that nice feel of taking itself seriously, but not too seriously. It has horror vibes through and through, but it also throws in some nice banter and jokes along the way. While the story does need some tweaking and everything isn't perfect, I think Stake #1 is on the right path to be a bloodsucking good series.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Star Wars: Age Of Rebellion: Boba Fett #1

May 10, 2019

It is not a terrible one-shot story, but it ain't the greatest thing ever either. Obviously, me not being the biggest Star Wars person I am not sure how this falls into the lore of Boba Fett? I mean it is a pretty basic bounty hunter story. The art is superbly well detailed and delightful to look at times, but also sequentially awkward and confusing.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Strange Academy (2020) #1

Mar 4, 2020

I had some high expectations going into Strange Academy #1, it met some of those but also fell flat in some areas. It felt a little too jammed packed and didn't make as a solid of a character connection as I wanted (I shouldn't need this). But then again I like just about every character and want to know more about them. There is some great interactions and intriguing plot points. It just all gets caught up in trying to explain this new academy, what is going on, where they are at and so on.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Strange Academy (2020) #2

Jul 8, 2020

Strange Academy #2 seems to be still setting up this new place in the Marvel universe, which is okay. Being something brand new, we do need to get familiar with it. I just hope going forward we get some more plot points and the characters get a little more building up as the series continues to grow.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Strange Academy (2020) #4

Oct 29, 2020

I am in a bit of a conundrum with Strange Academy #4. As I do not right now feel an attachment to these characters or stories, but then every time I read an issue I enjoy it all the same. The writing has this infectious joy to it that just sucks you into the world and the same can be said for the art.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Strange Academy (2020) #7

Jan 28, 2021

I would say if you have been a little bit on the fence with this series then Strange Academy #7 should get you to stick around for a lot longer. I know it has certainly sold me on the series. Fantastic character work from Skottie Young. The issue is extremely emotional and gets you to the heart of some of these characters. As always, the art is fantastic and fits perfectly for this series.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Strange Academy (2020) #8

Feb 3, 2021

Strange Academy #8 is another strong issue for this series. Each issue this series continues to grow on me and I am getting more and more invested as Skottie Young starts to focus in on different characters. I still think that there are too many new characters to try to get to know so fast, but Young has done a fantastic job these past two issues of focusing in on one or two of them. The space adventure story, while fun, didn't really add much besides adding a little levity to the issue. I hope Skottie Young keeps on this path and we get more in-depth with these characters as Strange Academy continues to move forward. He seems to be settling into his groove these past two issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Strange Academy (2020) #9

Mar 10, 2021

Strange Academy #9 is another excellent entry into this series, the past few issues have been some of my favorites and it just seems to be getting better and better. Young has started to focus on the characters a little bit more bringing more depth and incite to them slowly but surely. We are finely getting to know these new characters and it is great. It has certainly gotten me more invested in them. The art continues to be tremendously well done and a highlight of the series. Everything combined Strange Academy is one of the best series on the shelves right now.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Strange Adventures (2020) #1

Mar 4, 2020

To sum up, Strange Adventures #1 is a solid start to this twelve issue series. It brings up some different themes and tones yet to be explored by King. King and Gerads seem to thrive in this twelve issue story telling method and they may have struck gold once again. Bringing Evan “Doc” Shaner along only sweetens the pot. As his classic styling are always a visual treat to see.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Stranger Things: Halloween Special #1

Oct 20, 2020

I was not too excited about picking up Stranger Things Halloween Special. I really just want the tv show, but like I said, I am a sucker for certain things, and this hit all the sweet spots to get me to pick it up. Luckily, I was pleasantly surprised: it delivered exactly what I wanted. It didn't really add or take away anything from the show's lore or mythos; it didn't change or add any characters. Really has zero effect on the show. It just showed the kids being kids and having fun before their world got turned "upside-down" (sorry, had to throw that in there).

View Issue       View Full Review
5.3
Strikeforce (2019) #1

Sep 25, 2019

From the story to the visuals, I was honestly just kind of bored throughout the issue. I actually stopped reading at one point to check and see how many more pages I had to get through, which is never a good sign. I like the concept and idea of the story; it just didn't feel like this first issue was executed well.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
Strikeforce (2019) #2

Oct 24, 2019

Strikeforce #2 felt more “complete” than the first issue. The writing is a little tighter and feels more “comfortable” with these characters and the direction of the story. The art also conveys a more settled approach as well. The change in colorist for me really helped the series find that horror tone. While not perfect, Strikeforce #2 greatly improved upon the first issue and the more I think about Strikeforce #2 the more I like it. This is a great cast of different Marvel heroes and the creative team seems to be settling into this series quite well after the mixed first issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Suicide Squad (2016) #26

Sep 29, 2017

For a tie-in issue that has spanned across three books so far, I really enjoyed Suicide Squad #26“Gotham Resistance Part Three” for what it is. Sure I am not 100% sure what is going on, but Rob Williams made it a fun read and Sjepan Sejic's art was great to look at. If you want the whole story you will have to read the conclusion next week in Green Arrow #32.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Super Sons (2017) #10

Nov 16, 2017

I can see now why my brother likes Super Sons so much; it is a really fun read. Super Sons #10 being my first introduction to this series, I felt right at home. I was hardly lost at all and justenjoyed reading these characters. Nothing crazy happened in Super Sons #10; it was just an energetic, delightful read. Tomasi does a fantastic job of writing these characters and the art team really just enhances the story being told. If you have not read this series and are just looking for a fun superhero comic to jump into, you should really pick up Super Sons #10.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
Super Sons (2017) #13

Feb 21, 2018

If you have fallen off Super Sons (like me and haven't read anything since the annual) or have never picked up this series, then Super Sons #13 is a great spot to either jump back on or to start reading the series. The new story arc seems like it is going to be a lot of fun and bring these characters to different places. You may be a little lost if you have never read the series, but as long as you know a little about the DC Universe you should be okay. The art,for the most part, is pretty solid and Tomasi continuesto make this series a delight to read.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
Super Sons (2017) #14

Mar 22, 2018

Overall Super Sons #14 is a solid fun comic book. It has its minor problems and it does not do anything Earth-shattering or world-changing, but it is still a good solid read. And sometimes that is what you need a good solid book. That's what makes this series being canceled such a bummer; you could guaranteea solid read when you picked it up. Well, you still have this issueand two more issues to enjoy before it is over, so enjoy it while you can, and soak it in!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.1
Super Sons (2017) Annual #1

Nov 29, 2017

Overall Super Sons Annual #1 was a fun issue that got the Super-Pets back together, and it is hard not to like seeing Krypto and Titus along with Bat-Cow and the others fighting crime. Yeah, it did not do anything original or groundbreaking story- or artwise, but it was enjoyable and sometimes that's what you want in a comic, something not high-stakes or super-serious. Sometimes you just need a stretchy parrot or a detective chimp to brighten up your day!

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Supergirl (2016) #2

Oct 14, 2016

Conclusion: While overall this is not a bad issue, it just moves to fast for me. I would like to spend more time with Kara and adjusting to here family and school life. I would like for the Cyborg Superman story line to hold off and maybe have played more in the background for a few more issues while we get to know Kara. Ideally, I would like more stories with Kara and doing some "Supergirling" on the side before we jump straight into a big story arc.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.2
Supergirl (2016) #3

Nov 10, 2016

Overall I liked this issue more than the previous issue. Mainly sticking with Kara on Argo City really helped it feel not some "jumpy" and more contained. I still don't like going into this big Cyborg Superman storyline and wish we got more time with Kara dealing with school and family stuff while "Supergirling". Orlando really shines on his character work and I think given more time with Kara's more mundane aspects of living he could build a great world with thisbook! Maybe after this storyline is over Kara can get some down time and he can continue to explore that aspect of her life.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Supergirl (2016) #13

Sep 13, 2017

“The Girl of No Tomorrow” story line comes to an end with Supergirl #13 as she battles to save National City and herself. Orlando continues to show Supergirl's undying optimism even when the very people she protects start to turn against her. This battle may be close to over but her troubles are far from over, Supergirl's life is going to change forever after the events of this Issue, some for the better and others will make her life much, much worse!

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Supergirl (2016) #14

Oct 11, 2017

Overall Supergirl #14 is not a bad issue it is just not good either. I feel the creators had a chance to tell a really fun interesting one-shot story and somewhere along the line it just got lost.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.8
Supergirl (2016) #15

Nov 8, 2017

I am really starting to get into the story with Supergirl #15. It is very interesting to see how Kara is going to deal with all these new problems in her life. The writing team does a great job of balancing all of these different problems and subplots throughout the issue and making Supergirl #15 a really interesting read while starting a new story arc. While the art was very rough for the first few pages, it does smooth out for the rest of the issue. I am not sure what happened with those pages, but it does get a rather good book off to a rough start. I am looking forward to seeing where Kara goes from her and what happens with the reveal at the end of Supergirl #15.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.5
Supergirl (2016) #24

Nov 14, 2018

Supergirl #24 was a solid mid of the road issue. Nothing too crazy happens but it does help propel the ongoing story. It also serves as a pretty good jumping on point for new readers as well. The art is fantastic and Shaner with Fairbairn is always incredible to look at. I am just not sold that the art fits with the story. It just feels like two different tones and that they do not match up with each other.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.4
Superman (2016) #42

Mar 7, 2018

Superman #42 is a good superhero comic book story. It is a nice setup issue for a new story arc. Nothing crazy or exceptional happens, but nonetheless, it looks like it could be a fun story. I am interested to see how the writing team handles Bizarro, as he is a character that can get old pretty fast if not handled correctly. Especially if he is the main crutch of the story being told. The art is fantastic and the real highlight of this issue. An intriguing storyline and superb artwork have me hooked for at least one more issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Superman's Pal Jimmy Olsen (2019) #1

Jul 20, 2019

The art and story fit perfectly together in Superman's Pal Jimmy Olsen #1. The lighthearted comedy-mystery is full of laughs and a very intriguing conundrum/riddle as well. If you are looking for something to put a smile on your face or have a spot to fill in a light week of comics then I definitely suggest you check out this series; you will not be disappointed.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Superman's Pal Jimmy Olsen (2019) #1

Jul 20, 2019

The art and story fit perfectly together in Superman's Pal Jimmy Olsen #1. The lighthearted comedy-mystery is full of laughs and a very intriguing conundrum/riddle as well. If you are looking for something to put a smile on your face or have a spot to fill in a light week of comics then I definitely suggest you check out this series; you will not be disappointed.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Superman's Pal Jimmy Olsen (2019) #2

Aug 21, 2019

Superman's Pal Jimmy Olsen #2 is another fun entry into this 12 issue maxi-series. While the story structure is a bit confusing, it is still a joy to read and I am sure Fraction will make it all make sense as the series progresses. The creative team does a fantastic job of catching the tone of this series; from art to lettering, everything captures this silly, optimistic adventure of Jimmy Olsen, has made these past two issues a delight to read, and has me excited for the next issue!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Sweet Downfall #1

Jan 8, 2021

Sweet Downfall #1 was a solid first issue. The story and major players get set up and it looks like the next issue will be ready to take off. A story of a robot finding his own and leaving a life of crime is somewhat familiar, but with the wild art style of Stefano Cordelli and the things set up in this issue, I am hoping for a new perspective and look. Sweet Downfall #1, while somber and grimy, still has this ray of hope and optimism that I hope continues through the series.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Swordquest #0

May 3, 2017

Swordquest #0 is a great introduction to a new series for only twenty-five cents! That is a hard price to beat and this issue is well worth the pick up to see if you are interested in the series. While not perfect this was a pleasant surprise, I was expecting our main character to be transported into a magical world or something more "comicbooky" to happen, what I got was a start to a very heart-wrenching story about a man about to die and trying to reconnect with his past. Go dig through your couch or look through the car and pull together 25 cents and pick up Swordquest #0 you won't be disappointed.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Swordquest #1

Jun 21, 2017

SwordQuest #1 is an emotional fun read that really does a great job of telling a story of essentially a dying man trying to reconnect with his past and just have fun with the end of his life. The creators do a fantastic job of balancing the "darker" feeling of the book dealing with Peter's disease and trying to reconnect with his friends and the lighter tone of trying to steal this childhood sword and going on his own adventure and quest.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Tales From The Dark Multiverse: Batman: Knightfall #1

Oct 16, 2019

The main "What If" idea still has that intriguing factor in Tales from the Dark Multiverse #1. We looked at what would happen if Jean-Paul Valley was never stopped, in Batman Knightfall. In the next issue, we look at "The Death of Superman", which is open to a plethora of story ideas. Will Tempus Fuginaut find a hero in the Darkness or is his search in vain?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Tales of Suspense (1959) #96

May 1, 2020

I really enjoyed my re-read of Tales of Suspense #96; not only did it bring back some great childhood memories, but I got to revisit a comic book done by some of the best that have ever done it. Again, this is a different era of comics, but the story, while geared more toward kids, is still really enjoyable and a fun read. Stan Lee writes two enthusiastically-infectious stories that you can't help but smile at. Plus art from Gene Colan and Jack Kirby"you can't ask for much more than that.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Tales of Suspense (2017) #100

Dec 22, 2017

Tales of Suspense #100 is a great start to a new series. (Yeah, I know the numbering. Let's just say story arc.) Matthew Rosenberg does a good job of catching the reader up on the events of Secret Empire while getting his story set up and going. I do think this issue would have benefitedfrom being oversized, as everything could have been fleshed out a little better, but it is a good start for the series and easy enough for new readers to jump into. While I do have hang-ups on some of the facial expressions, the art overall is very well done. The action sequences have great movement to them and really have an impact, while the backgrounds fill out the world greatly and the coloring is absolutely beautiful.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Taskmaster (2020) #1

Nov 11, 2020

There is a lot to like about the start of this mini-series. The art is all-around solid; the story is a ton of fun and will have you smiling throughout. I just hope the tone balances out a bit for the next issues. I am all for some silly shenanigans, but I need a little bit of seriousness to grip onto as well. If that balances out in the next issues this will be a delightful mini-series.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #62

Sep 23, 2016

IDW's TMNT ongoing series continues to impress, while it has stumbled a little in its past few issues #62 picks up and gets the series back into high gear. This book does not get nearly enough praise as it should for being so great for so long. With fantastic storytelling and a murderers row of great artist there is not much else you can ask for in a comic book!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #63

Oct 12, 2016

Conclusion: As I stated earlier, in the first few issues of this arc I was not too keen on this story line but the past two issues have really picked up steam and are pushing the Turtle family in new surprising directions. The creative team on this book is doing a great job besides some few minor hiccups they have really put together something new and interesting turtle fans will not be expecting. The final page reveal will have turtle fans on edge and will definitely have you coming back for the next issue!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #64

Nov 23, 2016

IDW ongoing TMNT series is an actual comic that when things happen that they actually have ramifications and affect the characters for the long term. This has been a great arc for the characters growth and changes of the characters, this will really affect the dynamic of the book going on. I am very excited to see what happens next and where we go from here!

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #65

Dec 14, 2016

I have been a big fan of this book since it launched, but this just might be my favorite issue of it! It is just a fun Christmas time read. Minor spoiler there are no "action" scenes in this book but it does not matter one bit. The story and art are almost perfect, it's hard to do a review with out spoiling any of the great moments in this issue. If you are not even a fan of TMNT and have never read an issue I would still say just pick this up to get in the Christmas spirit. I might have got something in my eye at the ending also.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #66

Jan 25, 2017

TMNT Ongoing #66 is another great entry into this ongoing series. We get a great look into Alopex's character and what she has gone through being mind controlled by Kitsune. The art team of Campbell and Pattison is always a delight to have on this series and really makes these more "intimate" stories hit home. Alopex comes into focus and must literally learn to face her demons and figure out that just because she is a "loner" that certainly does not mean she is alone. The past few issues of this series have been great and I am definitely excited to see all of these characters continue to grow.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.4
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #67

Feb 15, 2017

TMNT Ongoing #67 sets up a new story arc for the series as the Turtles are officially on their own without Master Splinter to help or guide them. Leonardo is learning what it truly means to be a leader and that teenagers are truly hard to deal with. The Earth Protection Force is back and action and wants to rid New York of its mutant problem. With a new way to remotely control mutants their first target is Slash and with him under their control, they are coming for the Mutanimals and the Turtles next! This is a good set up issue for the rest of the arc. There is a lot of dialogue and explaining of certain details that do bog down the flow of the story. The art continues to be spectacular, with a great cast of artist rotating in and out of this series. This looks to be another exciting arc in this series and now that the set-up is out of the way, it will be fun to see where it goes from here.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #69

May 3, 2017

This issue of TMNT Ongoing is a great entry into this story arc and really ramps up the tension between the Mutants and the EPF. A new light is shown upon Agent Bishop and gives an insight into his mind. Some of the Mutanimals are still trapped and Slash is still being mind controlled by Agent Bishop, so our gang still has their work cut out for them, but Mondo Gecko might have found something to turn the tide, the turtles might not like it but Old Hob will get his friends back by any means necessary. You are not going to want to miss this issue!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #70

Jun 14, 2017

This was a great story arc from start to finish for IDW's TMNT series. It introduced some new enemies and brought the turtles in a new direction. This was their first real test without Master Splinter leading them and it really brought the team together and showed how they would have to adapt to Leonardo actually being "the master". TMNT continues to be a fantastic ongoing series building this world from the first issue, micro-series, mini-series and TMNT Universe series all combining to make the world unlike any other.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #71

Jun 28, 2017

TMNT Ongoing #71 is what it is, while the story is not all that exciting it is necessary to push the ongoing narrative and give some background information to these Pantheon characters that have been popping up since almost the beginning of this series. The art is what really shines and holds the attention of the reader with great looking characters and a wonderful color palate. It is not a good jumping on point at all for a new reader, but fans of the series will enjoy learning about theses characters and what they have in store for our favorite turtles and the universe as a whole.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.4
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #72

Jul 27, 2017

If you are a TMNT fan you will want to pick this up so you can stay "up to date" on the story line and know what is happening when this plot eventually comes back in the fold or just pick up the Raphael cover by Tom Whalen it is worth the price.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #73

Aug 1, 2017

TMNT #73 is a wonderful start to a new story arc! With Krang set to go on trial the Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles are on another adventure in Dimension X. Will they be able to stop Hakk-R or will Krang out smart everybody! IDW's TMNT is now the longest ongoing TMNT comic series ever with this Issue and the team is just getting started on more crazy adventures for the brothers. With great writing and superb art work, you are truly missing out if you are not picking up IDW's TMNT!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #74

Sep 26, 2017

TMNT #74 (The Trial of Krang part 2 of 3) is a really interesting intergalactic courtroom drama that once again places the Turtles in a very dangerous scenario in Dimension X. The writing team does a fantastic job with the courtroom scenes and even with everything going on it does not seem to drag on or linger longer than needed. The art team continues to do a fantastic job and I love all of these crazy creatures we get to see in the wide world of Dimension X. The trial of Krang is just beginning and if you thought he was going down without a fight, well you are dead wrong!

View Issue       View Full Review
6.7
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #75

Oct 25, 2017

TMNT #75 did get me excited for what is coming up next, but it failed to make me excited about the story I was reading in it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #77

Dec 5, 2017

TMNT #77 shows why IDW's TMNT is one of the best ongoing comics on the shelves right now. It continues to build upon this world and, while not forgetting about its past, the creators are not afraid to make some dramatic changes that affect the characters for the long-term.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #78

Jan 9, 2018

Overall, this has been a good storyline that has brought the Turtles in new directions. They are the peacekeepers and are now in direct conflict with their father and how he leads the foot clan. I think I am enjoying more of what it is settingup than the actual storyline. That is not to say the storyline is not good or enjoyable, it is; I just like the implications of what is to come afterward as well. Turtle fans will be excited about the developments in TMNT #78 and there is no real reason not to pick up this issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #79

Feb 27, 2018

TMNT #79 continues the battle between the Triceratons and the EPF. As the war wages on the streets of New York City, the Turtles meet with their father to attempt to talk sense into him. Why has Master Splinter sided with Agent Bishop and the EPF? Why will he not at least hear his sons out? Will his mind change in TMNT #79 or has the Foot Clan once again become the Hamato Clan's enemy? TMNT #79 delivers an absolutely superb story that has been slowly building up for the past few years. The writing team should be praised as to what they are doing and what they have done in this series. And Brahm Revel and Ronda Pattison deliver some beautiful art. There is a lot to like in TMNT #79!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.6
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #80

Mar 27, 2018

TMNT #80 will have long-time TMNT fans gasping with its outcome, and the issue continues to push this series in bold new directions. The art had its positives and negatives, as the lack of detail is disappointing, but it does deliver some good action sequences. It was teased in a backup story in TMNT Universe #19 that the Rat King is coming back into play after the Triceratons' invasion ends and we also get another nice teaser at the end of this issue that may have some larger implications as well!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #81

Apr 10, 2018

TMNT #81 is a setup issue, but it is a good setup issue. The new status quo is set and the Rat King comes back to visit New York City. I am pretty sure there is also a heavy The Warriorshomage going on in a gang fight scene. That being one of my favorite movies, TMNT gets bonus points. There are a lot of moving pieces and things going on in the TMNT Universe at the moment and this issue gets the reader caught up on all of that, or at least the major points.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #82

May 16, 2018

TMNT #82 is not my favorite issue of this series but it is far from the worst. I am not big on the Pantheon gods, but I like what this issue sets up for further storylines. The art has a few hiccups, but if a story has to feature the Pantheon I like having Dave Wachter draw them. I am still not 100% certain what the Rat King is up to, but I guess he is not leading people to free candy or anything.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #83

Jun 5, 2018

The main story arc with the Rat King that is continuing in TMNT #83 is honestly not the most intriguing story. While parts of it are interesting and fun, it still feels like the Turtles are just treading some water while bigger things are set up in the “B and C storylines.” I still have no clue what the actual plan of the Rat King is. Dave Wachter continues to be a great match for these Pantheon “god” characters as he catches their intricacies well. TMNT #83 does promise some big things to come and develop out of this issue so it has me excited to see what comes out of it.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.4
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #84

Jul 24, 2018

TMNT #84 is a solid conclusion to this story arc. It was not the best issue or story arc of TMNT, but not bad either. What is set up through this issue is a lot more interesting than the issue itself. The art, again, looks great except for my personal nitpicks about the Turtles themselves. TMNT continues to be one of the best ongoing series out on the shelves today and I am excited to see what the team is building up to with issue #100 on the horizon.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #85

Aug 21, 2018

TMNT #85 is an issue jam-packed with A, B, and C plots that are all equally interesting. This issue felt a lot longer than 23 pages ina great way. I cannot praise the writing team enough on how they keep developing these characters in this world and have let them change throughout the run of this series. TMNT #85 sets up a lot of interesting story points that I can't wait to see unfold. The art is good even though I have some minor hang-ups, but I still love Brahm Revel's dynamic, sketchy style. It brings a nice new “flavor” to the TMNT IDW world.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #86

Sep 18, 2018

TMNT #86 is a great start to a new storyline and adds in some new mythos to the IDW line of TMNT. Dave Wachter's art looks good, I like seeing him get a crack at some other TMNT characters that I have not seen him do in a long time. Will The Teenagers be able to stop Agent Bishop and The EPF from taking over Burnow Island? And how long will the peace between the Utroms and Triceratons last when an all-out war breaks out?

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #87

Oct 17, 2018

TMNT #87 is a great "middle issue" for this story arc. It sets up some interesting plot details and pushes the story in all the right directions. Wachter does a fantastic job on all these characters. From the Mutanimals to the Triceratons he delivers some wonderfully detailed characters. He also knows how to draw and exciting battle! Ronda Pattison' colors continue to be magical as always. IDW's TMNT series continues to be fantastic and everyone should be reading it!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #89

Dec 20, 2018

TMNT #89 is another fantastic entry into this series and a wonderful Christmas issue. I love the weaving of A Christmas Carol into the ongoing TMNT drama. It fits perfectly and was a heartwarming story for the holidays. The art from Dialynas and Pattison was delightful! Dialynas has quickly become one of my favorite artists to see on this series and I am super excited he is staying on for a few more issues. Much like TMNT #65, this looks like it will be an issue I can go back to each year around the holidays and enjoy!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #90

Jan 23, 2019

The tension in the air in TMNT #90 is palpable. You can feel everything starting to build up to the “City at War” story arc. There are a lot of crazy things being set up in TMNT #90. It has me very excited to see where the creative team is taking us to issue #100 and beyond. With some great story points and wonderful art, obviously, TMNT fans are not going to want to miss this issue!

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #91

Feb 12, 2019

TMNT #91 brings a lot of things in the TMNT universe to a head and also sets a lot more things in motion. The story just flows seamlessly together and the creative team is firing on all cylinders for this issue. This just has me completely and utterly excited to see what comes next! It is one of those issues that makes you wish next month would hurry up and get here.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #92

Mar 19, 2019

TMNT #92 was a good issue and this previous story arc set up the huge “City at War” road to issue #100 perfectly. There are some big things happening in IDW's TMNT Universe and things just got ramped up after this issue. Also, like I was talking about in the writing section about continuity, the TMNT: Shredder in Hell mini-series (read the reviews of issue #1 and issue #2) plays a big part in leading up to issue #100, so be sure to check that out as well. Big things are on the horizon so, definitely don't miss out on TMNT #92!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #92

Mar 19, 2019

TMNT #92 was a good issue and this previous story arc set up the huge "City at War" road to issue #100 perfectly. There are some big things happening in IDW's TMNT Universe and things just got ramped up after this issue. Also, like I was talking about in the writing section about continuity, the TMNT: Shredder in Hell mini-series (read the reviews of issue #1 and issue #2) plays a big part in leading up to issue #100, so be sure to check that out as well. Big things are on the horizon so, definitely don't miss out on TMNT #92!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #93

Apr 23, 2019

“City at War” starts off with a bang in TMNT #93. Things are really starting to ramp up and this is going to be an exciting arc leading up to issue #100. I also like that they are using the letters pages to interview the creators about the start of TMNT at IDW. It is very interesting to see how all this started and what some of the original ideas for the series were. Any TMNT fan is obviously not going to want to miss out on this jarring issue!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #94

May 28, 2019

TMNT #94 "City at War Part 2" is certainly heating up this storyline. Lots of things are happening and honestly, I have no clue what will become of the Turtles after "City at War" wraps up. The mystery of what will happen next is excellent. I am also loving the backup essays as well. Instead of a letters page they are doing an oral history of the past eight years of TMNT at IDW. in TMNT #94 the creators detailed the second year and it is fantastic to read what-all they had to say.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #95

Jul 2, 2019

TMNT #95 is another great entry into this series. I was a little bit worried about them drawing out this “City at War” buildup to issue #100 too much, but they have been doing a fantastic job so far, slow-burning the storyline while still adding some very interesting mystery and character dynamics along the way. I also continue to love the little history of TMNT at IDW with the creators in the back-up replacing the letters page. They go through year three, the year 2013-2014, which involves the Northhampton storyline and some of my favorite mini-series. It is great to read the creators' thoughts on those and what they tried to bring out story- and art-wise.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #96

Aug 2, 2019

I have faith that the writing team will have everything back in order. This series has always been consistently good, despite a few stumbles here and there. So, while this issue may have been a bit of a miss for me, I am still invested in these characters and storyline.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #97

Aug 27, 2019

TMNT #97 made this storyline exciting again. Not that the last issue was bad; it did what it had to do to get different story plots going. But the focus on Karai and the Foot Clan helped get the City at War storyline back on its electrifying track leading up to the monumental issue #100. This issue has gotten me very excited to see what happens next. Plus the solicit for issue #98 is very intriguing!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #98

Sep 24, 2019

There is not a lot of “action”, per se, in TMNT #98 but the story sure does pack a punch. TMNT fans will be shocked by the events in this issue. It is not just one thing, either; there are many astonishing revelations from beginning to end that will have readers glued to this story. Long-time TMNT fans will be clamoring with ideas of what one thing, in particular, could mean for future story arcs and characters. Again, this issue changes everything and you don't want to miss it!

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #99

Oct 29, 2019

The writing team has done a tremendous job of weaving in and out of different characters' story arcs and having them all intertwined to culminate in this huge event. Nobody gets shortchanged, either; each character gets their own little time in the spotlight. Dave Wachter puts in his best work to date into TMNT #99 with some truly inspiring visuals throughout the issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #100

Dec 10, 2019

The writing is really good and it is incredible that the writing team has been planting these seeds and letting them grow for this long. The art is great as well; it just doesn't all flow together.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #101

Jan 7, 2020

Man, I am really struggling with TMNT #101. There is a ton to love about this issue. Obviously, the art is incredible. From a visual standpoint I do not see how you can't love this issue. It has some stunning details and everything just looks fantastic. The beginning story of the issue is also extremely well done. Campbell does a wonderful job of showing us how the family is dealing, and it was a somber beginning after the craziness that happened in the last issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #102

Jan 28, 2020

The story in TMNT #102 is starting to grow on me. This issue focused a little more on the four brothers, which the series had kind of gotten away from recently. I think TMNT might need to scale down a little on story and characters and focus more on the core group again for a little while, which it has started to do now.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #103

Feb 21, 2020

TMNT #103 is another good issue, but I think it really makes an argument as to why the mini-series and series like TMNT: Universe are necessary. I feel like too much focus has been taken off our main characters. The story of Jennika and Mutant Town feels like it would fit better in her own mini-series coming up, or as a TMNT: Universe story. It would let this main series focus more on the characters we have been following all along, and also make me care more about Jennika and Mutant Town.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #104

Mar 18, 2020

Though I have had my ups and downs about different parts of different storylines, TMNT #104 continues to deliver a wonderfully emotional story. This issue finally brings the family back together and where it goes from here is anybody's guess? The art continues to be excellent, you really couldn't ask for better art in this series.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #105

Jun 23, 2020

TMNT #105 is a fantastic end to this crazy, emotional story arc. It starts something brand new for the series. TMNT #105 also stands as almost a soft "reboot" for the series. I am not sure if reboot is the right word, but it is like a new beginning for all the characters we have been following for so long.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #106

Jul 14, 2020

TMNT #106 is a seemingly strong jumping on point for new readers. After setting up a new status quo in the previous story arc a new era for TMNT begins in this issue. The story sets up a new interesting threat for the crew and gives us a glimpse into what is happening in the world outside of Mutant Town. The art is solid as well, while Campbell will be missed Nelson Daniel's steps on board. All in all while not the greatest TMNT issue ever it delivers a start to some new interesting avenues for the series to continue.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #107

Jul 28, 2020

The Splinter Clan heads back to familiar territory, in the sewers of NYC. But what they find may be more than they can handle. What are Mousers doing in Mutant Town, and what exactly is the Slithery? Find out in TMNT #107.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #108

Aug 25, 2020

While this won't be the most talked-about story arc, I think, in the long term, it does a lot of good setting a base for the stories going forward and is a nice reestablishment of IDW's ongoing TMNT series.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.5
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #110

Oct 20, 0202

These past few issues of TMNT feels like something is missing. TMNT #110 brings that to light as this issue, story-wise, just floundered for me. It seems to be missing the direction and pacing of the past 100 issues. For the first time, it seems IDW's TMNT series is lost and doesn't exactly know where it wants to go. I am, again, all for one-shot or two-part stories but at some point the book is going to need to figure out exactly what it is doing.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #111

Nov 10, 2020

The story in TMNT #111 starts to pick up some steam, and that final page reveal! All I can say is “go ninja! go ninja! go!”. Campbell has, hopefully, started to find her groove with this issue after a stellar start to her run writing TMNT hit a little lull for me. but TMNT #111 is a definite bright spot. The art, while again, nothing technically wrong with it, is actually great artwork. Just for me, personally, it does not fit the story well and that is the reason for a lower score. This issue does have me excited to read TMNT again and very interested to see what is coming up next for the Splinter Clan.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #111

Nov 10, 2020

The story in TMNT #111 starts to pick up some steam, and that final page reveal! All I can say is "go ninja! go ninja! go!". Campbell has, hopefully, started to find her groove with this issue after a stellar start to her run writing TMNT hit a little lull for me. but TMNT #111 is a definite bright spot. The art, while again, nothing technically wrong with it, is actually great artwork. Just for me, personally, it does not fit the story well and that is the reason for a lower score. This issue does have me excited to read TMNT again and very interested to see what is coming up next for the Splinter Clan.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.1
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #112

Dec 8, 2020

I can't help but be disappointed in TMNT #112. I was excited for this issue. After the great tease in TMNT #111, I was excited to see Campbell dig deeper into a story. This issue strays away from that and, while it does bring up some supremely interesting topics, it all seems to get lost. The art just does not work for me. While it has a solid visual look to it, nothing is memorable or stands out from a visual standpoint. It also does not really help tell the story.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #113

Jan 19, 2021

TMNT #113 is a solid issue that starts working out some kinks. On one point, I like what this issue sets up. It sets up some very interesting plot points that, hopefully, we stay focused on. It seems to me (and you can read my Jennika mini-series reviews) that Jennika is more interesting on her own. She doesn't seem to be fully-formed or shining in this main series. I find myself liking the character more in her mini-series than this main series.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #114

Feb 9, 2021

I was a little surprised at how much I enjoyed TMNT #114, especially after not being too high on the previous issue. As always, I mean, the art is incredible and if Campbell is drawing it is going to be great, visually. But I think, storytelling-wise, Campbell steps it up in this issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #115

Mar 16, 2021

TMNT #115 is a great issue and fulfills all the hype leading up to it. Well, at least I was really excited about Tokka, Rahzar, Bebop, and Rocksteady duking it out. I am just kind of guessing everyone else was as well. Anyway, great issue that also adds some great intrigue to the future-Lita story that has been unfolding. TMNT #115 starts to bring everything together for a bodacious read.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #116

Apr 20, 2021

TMNT #116 is a fun comic book and if you have been enjoying this storyline so far you are in for a treat once again. For me, I am not sure how much I really care? Look, I enjoyed the issue, it is a fun storyline and the art is fantastic, but for me, it is still missing a little magic.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.2
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) Annual: 2020

Jul 28, 2020

If you have been reading and following IDW's TMNT then you will want and need to pick this issue up. It develops several future plot points and gets you caught up with what is happening since issue #100. But don't expect it to be the most interesting read or hold your attention throughout the pages.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles / Ghostbusters II #1

Nov 2, 2017

TMNT Ghostbusters II #1 is off to an okay start. It is great to see these two franchises teaming up once again. But beware! Just because there is some great dialogue in this issue, that doesn't mean a lot moves forward. It seems like this issue really just sets up everything for the series. Overall, if you liked the first meetup of these two iconic teams, then you are going to enjoy TMNT Ghostbusters 2 #1. And while the first issue is not great, it is still a good read and has me excited for issue #2!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles / Ghostbusters II #2

Nov 8, 2017

I enjoyed this issue much more than the last issue of this 5 issue mini-series. TMNT Ghostbusters II #2delves more into the story of the group and jumps into the heads of the characters. With a variety of artists handling these different dimensions, it was a nice visual treat to see what popped up from page to page. While I am still a little bit on the fence about this series, TMNT Ghostbusters II #2 was a step in the right direction and a pretty fun read.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles / Ghostbusters II #3

Nov 15, 2017

TMNT Ghostbusters II #3 is the best issue in this series so far and it shows that these characters work great together and can be a ton of fun to read. The creative team has done a superb job of letting these characters relationships grow beyond their first meeting in the original mini-series and have definitely stuck them in a totally different scenario. I really love how they are subtly talking about the characters more emotional/internal problems throughout the series, it is great o see this cohesiveness throughout the two series and things that happened in their respective ongoing series have not been forgotten about and that they are being addressed.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.3
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles / Ghostbusters II #5

Nov 28, 2017

TMNT Ghostbusters II #5 is a satisfying conclusion to the mini-series. While things with the Collectors were not that interesting, Turtle fans will love the first part of the issue. As a whole, TMNT Ghostbusters II was a solid comic book, but it still did not reach the height of the first mini-series. While the Turtles got most of the limelight and some really good emotional development, I am not sure if the Ghostbusters really got anything out of the second meeting besides helping the brothers. Seeing the different universes was fun and interesting, but overall the series just basically failed to excite me for each issue. Maybe it was because it was the second meeting, or because it came out weekly. The series as a whole just lacked that sense of excitement that makes me want to pick it up and read. Not saying it was bad or awful. It was just okay, and if they decide to do a TMNT Ghostbusters III they are really going to have to step it up.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Jennika #1

Feb 26, 2020

Jennika #1 delivers what I want in a Jennika mini-series and kind of (to me at least) confirms my complaints from the main series. This is where I want to see her dealing with all of her problems. The main TMNT series has enough characters. Jennika #1 really made me like the character once again. I was growing a bit weary of her in the main series. We get to delve into everything she has gone through a little (I am glad this is a mini-series so we can get more in-depth) in 8224e3. From her dealing with her mutation, her break up with Casey Jones, her past and the loss of her mentor Splinter. It also has a nice hook ending that has me very interested to see where this goes.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Jennika: II #1

Nov 3, 2020

I was not really excited about another Jennika mini-series, but Jennika II #1 has turned that around. The story is exciting and fun and builds up a new mystery for Jennika to solve. While I do not know if it will hold up for five more issues, it is off to a great start. It also doesn't hurt that this features some of the best Brahm Revel artwork to date. I always dig his style, but his coloring work brings it to a new level. If you liked the last Jennika mini then you will love this; if you were not too keen on it and a little on the fence with this new one, I can definitely recommend you check it out.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.6
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Jennika #2

Mar 24, 2020

Jennika #2 continues to delve into the past and future of Jennika. With the promise of a cure, will she fall back into her old ways? Brahm Revel delivers another exciting look into her life. If you want to know more about the character of Jennika this is a nice look into her "new" life. The backup story is okay, nothing really to note from the story or art, though.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Jennika: II #2

Dec 1, 2020

I wasn't exactly excited for this new Jennika mini-series when it was announced. Now, after Jennika II #2, it is one of the top books I look forward to, month to month. Brahm Revel is building a strong mystery and exciting story within the pages. It is hard to find a creator that can do it all and do it well. Revel is excelling at everything, and I am excited to see what he does in the next issue with Jennika!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Jennika: II #3

Jan 19, 2021

Jennika II #3 is a fantastic middle issue for this six-issue mini-series. It is a delightful change-up that sets up the final two issues perfectly. I can't help but be excited for the next two issues. Brahm Revel is telling a compelling story through his writing and art. He does it all so well (that includes lettering), which is just amazing all on its own. Revel also tells Jennika's story well and captures her voice and attitude. This is something I think is missing from the main series. Revel makes her more interesting and captivating than she is in the ongoing TMNT series.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.6
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Jennika #3

Jun 23, 2020

Jennika #3 wraps up this three-issue mini-series. While the ending is no shocker, Brahm Revel did deliver a story we needed about Jennika. She needed her own space to delve into her head. A lot has happened to her, so this mini-series was desperately needed to flesh out her "new" self a bit more. The back-up stories also helped flesh out her character more, as well. While nothing happens that you won't expect, it was good to finally set her character on solid ground and now to move forward, with this behind us.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Macroseries #1

Oct 3, 2018

TMNT: Macro-Series Donatello is well worth the $7.99 price tag; you get 48 pages of a fantastic story that not only has a solid beginning, middle, and end, it also has ramifications for future events in the Turtles' lives!

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Macroseries #2

Oct 23, 2018

I don't give out perfect scores often, but this deserves it. Ian Flynn's story mixed with Michael Dialynas's art is a perfect combination. This is the best issue of TMNT that I have read in a while and that is saying something! IDW's TMNT series is usually always good but this surpasses that. TMNT: Macro-Series Michelangelo #2 is an incredible issue that not only furthers the ongoing story in the TMNT Universe but does a superb job of telling a complete one-shot story as well. Incredible work from the whole team on this issue and everyone who worked on it should be proud.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Macroseries #3

Nov 27, 2018

These TMNT: Macro-Series continue to be delightful. The Donatello issue was a great look into the character and the Michelangelo issue was perfect, and TMNT: Macro-Series Leonardo #3 continues that trend with some good storytelling and awesome art. These Macro-Series also feel worth the $7.99 price tag as well. The binding is nice and thick and the printing of the pages give a nicer feel to the issue. You also get a nice full story that makes it worth the extra cash. My favorite Turtle, Raphael, is coming up next and the creative team has some high marks to live up to, so I am excited for what the next Macro-Series brings to the table!

View Issue       View Full Review
5.5
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Macroseries #4

Dec 14, 2018

There are some fantastic art scenes in TMNT: Macro-Series Raphael #4 but as a whole, I don't think it works well. Really the last part saved this issue for me. It was more focused on Raphael. I love, love, love the final page. I won't spoil it for you but it is already one of my favorite things in TMNT media ever!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Shredder in Hell #1

Jan 15, 2019

TMNT: Shredder in Hell #1 (of 5) is off to a wonderful start. Santolouco gets to show off some writing abilities and besides a few small things, he weaves a dramatic tale of Shredder traversing through hell. The artwork is stellar, as it always is from Santolouco. Each panel and page is tremendously well done and detailed. This is obviously leading to big things in the IDW TMNT Universe and will have a big impact leading up to issue #100. TMNT at IDW continues to excel and TMNT: Shredder in Hell #1 is another bright spot.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Shredder in Hell #2

Dec 31, 1969

This, like the first issue, is a great read and another great in-depth look into the character of Oroku Saki, the Shredder.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Shredder in Hell #3

May 14, 2019

TMNT: Shredder in Hell #3 (of 5) continues to build the ultimate Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtle nemesis into a new and interesting character. Santolouco has allowed the character of Oroku Saki to grow and “evolve” throughout this mini-series and it has me very interested to see what he has become at the end of his journey through hell.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Shredder in Hell #4

Aug 27, 2019

TMNT: Shredder in Hell #4 is another great issue in this series. With only one more issue to go, we will see if Santolouco can stick the landing to end the series. I am very excited to see if somehow this will connect with the upcoming TMNT #100 issue. With the Pantheon of gods and what happens in this issue, it should have some bigger effects on the TMNT Universe, so fans are definitely going to want to pick this up to see what happens and what could be coming up.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Shredder in Hell #5

Dec 3, 2019

I have always loved Mateus Santolouco as an artist, but he has surprised me as quite a capable writer in this mini-series. He has taken us on a few twists and turns, while making Oroku Saki into a completely new and nuanced character. I love the ending that happens in TMNT: Shredder in Hell #5. I want to spoil it and talk about it so bad! If you are not hyped for TMNT #100 (you know I am), then this will definitely have you awaiting the monumental issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: The Last Ronin #1

Oct 19, 2020

I was super excited to read TMNT: The Last Ronin #1, but was trying not to get too hyped. Luckily, from the opening pages, The Last Ronin #1 is a fantastic start to this 5-issue mini-series. If you are a fan of the Mirage days of TMNT then you will feel right at home. If you are not as familiar it may take some adjusting, but any TMNT fan can pick this up and enjoy.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: The Last Ronin #2

Feb 16, 2021

TMNT: The Last Ronin #2 is a great second issue in this 5-issue mini-series. It is a little sad we had to wait this long, but it is well worth it. We get more into the head of Michelangelo in this issue and start to piece together what exactly happened. While some mysteries are solved, more are presented to keep you excited for the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Universe #2

Oct 5, 2016

If you where worried that Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles Universe would fall short of the main ongoing series than this issue should put that to rest. This is a fantastic issue that has great character moments, a strong story and will have readers clamoring for more. IDW's continues to put stellar talent on their TMNT books and this is a series any fan should not miss!

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Universe #3

Oct 27, 2016

Conclusion: I am really running out of things to say about this book and not repeating my self from my previous review. Paul Allor's writing on the main story is just great stuff and he is just great at developing characters. The art remains solid and is hard hitting when it needs to be and emotional when the script calls for it. Not to sound like a broken record but really the back up story with Leo is okay and all but really detracts from the main story and book itself. For $4.99 give me more pages of the main story or something other than Leo having some kind of fever dream or whatever is going on in it! Overall a great book, but the whole back up story is wearing out its welcome.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Universe #4

Nov 30, 2016

Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles Universe #4 Conclusion:Overall the main story was very good, we got some new characters added to the TMNT mythos and some great character work. Allor gave the reader a great start to the TMNT Universeseries and set it up to be a fun addition to the ongoing a series. The back up story still boggles me and has started to drag the book down with the $4.99 price tag for those extra pages. With the start of issue #5 it seems we are going to get a new short story arc and a new writing/art team as Old Hob tries to recruit Leatherhead to the Mutanimals!

View Issue       View Full Review
6.8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Universe #5

Dec 21, 2016

Overall:TMNT Universe #5 is a good story and builds upon some loose threads left from the ongoing TMNT series and some of the mini/micro-series. I like the one and done story line and think that the next few issues may be like this. Following one or two characters on a little adventure and building upon some story lines from the main series. Hopefully, the art picks back up to what the standard has been set for this series as it continues on. For the first time, I can say I thoroughly enjoyed the backup story in this series and it was better than the main story! We finally have an answer to what was going on with Leonardo and it is great!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Universe #6

Jan 19, 2017

Conclusion:This reviewer was not a big fan of the previous issue of this series, but this issue brings TMNT Universe back into good favor with me. The main story delivers a very eerie one shot story and digs deep to bring a villain that not many TMNT fans will be familiar with. The backup also starts an interesting story about the foot clan member that has the beginnings of a great tale. TMNT Universe continues to a great job in not only expanding IDW's TMNT universebut crafting great stories with its vast array of characters.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Universe #8

Mar 7, 2017

In TMNT Universe #8 Donatello has resurrected Metal Head but Metal Head is having trouble dealing with being "alive". Donnie tries to calm him by showing him the city but when Metal Head quickly becomes overwhelmed with "life" Donatello must seek help from his brothers and try and save his former body and friend.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Universe #9

Apr 25, 2017

TMNT Universe #9 is a good entry into the IDW TMNT world. Campbell and Curnow introduce a new Pantheon god in the Toad Baron and also delve into Angel and Alopex's characters. Revel finishes off his four-part backup story in this issue and brings to light some great information and backstory to a character that has yet to have the spotlight shown onto her until now.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Universe #10

May 24, 2017

Overall this was a good two part story for the TMNT Universe book I really like how the team gave more character depth into Alopex and Angel while also developing their friendship along the way, I am also enjoyinghow this story is going to tie into the main ongoing TMNTtitle in issue #71. I am really digging TMNTUniverse telling these short stories and getting to play around with different characters in the universe while also still being part of the main series. In all honestly I would have bought this for the four page backup alone, I am a sucker for Sophie Campbell drawing Pepperoni.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.9
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Universe #11

Jun 22, 2017

TMNT Universe #11 is not a bad issue it just could have been much better. Getting more background information on Sally Pride and Man Ray is excellent and the highlight of the Issue, it is sad that the other story parts are wrapped up quickly and not delved into deeply. The art is not bad it just suffers from being a little too basic and the lack of background detail makes it very "boring" to look at. For the most part, TMNT Universe has been an excellent series so it should be back on track within the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Universe #12

Jul 18, 2017

Issue #12 (Karai's Path 1 of 4) is off to an excellent start. We start to discover more about Karai and how she is dealing with basically losing her family. Bludgeon and Koya are also dealing with their own losses and learning to deal with new disabilities. The whole creative team is fantastic and it will be very exciting to see where they take these characters from here.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Universe #13

Aug 9, 2017

TMNT Universe #13 is another excellent entry into this series and provides great characterization to Karai, Bludgeon, and Koya. The art is absolutely stunning and Campbell continues to impress with each Issue. Karai continues her path to discover herself as she tries to find an ancient sword, but things will not be easy and powerful items are usually protected by some powerful foes.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Universe #14

Sep 12, 2017

TMNT Universe #14 (Karai's Path 3 of 4) is another excellent issue that is making some “bad-guys” into interesting well-rounded characters while introducing some new and old characters into the ever growing IDW TMNT Universe. The creative team is firing on all cylinders and I am very excited to see how they wrap up this story line in the next Issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Universe #15

Oct 19, 2017

I really enjoyed this four-part story overall, the only thing I was concerned about was it trying to make Karai too much of a “hero” type character, but this issue firmly rooted her as still a very “bad guy” type role. It was fun to root for her a little bit, but by the end of TMNT Universe #15, the reader understands that she is still a ruthless killer that has no qualms about killing anybody or anything. Karai is on a new path and it is not a good one if you are a Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtle or someone that happens to be standing in her way!

View Issue       View Full Review
5.5
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Universe #16

Nov 21, 2017

It feels like I may have been a little bit overly-harsh on TMNT Universe #16, but I was really looking forward to the Triceratons getting a two-issue story arc all about them (note this story is continuing in TMNT Universe #17) and was completely let down by this issue. The story failed to hold my attention and was very basic; the art, while not bad, was just very unimaginative and just lacked any kind of “pop” that the Triceratons need to jump off the page. The art is not bad but when you have other great artists on this series and the other TMNT ongoing series doing some really great things it really makes this stand out as very basic and boring.TMNT Universe #16 just fails to do anything exciting and, sadly, is just an okay comic book.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Universe #17

Dec 19, 2017

I might be being a little harsh on TMNT Universe #17, but this issue and the previous issue had such potential in followingthe Triceratons' rebellion against the Utrom Empire thatwhat we got was a big letdown, especiallyfor the $4.99 price tag. Really the only high point is that this storyline is over, and we get a new creative team hopping on with issue #18 who will hopefully bring TMNT Universeback to the awesome comic it has been in the past.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Universe #18

Jan 2, 2018

After the past two lackluster issues of this series (see the reviews here), TMNT Universe #18 has it back on track. Paul Allor writes a fun one-and-done story about the Turtles trying to escape a building full of people. The dialogue is fantastic and Allor once again shows why he is just a great writer. TMNT Universe #18 is also aided by some beautiful artwork by Tyler Boss. His more animated style is perfectly suited for this type of story and he lays out the issue perfectly. TMNT Universe #18 is just a fun/silly type issue that was just a delight to read!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Universe #19

Feb 6, 2018

TMNT Universe #19 was a fun start to a new two-partstoryline that will introduce some new mutants into IDW's TMNT Universe. Ian Flynn has a great clasp on these characters and weaves an exciting story, while Dave Wachter and Ronda Pattison deliver some wonderful art. The backup story will definitely catch your attention for its overall creepiness that will continue in TMNT #81 after the “Invasions of Triceratons” storyline!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Universe #20

Mar 20, 2018

Overall TMNT Universe #20 was a solid ending to the two-part story. While nothing crazy happened, it did set up Null as a new threat and teased something bigger happening with them. The same can be said about the art; while it was not crazy good it was still pretty solid. The backupstory was fantastic as Manning used four pages to dig into the Turtles' heads perfectly. It also made me want Adam Gorham and Brittany Peer to team up again real soon!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Universe #21

Apr 17, 2018

The main story was some fantastic storytelling by Paul Allor. He made the political negotiations between the Utroms and Triceratons very engaging and dramatic. Mark Torres and Ronda Pattison delivered some wonderfully detailed art as well. The backup story was the perfect complement to the dramatic main story, as Woody got the spotlight to deliver some pizzas! TMNT Universe #21 is a well-done comic that fills in the gaps from the main ongoing TMNT series and is just a delight to read!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Universe #22

May 15, 2018

Look, I know giant walking and talking dinosaurs discussing peace treaties with the alien brain-looking creatures does not sound super intriguing, but trust me, it is great. Paul Allor wrote a fantastic two-part story that will have definite repercussions in the TMNT Universe as a whole. With some great artwork by Mark Torres and Ronda Pattison, this has been a wonderful little tale of politics. The backup story in this issue is good, nothing crazy. but nice little story with some fun art.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Universe #25

Jul 31, 2018

TMNT Universe #25 is a wonderful way to end this series. I hate to see it go. TMNT Universe has been a great series to showcase great creators and add to IDW's TMNT lore. I enjoyed the use of 1-4 issue stories that added some tremendous depth to characters that rarely got the spotlight. The short stories that showed even with four pages you can tell some heart-wrenching tales. Having Leonardo traverse the astral plane is a perfectway to end the series, as it still adds to the ongoing story of the TMNT world and calls back to the first four issues. More than likely TMNT Universe is going away to make room for the return of theMacro series soon to be released, which makes sense, but this series will still be missed.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Thanos (2016) #14

Dec 27, 2017

If you are a fan of God Country from Donny Cates and Geoff Shaw, then you know what you are in for with Thanos. These two take the magic from that series (read the reviews here) and plug it into the Mad Titan. They have turned this Thanos series into a must-read. Thanos #14 is an absolutelywonderful comic book and something that should not be missed. With Cates weaving a truly exciting and interesting story and with beautiful art by Geoff Shaw andAntonio Fabela, Thanos truly is “winning!”

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Thanos (2016) #15

Jan 25, 2018

Thanos is a series everybody should be reading! With an epic scope and feel to it, while still maintaining a personal feel to the story, it is just a superb comic book. Geoff Shaw and Antonio Fabela are doing some absolutely stunning artwork in Thanos and making it a treat for the eyes. Do you want to know who or what the Fallen One is? Read Thanos #15. Do you want to know who the Cosmic Ghost Rider is? Read Thanos #15. Really, if you just want to read a great comic book go back and pick up Thanos #13 and #14, then pick up Thanos #15 and bask in the Mad Titan's greatness!

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Thanos (2016) #16

Mar 1, 2018

Thanos continues to be a fantastic series and the praise it is getting is well-deserved. Cates' writing is top-notch and the combination of Geoff Shaw and Antonio Fabela delivers some awe-inspiring art. Thanos #16 delivers bombastic action, laugh-out-loud comedy and some good introspective character study. This is the best book Marvel Comics is putting out right now and is one of the best comic books out right now period. The creative team is firing on all cylinders and it does not seem like they are letting up anytime soon!

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Thanos (2016) #17

Mar 21, 2018

I am running out of good things to say about this series. This creative team is pure magic and theyhave unleashed it on this Thanos series! The story is epic yet also has a down to earth feel while the art continues to be some of the best in the industry. Thanos #17 is a fantastic continuation of this story and series, which is to no surprise.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Thanos (2016) #18

Apr 11, 2018

I had a feeling when Donny Cates and Geoff Shaw were announced on this series that it was going to be epic after reading and loving God Country. I just did not know how epic it would turn out to be. Their run on Thanos has been incredible; with each and every issue they have delivered a story that mesmerizes the reader from page to page.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Thanos (2016): Legacy #1

Sep 6, 2018

Thanos Legacy #1 is a great start to this story and a good follow up to the Thanos Wins storyline. Cates seems to be one of the few writers concerned about continuity in the Marvel Universe which makes my comic geek heart swell. If you're at all invested in The Infinity Wars story then you definitely want to pick this up as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
That Texas Blood #1

Jun 3, 2020

If you like No Country for Old Men then That Texas Blood #1 is right up your alley. I am not 100% sold just yet, just because the story just needed a little bit more of "catch". But it is good enough to keep me coming back for another issue. The art is splendidly well done and a great first look at Jacob Phillips' sequential work.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
That Texas Blood #2

Jul 29, 2020

That Texas Blood #2 is a solid start to a story arc for this series. It also gives the reader more of a “footing” of what this series is going to be about. It gives us a little clearer understanding of what we are in for. There is a nice tension and mystery built up throughout the pages in this second issue. Those looking for a new crime book or a murder mystery with a bit of a twist to it, I would definitely recommend picking up That Texas Blood #2.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
The Autumnlands #14

Jan 5, 2017

The Autumnlands #14 is the final installment in this arc and the book continues to impress and keep the reader interested in this ongoing fantasy, adventure mystery. The creative team is firing on all cylinders and continually put out a great story with each issue. After the events of this issue, the reader is left with more questions than answers. Will Dusty and Learoyd be able to continue on their quest to save The Autumnlands and will we find the truth about this world and its "Champion"?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Ballad of Sang #1

Mar 8, 2018

I was surprisedat how much I liked The Ballad of Sang #1. The only reason I read itwas it had Ed Brisson'sname on it and I have been digging his Iron Fist series from Marvel. I am having trouble expressing why I liked this book so much. The story was not anything new or crazy and the art was good but nothing crazy exceptional. There is just something about The Ballad of Sang #1 that spoke to me. Maybe it is because I am a fan of that type of cinema, or that the style of the series just speaks to me. I don't really know; all I know is I dig it, man, and that's all that matters!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Ballad of Sang #3

May 18, 2018

The Ballad of Sang #3 is a great midpoint issue for this five-partseries. It is a nice “calmer” issue to get us geared up for the final two issues. Look, I am not going to tell you this is the greatest book ever, but man it is just a lot of fun. It is like a good '80s action movie"it is probably not going to win a lot of rewards or praise, but you sit down to watch it and enjoy every second of it!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
The Ballad of Sang #4

Jun 12, 2018

Once again: I am not going to act like The Ballad of Sang is the greatest comic I have ever read. It has its problems, the art is not perfect and the story is lacking some character depth. But, that being said, it is a lotof fun to read. From the mayhemand violence Sang brings, to the odd gangs with their themes and odd style. Sang is one of those “comfort” comics that you can pick up and know it is going to be a good time. It may not be perfect but it is a lot of fun just to sit back and enjoy.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Ballad of Sang #5

Jul 19, 2018

The Ballad of Sang is a superbly done homage to '70s-'80s B action/Kung-Fu movies. Much like those movies, they aren't going to win any awards or inspire you to do anything, but they are a ton of fun. The Ballad of Sang succeedsin being that. The story is not rock-solidand has all these goofy aspects, but that is what makes me love it. I like seeing all these weirdly-dressed gangs and over the top situations. If you like these types of stories then I can guaranteeyou will enjoy The Ballad of Sang!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
The Best Defense: Doctor Strange #1

Dec 13, 2018

Not having read the other The Best Defense titles I am not exactly sure how this fits in. But you can pick up The Best Defense: Doctor Strange #1 (part 3) and enjoy the story without having any previous knowledge of the other titles or what is happening in the ongoing Doctor Strange series. That is a great credit to Gerry Duggan; he tells a complete story while setting up the new The Defenders series. The art from Greg Smallwood is more than worth the price of admission. As always, he delivers some superb visuals that are stunning to look at.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Crow: Hack/Slash #1

Jun 25, 2019

That being said, there was a lot I enjoyed about this issue, even though I am totally confused about what Vlad is and what a “slasher” is. I did find Cassie and Vlad compelling characters. The dialogue is fantastic and I did find the characters and plot very interesting. I also really like the brighter coloring work and was surprised about how well it fits the story. It also has a great cliffhanger ending that has me on board for the next issue. I am very interested to see what Seeley does now that the story is really ready to get going!

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Crow: Hark the Herald #1

Nov 26, 2019

I was really hoping for something fun and interesting with a The Crow Christmas tale. While The Crow: Hark the Herald has a fun concept, it just feels a little too bland story- and art-wise. It is not bad, and if you like The Crow stories then you will probably like this, but also nothing about it really stands out about it, either.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
The Crow: Memento Mori #1

Mar 27, 2018

Look, I am a huge fan of James O'Barr's original The Crow comic and of the originalmovie. I know The Crow has not fared well in other mediasince the first movie (thereboot may finally get made), but therehave been some pretty solid comics (check out The Crow: Curare). So far The Crow: Memento Mori may be another solid installment to the comic book series. Dark-humored dialoguecombined with picturesque art give this troy a fantastic feeling. I feel like the creative team is hitting everything I want in a The Crow story. The creators feel like they have an interesting story that they are just starting. Plus really you can't go wrong with Matteo Scalera backup story. That dude is fantastic!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
The Crow: Memento Mori #2

Apr 17, 2018

The Crow: Memento Mori is a story you are not going to want to miss. The main story continues to be wonderfully told and delivers a tale about a boy who did not get to live much of a life before it got taken away. The Crow: Memento Mori #2 also has a great call back to the soundtrack to the original The Crow movie. Just saying you should listen to this song while reading this issue. These short stories continue to be amazingly well done. Davide Frun brings a short story that will stick with readers long after this issue is put down!

View Issue       View Full Review
6.9
The Crow: Memento Mori #3

May 29, 2018

The Crow Memento Mori #3 was a good issue. I did not like it as much as the first two but it was still solid. The art continues to be great and a real high point for this series. The story slumped a little bit as the big reveal was not that shocking, but has me more interested as to the whys that will be revealed in the next issue. The backup story was not as strong as the previous two issues either. The series as a whole has been interesting; this issue just slumped a little bit.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
The Crow: Memento Mori #4

Jul 10, 2018

Overall I was enjoying The Crow Memento Mori. It wasn't the greatest thing ever, but it tells a good The Crow storywith some interesting modifications. Then this issuehit and completely blew me away. If you have read this series or one issue and thoughtyou knew where this was going, well you don't. What delightfulsurprise this issue turned out to be! It's a must read!

View Issue       View Full Review
10
The End (2020): Doctor Strange #1

Jan 29, 2020

After reading Doctor Strange: The End #1, I knew I was going to score it high, but I wasn't sure if it was a 10/10. I don't give out a lot of perfect scores; because, I feel like it diminishes the value of the score. But after reading the issue I couldn't get the story out of my head. It brought up all kinds of ideas in my mind. I couldn't stop thinking of the world the creators made and the adventure they brought me along on. To me, that is the hallmark of a perfect score. I just can't it out of my mind, from the visuals to the dialogue. I caught myself thinking about it for a while. So Doctor Strange: The End #1 gets a 10/10 from me!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Few #1

Jan 18, 2017

The Few #1 Conclusion: The Few #1is a fantastic first issue that sets up a new world and characters wonderfully all in one issue. The cliffhanger ending is perfect for this series and something that will have the reader coming back. Sherman's scratchy pencil styling and dark muted colors really set the tone and mood for the series. While Lewis plots an intriguing story that will have readers on their toes for the next few issues. While The Few does seem from a first glance a “basic” dystopian American future story, Lewis and Sherman prove that they have some tricks up their sleeves and that you need to pay attention to this series.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
The Few #3

Mar 23, 2017

The Few is turning into a fantastic mini-series about someone who has grown up being told one thing and believing one way and then something in their life dramatically changes that. What happens when your views or beliefs are changed, can a tiger truly change its stripes and how do you atone for the sins of your past self? Sean Lewis and Hayden Sherman continue to put together a truly engaging story about possible change and redemption and what happens next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
The Immortal #1

Aug 27, 2018

The Immortal #1 is has a rhythm all its own. While I am not 100% sure where the story is going, it has me hooked.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
The Immortal #2

Sep 1, 2018

If you are a fan of sci-fi adventures in the vein of Star Wars, John Carter of Mars, The 5th Element or Anime and Mangas like Cowboy Bebop then you are doing yourself a disservice by not picking up The Immortal.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
The Kill Lock #1

Dec 24, 2019

The Kill Lock #1 was one of those weird books for me. I had no clue what it was about and just started reading it. Also, it did not click for me right off the bat. It took until about halfway through to where I came around on the art and story and really started digging it. By the end of the issue, I was hooked and excited to see where the story was going and more about these characters.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
The Kill Lock #2

Jan 22, 2020

After reading The Kill Lock #2 I am just infatuated with this story and want to see where it is going. The characters all have interesting backstories and play off each other so well. Ramondelli has also done a fantastic job of building up this crazy robot world of The Kill Lock. It has its own set of rules, planets, and all kinds of wonderful sci-fi things. Ramondelli also makes the characters relatable. You can feel for these characters and really be put into their "shoes". It all comes together to form a story you are not going to want to miss out on.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.8
The Lost Boys #1

Oct 14, 2016

Fans of The Lost Boys movie will enjoy this continuation of the characters. It has the right feel and tone from the movie. The ending of this first issue shakes up the status quo from the movie and promises us this next five issues are going to do more exploring of these characters and what this new threat brings. Fans of The Lost Boys will certainly enjoy this book and definitely (for now) serves as a worthy sequel to the cult classic movie.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Lost Boys #2

Nov 11, 2016

I was really excited about this series when it first was announced being a huge The Lost Boys movie fan. After the first issue just being okay, I was a little bit more skeptical about this series. Well, issue #2 sets those worries to rest. Tim Seeley really hit it out of the park after that first set up issue. He has the voice of these characters down and is doing a great job of exploring them and fleshing them out more. The art still serves the story well, while not groundbreaking it catches the characters and the world very well and makes you feel like you are back in "The Murder Capital of the World". This being a six issue mini series is perfect, it has given this team time to explore and set up things that could not have been done in four issues. I am not going to spoil anything but Tim Seeley knows what the fans want and he delivers. I still believe!

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Lost Boys #3

Dec 15, 2016

Conclusion: Overall The Lost Boys #3 (of 6) is turning into a fun little "miniseries"/ sequel to the original movie. There are some fun, novel concepts that fans will truly enjoy. I am actually surprised this even happening! In that the movie has enough fans and that the small number of those fans that actually buy and read comics cannot be that much. So I can't imagine this is doing super well sale wise, if your are not a fan of the movie I really can't imagine someone just randomly reading this. All that said I am enjoying this book and it is a fun read month to month. No it doesn't blow me away, but it's fun and a nice escape, sometimes that's all I really want from a comic. So yes "I still Believe!"

View Issue       View Full Review
4.5
The No Ones #1

Jun 25, 2019

Overall the story just falls flat. It has a lot of potential, but it also needs a lot of work to get the reader invested in this world and wanting to come back for more.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
The Six Million Dollar Man (2019) #1

Mar 6, 2019

For someone who doesn't really care or know anything about The Six Million Dollar Man, I had a fun time reading The Six Million Dollar Man #1. I think in the end the combination of how Steve Austin was written as a bit of a goof and the "Archie" styling of the art won me over as an overall theme. If you are a fan of The Six Million Dollar Man I figure you will enjoy this. If you have never seen or heard anything about the show then this is a great jumping-on point.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
The Spirit: The Corpse-Makers #1

Feb 1, 2017

Conclusion:Will Eisenr's The Spirit in The Corpse Makers #1 (of 5) is a great start to a mystery story. Francesco Francavilla as the only creator on the book uses his writing and artistic abilities to make this series stand out. His great use of colors and pulp styling gives The Spirit a great creepy vibe to the story. The Spirit being the original pulp/noir superhero it has been long awaited for Francavilla to get a hold of him and in this first issue he does not disappoint.

View Issue       View Full Review
4.8
The Surgeon #2

Aug 10, 2018

At its heart, I feel like The Surgeon #2 has a good core story. Dr. Jenny could be a very cool character if they let her breathe a little bit. I know from the first issue that she is awesome; you don't have to keep reminding me every page"that makes her less cool. The art has a lot of fantastic detail and does a great job of building this world. It just has some technical difficulties that do not fit well with the sequential storytelling. There are some really good things at the core of The Surgeon, but there are also many flaws as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
The Terrifics #1

Feb 28, 2018

Overall I enjoyed TheTerrifics #1. It set up the series well while still being a fun first issue. This group of characters is definitely an odd bunch and you couldn't ask for a better writer than Jeff Lemire (see Blackhammer) and Ivan Reis to handle them. Joe Prado delivers some beautifulartwork throughout the issue whileMarcelo Maiolo colors keep a serious tone about the book. The creative team does a great job of balancing comedy, mystery, and adventure.The Terrificsare ready for an adventure in the Darkmultiverse. But the real question is, is the Darkmultiverse ready for The Terrifics?

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
The Terrifics #2

Mar 28, 2018

The Terrifics is turning into a fun, energetic series and that continues with The Terrifics #2. Jeff Lemire writes a captivating story that is part superhero, part adventure, part sci-fi and all fun. Withsomebeautiful art, The Terrifcsis just a delightful read. Will our heroes escape the dark multi-verse? Will they save the universe? Can they even get along long enough to make a decision? Find out in The Terrifics #2!

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
The Terrifics #4

May 23, 2018

The Terrifics #4 is a great issue and probably the best of the series so far. The team and family dynamics are slowly coming together and Jeff Lemire is doing a good job of slowly bringing these characters together. Adding “Doc” Shaner to the mix brings this series to the next level with some truly superb artwork (too bad he is only on for one more issue). This series has been good from the start but now I can say it is Terrific! (I'll see myself out.)

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
The Terrifics #5

Jun 27, 2018

The Terrifics #5 is another great entry in this series. Jeff Lemire continues to build and bring this team along incredibly well, giving us great character moments and making the reader actually care about these characters. “Doc” Shaner maybe the perfect artist for this series. The art has always been good in this series but the addition of Shaner has brought it to a new level. He catches the feel and tone of the series superbly well and brings a classic feel to these heroes. If you haven't jumped in on this series, the issue serves as a good starting point, and really, you are the only five issues behind, so no excuse not to grab some back issues and jump on board!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
The Terrifics #11

Jan 2, 2019

The Terrifics #11 is a great jumping-on point for any new readers or anybody else that has happened to have fallen off this series. I personally really loved this issue. With the team broken up and gone their separate ways, we get to dig a little bit more into their personal lives and feelings, which Jeff Lemire excels at. The art is great as well, and I am looking forward to seeing more from this team.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
The Terrifics #12

Jan 30, 2019

The Terrifics seems like a series that just keeps slowly chugging along in the background of what is happening at DC. It just quietly keeps going while consistently being good. This issue, in particular, was just a heck of a good time and a fun read. That is not an easy task as The Terrifics #12 is a mid-story arc issue, but Lemire shows his veteran status and just delivers a delightful superhero issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
The Terrifics #25

Feb 13, 2020

The Terrifics #25 is a fun story with some interesting developments for future issues. While the choose-your-own-adventure story can be a bit "overwhelming" at times, overall, it is a fun little twist on the storytelling for this issue. It also makes the read feel a lot longer (plus it is an extra-sized issue). The art is tremendously well done, and the issue is just a delight to look at, in and of itself.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.4
The Unsound #1

Jun 8, 2017

Unsound #1 is a great introduction into this story and world. Bunn writes an effective start to this horror/supernatural thriller. Jack T. Cole settles the reader in with a very distinct "creepy" color palette and art style. If you are looking for a new horror comic than look no further than Unsound #1. The creators deliver a great start to a very unsettling story that will make you think twice before turning off the lights or going down into a dark basement alone!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
The Unsound #2

Jul 5, 2017

Unsound #2 turns the horror up to 11 when things go from bad to worse for Ashli. Can she escape the horrors of theSaint Cascia Psychiatric Hospital? Who can she trust? Something very unsettling is happening, patients talking about a prince, razor blades appearing out of nowhere, strange men in suits taking patients, people disappearing. Strange things are a foot and Ashli is caught in the middle of it.Unsound is a terrific horror/thriller story you are not going to want to miss!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
The Unsound #5

Oct 24, 2017

The Unsound #5 starts to give us some answers to all this madness that has been happening throughout this series. We start to learn what the fascination is with Ashli is and how she plays into everything that has been happening. That being said I am still very confused about what exactly is happening and where the story is going to go from here. The Unsound is just a very strange book and although it is a bit confusing it just sucks the reader in with its overall strangeness. It is solicited as only having six issues so with the finale coming up I hope to make sense of this whole story. I have a feeling it might read a little bit better in trade format, but then again it is nice to have one issue of weirdness to ponder over for a month and to dissect before the next one comes out.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.9
The Unsound #6

Nov 21, 2017

I am not really sure how I feel about The Unsound #6; as a single issue and a final issue in this story arc, it does start to make sense. It has a nice open-ended conclusion that could lead nicely into a new story arc, or it works well as just a nice strange ending. I am still not 100% sure what was happening in this series. I feel it may read a lot better in a collection or trade. Going from issue to issue a month apart it was hard to keep up with what exactly was going on and what happened in the last issue. The art fit the story well and while I have had my nitpicks about the art, it does just give off an overall unsettling vibe that really goes well with the story. I will be interested to see how this reads as one full story, not broken into pieces.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
The Weatherman #1

Jun 12, 2018

The Weatherman #1 was a delight to read and caught me off guard by how good it was. Coming into this series completely blind was fantastic and the story caught me by surprise toward the end of the issue. It also has me very excited as the series continues. The story is imaginative an fun, with interesting characters and a world that is wide open for exploration. With Nathan Fox and Dave Stewart on art, The Weatherman #1 is stunning to look at. It had me hooked from the first page on. If you are looking for a good new comic to pick up, look no further than The Weatherman #1. It even has its own soundtrack!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
The Weatherman #2

Jul 17, 2018

Coming from a series that I picked up on a whim knowing nothing about The Weatherman is quickly becoming a seriesI look forward to reading every month. From the mystery, comedy, sci-fi action storywith wonderful character work, to the superb artwork from Nathan Fox and Dave Stewart, The Weatherman is a joy to read. With some shocking revelations in The Weatherman #2, Nathan Bright's life is never going to be the same again. And what they say is true: you can never trust the weatherman!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
The Weatherman #3

Aug 14, 2018

With each issue of The Weatherman, I am enjoying it more and more. It is not a perfect comic; sometimes the more over-the-top and wacky characters are a little off-putting, but it is also part of its charm. The story keeps asking interesting questions, and honestly, it is a fun read each and every month. The creative team works extremely well together and has really brought the world of The Weatherman to life. Each issue keeps me fully engaged until the end and awaiting the next.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.6
The X-Files X-Mas Special #2016

Dec 22, 2016

If you are a fan of The X-Files and what a Christmas story to read then this will be a great book for you. You don't have to worry about knowing what is happening in the ongoing comic series. As long as you are familiar with the show you can jump right in. This was a fun holiday one-shot that plays well within the X-Files universe.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The X-Files: Case Files: Hoot Goes There? #1

Jul 17, 2018

The "monster of the week" episodes were always my favorite X-Files episodes, so this Case Files series seemed to be custom made for me to enjoy. I continued to be impressed by how well these writing teams have captured the tone of the show and successfully transferred it to comic book form. The art continues to be a good match of character likeness while not eliminating the individual artist's style. If you are an X-Files fan you should go back and pick up the two issues of Florida Man and then jump on board with TheX-Files: Case Files " Hoot Goes There #1.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The X-Files: Case Files: Florida Man #1

Apr 18, 2018

The X-Files Case Files is exactly what I love about The X-Files! I never really cared too much about the convoluted overarching story. I just loved the “monster of the week” and Mulder and Scully going on odd adventures. This is exactly what this series is and The X-Files Case Files Florida Man #1 (of 2) is a fantastic start to this new series. The creative team really does a superb job of catching that X-Files feel and bringing it into comic book form. All in all, this was a great first issue and something that any X-Files fan will enjoy!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.1
The X-Files: Case Files: Hoot Goes There? #2

Aug 29, 2018

The X-Files: Case Files " Hoot Goes There? #2 is solid, but stretches into Scooby-Doo territory by the end of the issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The X-Files: Case Files: Florida Man #2

May 22, 2018

I cannot imagine any X-Files fan not liking this two-partstory. It again feels like a “lost” episodeof the tv series and fits perfectly in The X-Files world. The creative team caught the style, tone, and tempo of the series perfectly and transferred it into comic book form. Which, if you have read any comic based on a television or movie property, you know is not easy to do. I like that IDW is doing these short two-part stories for this new “Case Files” series and I hope the new creative team on “Hoot Goes There” is as good as this one!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
TMNT / Usagi Yojimbo #1

Jul 26, 2017

If you are not familiar with the Usagi Yojimbo series, Stan Sakai and his connection to TMNT then I can see where this issue might throw off newer readers (plus the $7.99 price tag), but for the mastery of Stan Sakai it is well worth it. You can also purchase a hardcover edition of this Issue with some great character designs and drawings from Sakai. It has been over 20 years since TMNT and Usagi Yojimbo have met in comic book format! Fans of both series or just comic book fans in general are not going to want to miss out on this epic journey!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
TMNT: Dimension X #1

Aug 1, 2017

TMNT Dimension X #1 is a wild ride! The alien planet based on "emotional physics" is a really fun additive to the story and Allor uses this to great effect, while also developing Hakk-R into an even more formidable foe. While I like and dislike things about the art overall it is good in that department as well. With each issue of TMNT Dimension X, we are getting a different creative team on a different planet, it is going to be exciting to see what weird creatures pop up next week and the following weeks.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
TMNT: Dimension X #2

Aug 9, 2017

TMNT Dimension X #2 is another fun entry into this 5 week mini -series. Ulises Farinas, Erick Freitas and Michael Dialynas do a superb job in this Issue delivering a great story about a guilt-ridden guardsman finding a new family. If you are reading the main IDW TMNT ongoing comic there is no reason to miss out on this mini-series. Be sure to check it out next week as we enter a new planet with a new group of creators taking on the weird world of TMNT and Dimension X.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
TMNT: Dimension X #3

Aug 15, 2017

TMNT Dimension X #3 is just an absolute blast! The newest creative team to tackle this 5-week weekly mini-series brings the fun and action to a new level. What could be more exciting than having the Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles lace up their wrestling boots, throw on some tights and enter the squared circle? You are not going to want to miss this adventure in Dimension X. Stay tuned as next week we get a new creative team to bring the Turtles to a new planet and on an all new adventure!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
TMNT: Dimension X #4

Aug 22, 2017

TMNT Dimension X #4 is another wild ride and a great adventure. I am really enjoying all of these characters that are being introduced in this series (I am still holding out for King Lion Heart or some version of the Punk Frogs to show up!). The creative team does a wonderful job of bringing this new world to life and telling a fun story along the way. The character interactions are great, there is some action, comedy and suspense all rolled up into one issue. The brothers only have one more witness to save before the trial of Krang will they complete their mission or fall short of the finish line, find out next week!

View Issue       View Full Review
6.3
TMNT: Dimension X #5

Aug 29, 2017

Overall the TMNT Dimension X mini-series has been a success; we have gotten some great characters and interesting stories that will certainly fill in the gaps for the “Trial of Krang” story line. TMNT Dimension X #5 just happens to be not as good as the previous issues. It maybe that this is a weekly series and being the last issue the story line is a little played out. The characters introduced are not a great as the previous ones and the story is honestly just kind of boring. If you are heavily invested in IDW's TMNT Universe you are going to obviously want to pick this up and it is not all bad, but I would also say you could skip this and be totally fine. Now that all the witnesses have been found it is time to return to Neutrino for the Trial of Krang continuing in TMNT #74!

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Tony Stark: Iron Man #2

Jul 19, 2018

Dan Slott is only two issues into his run but so far, so good. Tony Stark: Iron Man #2 adds some interesting layers to the story as it continues to unfold. Dealing with Tony and Rhodes coming back from the dead and the psychological effects of that while still having this background plot slowly boiling to the surface with the Controller makes for a great ongoing story. Slott obviously likes to play the long game with his stories, so we will see where this goes. The art is solid. While it is a little too clean and pristine for my personal taste, I do really like the armor designs. Overall, Tony Stark: Iron Man #2 is off to a solid start.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.5
Turok (2019) #1

Jan 8, 2019

Turok debuts with an energetic first issue, which turns into a pretty bloody good time. Now,Turok #1 is not perfect; the story feels like it needed to be a lot longer to fully hold me and the art needs a little work. But, it also has me coming back for issue #2 so that is not for nothing either. Turok #1 has a lot to offer fans of the characters and new readers alike.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.1
Turok (2019) #2

Feb 20, 2019

Marz does a good job of keeping you interested in the story as, even though Turok isn't one of those books I will clamor to read next month, it does have me interested to see what happens next.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.8
Turok (2019) #3

Apr 23, 2019

Turok #3 is not a bad comic but it is not particularly great either. It is a solid action adventure story and not much else. Ron Marz does excel in the final page reveals that somehow keep reeling me in for the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Turok (2019) #4

Jul 20, 2019

This is probably my favorite issue of this Turok series so far. While not perfect and, honestly, I am not fully invested in the characters or what is going on I still find it all very interesting at the same time. The art seems to have improved from the other issues and made for a dynamic read. Turok #4 is a very fast read. Once the story starts Marz does not let up or slow down. In a way that is good, as the story gets to where it needs to be. But also for a $3.99, 22-page story, I feel like we need a little bit more sustenance. I do like where Turok #4 leaves us off story-wise. It is something new and interesting that I want to see what Marz does with. So, he has kept me on for a few more issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
5.5
Turok (2019) #5

Sep 4, 2019

For the most part, I had been enjoying this Turok series for someone who didn't know much about the property it was an interesting look into the character. Turok #5 just felt rushed to fit everything in and wrap up the series. The ending was okay and actually had me more excited about what stories could come from that than the actual issue itself. The art sadly is just boring and uninspired. While it is not terrible art it could have brought the book up a few pegs by being better.

View Issue       View Full Review
5.5
U.S.Agent (2020) #3

Feb 24, 2021

With only two more issues to go, I am at a bit of a crossroads with U.S. Agent #3. There are some individual things that I like about this issue and series as a whole. When Priest focuses on John Walker, the series tends to shine more. When Priest veers from that, it seems to struggle to find ground or enough space to get Priest's full thoughts out. The art has some good panels and pages here and there but, as a whole, just is not as high-quality as one would expect. All this combines so that after three issues, with only two left to go, I question if is it worth it to pick up the final two issues. The art probably isn't going to get better, but I am interested to see where this leaves John Walker as a character.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Ultramega by James Harren #1

Mar 16, 2021

Ultramega #1 delivered exactly what you want from James Harren's kaiju book. Now, the story may have some issues at the jump, but I am still very interested to see where we are going. The art is outstanding; you want giant bloody battles, you get them in Ultramega #1. James Harren is one of the best artists out there and this issue showcases all of his talents and more on each and every page.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Ultramega by James Harren #2

Apr 22, 2021

I am not sure exactly what to make of Ultramega #2 and the series itself right now. These first two issues have been wildly different and I honestly not sure where the story is going right now. I certainly enjoy some parts of it, but as a whole, I am just more confused than anything. The art though will keep me coming back for more. The issue is a serious visual splendor to look at. I really want to like this series, so I am hoping the story starts to come together in the next few issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Uncanny X-Men (2018) #1

Nov 15, 2018

The first 37 pages of Uncanny X-Men #1 were great; it was easy to jump on board as a new reader. It was a solid story that was engaging, interesting, and fun and left on a fantastic cliffhanger. The art was fantastic as well, delivering some great visuals from start to finish. The three epilogue back-up stories did not fare so well. It really felt like they threw the pacing of the book off and they honestly felt a little unnecessary. The art also suffered in these backup stories, as it was not terrible but it did not hold up to what was presented in the first part.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Usagi Yojimbo (2019) #1

Jun 18, 2019

If you enjoy Usagi Yojimbothen you don't need me to convince you to pick up this issue. If you have never tried out this series then Usagi Yojimbo #1 is as good as a jumping-on point as you can get for such a long-running series. Stan Sakai's renowned work continues to shine and it is worth your time and money.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Usagi Yojimbo (2019) #2

Jul 17, 2019

So, I probably scored Usagi Yojimbo #1 a little too high, but hey hindsight is 20/20. This issue is much clearer and actually gets the story moving in interesting directions. I love the ghastly, macabre tone of the issue and there is actually some pretty creepy visuals throughout the issue. Still a little odd of a start for the series at IDW but, it is not like Stan Sakai was going to re-boot Usagi Yojimbo just for IDW. It still works though, if you have never read Usagi Yojimbo you can still read this and enjoy.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Usagi Yojimbo: Wanderer's Road #3

Jan 26, 2021

I mean, I hate to even really put a “score” on Usagi Yojimbo: Wanderer's Road #3. It is a classic Usagi tale that I feel really anyone can enjoy. If you have never read an Usagi Yojimbo story, or want to start, you could probably pick this issue up and enjoy it. Stan Sakai always delivers something to the reader out of an Usagi tale. Whether you learn a little about history or maybe a little about human nature and how to be a better person, Usagi always has something a little extra besides sword fights.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.8
Vampirella (2017) #0

Feb 1, 2017

Conclusion:Vampirella #0 is a very good issue. It has some great art and the story keeps the reader interested and engaged. I really still am not certain what exactly is happening in this issue besides the future plot and still have no clue who or what Vampirella is but Cornell did his job and has made me want to at least read the #1 issue when it is released to get some answers. This seems like a good start for a new Vampirella series and for me at least I plan to stick with it as long as the old skimpy costume does not rear its ugly head too often.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Vampironica #1

Mar 15, 2018

We did not learn much about what is going on or about the Vampires yet, but I did get the Buffy the Vampire Slayer movie type feel from the coverand the first few pages. That has me very excited for the rest of the series.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Vampironica #2

May 31, 2018

Vampironica is another hit in this Archie Horror line. Right now the story is pretty straightforward but that is not a bad thing. Vampironica #2 gets the gears in motion for what seems like some exciting tales to come. You cannot go wrong with Greg Smallwood on art and once again he shows why he is one of the best in the business. Vampironica has a classic horror feel to it that fits perfectly in comic book form!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Vampironica #3

Sep 8, 2018

Usually, a delay in a series hurts the story, but it did not affectVampironica #3 that much. It seems the delay issues might be solved, as we have change-up in artists coming for issue #4. The dynamic between Veronica and Dilton continues to be a surprisingly wonderful highlight of the series. The development of vampire-Veronica is also tons of fun. Greg and Megan Smallwood have hit a nice tone in Vampironica,a serious yet “campy” feel that makes it a great read. As always, Greg Smallwood's art is stellar and a joy to look at. His art helps the story flow tremendously well. It will be interesting to see if the change-up in artists affects the series going forward. For now, do yourself a favor and pick up Vampironica!

View Issue       View Full Review
5.5
Vampironica #5

Dec 14, 2018

Vampironica #5 is the end of the series, but then it is not. Somehow Vampironicais supposed to collide with Jughead: The Hunger later in 2019 in Jughead: The Hunger vs Vampironica. I won't spoil the ending to Vampironica but, I have no clue how that is going to happen? It does make me interested to see how they will make it work. Vampironica started off strong, but it kind of ends in a whimper. Vampironica #5 was okay, but it also could have been a lot better as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Venom (2018) #1

May 11, 2018

I am a bit on the fence with Venom #1. I like the story and where Donny Cates is taking it. The visual aspect of the series is great. The art team has some fantastic pages in this issue. I am just not sure how much I personally care about Venom and Eddie Brock. It has been a long time since 1995. Venom #1 is a put together nicely. But I am just not sure if I can get personally invested in Venom. However, if one person has the chops to make me care about Eddie it is Donny Cates. So after a good first issue, I am on board for at least a few more.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Venom (2018) #2

Jun 13, 2018

With Venom #2 I am enjoying this Venom series much more than I ever thought I would. Donny Cates is building an epic story while bringing good character development to Eddie Brock. The art team is truly incredible and works fantastically well together. Being vague to remain spoiler-free, but there is one page that is in space, just flip to that page and you will see how incredible this art team is. Venom #2 is just a good comic book, with a heck of a cliffhanger ending that has me very excited for the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Venom (2018) #3

Jun 27, 2018

Venom #3 was not my favorite issue of this series. It is not bad, it just lacks that emotion that I felt in the previous issue. Maybe I hold Donny Cates to a little higher standard from his previous work. The big reveal also did not have a big impact on me. I do like the implications of what is to come from this issue. It seems like from this Cates will be digging into more emotional aspects of Eddie Brock later. That puts me in a hard place for the story. As an issue it was okay, not bad but not great, and that being said, I like what it might lead to storywise later on. The visual aspect of Venom #3 continues to be fantastic and is a joy to look at.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Venom (2018) #16

Jul 10, 2019

Venom #16 for me is a great issue. Donny Cates gets his story back on course after taking a little detour with War of the Realms. Cates effectively reminds us of what happened previously in his story and also what happened in War of the Realms while setting up the Absolute Carnage event. The issue also serves as a solid almost one-shot story as well. The art is just fantastic; Juan Gedeon's style works superbly well, adding in some great coloring work from Jesus Aburtov and some stellar lettering from Clayton Cowles. This issue was an absolute delight to look at.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Victor LaValle's Destroyer #1

May 24, 2017

I came into Victor LaValle's Destroyer #1 (of 6) blindly not knowing anything about it, boy was I surprised within the first few pages.Victor LaVelle does a fantastic job of not making this a run of the mill "Frankenstein" story putting in characters and situations to give the book a real heart and human feelings. The art and colors match the series well and brings to eerie life. Victor LaValle's Destroyer #1 looks like it is going to be a great mini-series from BOOM! Studios and from what I can tell is nothing like they have published before. It is a refreshing take on the Frankenstein mythos.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
War of the Realms #1

Apr 3, 2019

War of the Realms #1 delivered exactly what I want from a big event comic: a big epic story that I could jump into. All my favorite heroes coming together and fighting a huge battle. Yeah, it is not "world-shattering" story or a thought-provoking piece, but it delivers what it is supposed to a big blockbuster event. The art matches that tenfold as Dauterman and Wilson make a marvelous team with some truly splendid pieces throughout the issue and overall sublime sequential work. Now, I don't know how I will feel as War of the Realms spreads out into a thousand different issues (literally), but for now, this main book is definitely worth your time and money.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
War Of The Realms Strikeforce: The Land of Giants #1

May 22, 2019

While this Strikeforce book doesn't really "add" anything to the continuation of the War of the Realms story it is a nice more detailed look into things that are happening. Tom Taylor does a wonderful job of balancing comedy and more serious aspects throughout this issue. The art team also does a great job of not only offering some beautiful visuals but nailing the comedic timing of different bits as well. If you have been enjoying War of the Realms, or just want a solid one-shot story then check this issue out.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
War of the Realms: The Punisher #1

Apr 17, 2019

War of the Realms: Punisher #1 (of 3) is a delightful little mini-series/tie-in to the huge War of the Realms event. It succeeds in its simple storytelling methods. It is a fun romp with the Punisher fighting off hordes of monsters and trying to help some people, with a nice little twist to keep you coming back for the next two issues. The art is great as well and just fun to look at. I mean like I said earlier, the book ain't going to win any awards or anything, but man it was a fun read!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
We Only Find Them When They're Dead #1

Sep 1, 2020

We Only Find Them When They're Dead #1 has a very catchy title (a little long) and has a nice sci-fi story to go along with it. The creative team creates solid ground for this series to launch from. We get a good set-up and start to a brand new world filled with tons of mystery and intrigue throughout. If you are looking for a new and interesting sci-fi story with a wild concept and some sleek visuals, then look no further than We Only Find Them When They're Dead #1.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
We Only Find Them When They're Dead #2

Oct 6, 2020

I liked We Only Find Them When They're Dead #2, but it wasn't as good as the first issue. The story didn't seem to flow together as well and the art was a bit muddled at times. Overall it wasn't bad, and I am still incredibly interested in this series and story. It just was a bit of a step down from the bombastic first issue. I am still excited to see where this team is taking this series and hope they pick it back up in issue #3.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Web Of Venom: Ve'Nam #1

Aug 31, 2018

Overall, Ve'Nam #1 serves as a good character builder for Rex Strickland and an enjoyable read. The art team did a wonderful job in bringing the book to life; the character details and colors add a grittier tone and feel to Web of Venom: Ve'Nam #1.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.8
Werewolf By Night (2020) #1

Oct 21, 2020

All in all I was a little bit disappointed with Werewolf by Night #1. It is not a terrible book, but it did not live up to my expectations, either. I think the story needs some work and needs to give the reader something to grasp onto. It just did not capture my attention through the issue. The art fares a bit better, but still not as dynamic and eye-catching as I was hoping for. It was, all combined, just a lackluster affair. It had some interesting points and ideas, but it all didn't come together to form something interesting in the end of this first issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
What If? (2018): Spider-Man #1

Oct 4, 2018

What If? Flash Thompson Became Spider-Man #1 is a solid What If? issue. It fits just about everything you want into a What If/alternate universe one-shot story, with little changeups and twist and turns. I guess it falls into the same problem of every What If? story in that it is easily forgettable after reading it. Yes, it was good and a fun read, but like most What If? stories, you probably won't remember much about it after you set the book down.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Winter Soldier (2012) #3

Feb 15, 2019

Winter Soldier #3 (of 5) is a great look and insight into the character of Bucky Barnes. Higgins is doing some fantastic work while Rod Reis delivers some delightful art. This is turning out to be a great little mini-series that I hope gains some more traction among readers. I feel like people are missing out on a very good read by not picking up Winter Soldier.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Winter Soldier (2018) #1

Dec 6, 2018

Winter Soldier #1 is a pleasant surprise. It had a well-executed concept that let Kyle Higgins expand upon Bucky Barnes' character. Higgins helped expand the character a little more for me. Though Rod Reis' art style is not my favorite, it works well for this series and fits with the tone of the story. All in all, this was an excellent first issue. It looks to be a pretty solid five-issue miniseries and I am very excited to see what happens next. That final page teaser was also excellent in building hype for the next issue!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Winter Soldier (2018) #3

Feb 15, 2019

Winter Soldier #3 (of 5) is a great look and insight into the character of Bucky Barnes. Higgins is doing some fantastic work while Rod Reis delivers some delightful art. This is turning out to be a great little mini-series that I hope gains some more traction among readers. I feel like people are missing out on a very good read by not picking up Winter Soldier.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Winter Soldier (2018) #5

Apr 11, 2019

I think a lot of people “slept on” this Winter Soldier mini-series. Which unfortunately happens to a lot of mini-series in the comic book world. Kyle Higgins for me really stuck the landing story wise in Winter Soldier #5. It had an ending that left me wondering and wanting more, yet satisfied with what I got at the same time. Rod Reis really impressed me with his work on this series. He did a fantastic job of bringing everything to life in this series with some great artwork. If you want a good solid contained story then I would implore you to pick up Winter Soldier #5 and the back issues or grab the trade when it comes out, you won't be disappointed.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.2
Wolverine (2020) #5

Sep 15, 2020

I enjoyed the concept and idea of Wolverine #5, and the issue itself was an okay read that felt like it was building up to something better. It just felt like the issue itself was rushed and cut off at the legs by having it go into “X of Swords” event coming up. While aslotieing in with the Fortnight comic story. I am though always a sucker for a good Marvel Universe Vampire/Dracula story so I can't really hate it. I do wish we were closer to Halloween! Hopefully the story picks back up around October.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Wonder Twins (2019) #1

Feb 13, 2019

It was a very smart idea to give the Wonder Twins to Mark Russell. His sharp writing and comedy skills can definitely make a series that should be terrible into a must read (see The Flintstones). The art fits the tone and feel of the issue. If you are looking for a good laugh you should definitely pick this up.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.8
Wonder Twins (2019) #2

Mar 14, 2019

Wonder Twins #2 is one of those “middle of the road” issues. It is good but not great. It is just a solid comic book. The writing is good but not as sharp or as “smooth” as Russell can be. The political commentary is a little too on the nose and doesn't have that good “bite” that Russell usually brings. The comments about the prison system get old by the end of the issue (it did get “Prison Song” by System of a Down stuck in my head). The art, again, is good solid art that fits the issue well, but also is nothing crazy or that memorable. There are some good sight gags and one-liners in Wonder Twins #2; it is just not as solid as the first issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Wonder Twins (2019) #3

Apr 10, 2019

Wonder Twins #3 is another solid entry into the series. If you liked the past two issues you will enjoy this one. I liked that the story had a little heart to it and a good message at the end. It changed up the story dynamics a little bit, while still being very goofy at some points. It has some good laughs and is thought-provoking at the same time, something that Russell excels at. Then again, it is not like I was clamoring to read Wonder Twins or would say it is a must-buy, either. It is good, but then again, after reading it, nothing stands out that much either.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Wonder Woman: Dead Earth #3

Jun 17, 2020

It is also wild that Johnson can do what he did at the end of the issue and also have your heart break a few scenes before that. He, again, knows how to balance things so well. If you have been reading this series you obviously don't need me to convince you to buy Wonder Woman: Dead Earth #3. If you haven't, you need to go buy this series now.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Wulfborne #1

Mar 7, 2019

Wulfborne #1 reminded me a lot of one of my all-time favorite comics, the original The Crow from James O'Barr. The black and white color palette, the morose/gloomy tone. It gives me that vibe, but then adding in a little more cartoony style with some fantasy/sword-and-sorcery type story points. I was excited about Wulfborne #1 when I first heard about it and the first issue did not disappoint. Middleton does some fantastic work and he is a creator to keep an eye on.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Wulfborne #2

Apr 19, 2019

You can get issues #1 and #2 right now and Wulfborne #3 will be out next week, April 24, 2019.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
X-Men (2019) #1

Oct 16, 2019

A new era for Marvels Mutants is here, and there are some very interesting things that have been set up and tons of story points to be touched on. It is all starting here with X-Men #1, and fans new and old are not going to want to miss out on this.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
X-Men (2019) #3

Dec 5, 2019

Everything about X-Men #3 is solid. The story is good and brings in some new and interesting characters into the fold. The art is all-around good. The colors catch the brightness of the landscape well, while still keeping the tone of the story. I do have a few hangups about the villains and how what happens in the issue. Also, the whole Krakoa thing seems to be falling apart super-quickly after it was built up as such a huge deal.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Xena: Warrior Princess (2019) #1

Apr 16, 2019

It does have some beautiful covers and variant covers, so it has that going for it. Fans of the show may have a better perspective. If you are a Xena fan I would love to hear your thoughts on the issue? Did you like it? Was it true to the character? Let us know in the comments.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
Year of the Villain: Sinestro #1

Aug 7, 2019

Sinestro: Year of the Villain #1 was a good one-shot story from Mark Russell. It weaved in the normal Mark-Russell-y commentary while giving Sinestro a different edge to his character. The art was solid; honestly, I can't say much about it. It was not particularly bad or particularly good. It was there and served the story, but nothing really stands out.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
Young Justice (2019) #1

Jan 10, 2019

Young Justice #1 is an exciting, fun and all around enjoyable first issue. Yeah, if you think about the plot and how it fits into the DC Universe it becomes way less enjoyable but if you go with the Ifanboy podcast motto of “nothing makes sense, nothing matters”then it is not so bad. The art while at times a bit confusing when the action gets too heavy services the book well. We get some fantastic action shots and some great looking pages. Young Justice #1 might not be the greatest first issue, but it was an enjoyable read and I am definitely on board for more!

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Young Justice (2019) #2

Feb 6, 2019

I had some high hopes going into Young Justice #2. I liked the first issue pretty well and was hoping it would build from there. Unfortunately, the story in this issue floundered. There was no excitement or energy to this issue. We really didn't learn anything besides some things about Wonder Girl that could have been paired done to a page or two instead of taking up half the issue. Bendis's dialogue really didn't flow well in this issue either and the whole pacing of the issue felt off. The art was good and was the highlight of the issue. The only thing that really has me coming back for issue #3 is we get to learn about Conner Kent “Superboy” and what he has been up to.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Young Justice (2019) #6

Jun 5, 2019

All that being said, I am still hanging on reading Young Justice. Like I said, there is just something about all these characters that I find extremely interesting. If I knew what exactly it was I would tell you, but seeing this group of characters together just makes me want to continue reading their adventures together.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Young Justice (2019) #8

Sep 11, 2019

Maybe this series just isn't for me, and that is okay. Young Justice #8 will probably be the last I read of the series for a while.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Young Justice (2019) #13

Feb 5, 2020

I am officially back on the Young Justice bandwagon with issue #13. This was a really fun read and a start to a new and interesting story arc. The story and plot felt a little more "centered" and little slower paced which helped out a lot.

View Issue       View Full Review

Reviews for the Week of...

December

November

More